Professional Documents
Culture Documents
User Manual
PSP-M-08/2006-E
Manual
Professional / Release 17.2
PSP-M-08/2006-E
No part of this manual may be reproduced or copied and distributed by any form
of electronic means (copy, microfilm, etc.) without written permission of KIWI
Software GmbH.
KIWI Software GmbH does not guarantee, either explicitly or implicitly, the
suitability for sale or the capability for particular applications of these materials
which are supplied only in the existing form. KIWI Software GmbH does not
assume any liability for collateral, accidental or indirect damages arising from
the purchase and the application of these materials.
Where a liability is assumed by KIWI Software GmbH, such liability is limited to
the purchase price of the materials described herein.
KIWI Software GmbH reserves the right to revise or to modify this product at
their own discretion. This user’s guide describes the product at the time of
publication. This description may not be applicable to future versions of this
product.
Please note: all indicated trade names are registered trade marks of the
companies concerned.
Page II
Table of Contents
A INTRODUCTION 1
A.1 Introduction 1
A.1.1 General information 1
A.1.2 Installation of ProSteel 3D 3
A.1.3 System Requirements 8
Page III
B.3.6 Cutting Plane 7
B.3.7 Perspective View 9
Page IV
B.9.3 Gratings 7
B.9.4 Edged Plates 8
B.9.5 Additional Settings 11
B.11 3D-Modifications 1
B.11.1 Divide / Combine 2
B.11.2 Modify Shapes 13
B.11.3 Modify Plates 16
B.11.4 Wall Processing 18
B.11.5 Additional Settings 20
B.11.6 Notch 22
B.11.7 Outlet 26
B.11.8 Boolean Operations 29
B.14 Bolts 1
B.14.1 Bolting parts 2
B.14.2 Bolt Style Management 4
B.14.3 Insertion of Threaded Rods 12
B.14.4 Sort 13
Page V
B.19 Shear Plates 1
B.24 Haunches 1
B.26 Groups 1
B.26.1 General Information about Groups 1
B.26.2 Creation and Processing of Groups 2
B.26.3 Check Groups 6
B.26.4 Settings 9
B.27 Positioning 1
B.27.1 Automatic Positioning 2
B.27.2 Manual Insertion 10
B.27.3 Automatic Insertion (Distribution) 14
B.27.4 Other Auxiliary Commands 19
B.27.5 Add Drawing Number 21
B.27.6 Depiction of Position Flags 22
B.27.7 Management of Styles 26
Page VI
B.31 Containment List 1
B.31.1 Creation of Containment List 1
B.31.2 Processing of List Styles 3
B.31.3 Management of List Styles 8
B.31.4 Processing the Content of Drawing Containment List 9
C DETAILING 1
C.1 DetailCenter 1
C.1.1 The 2D-Detailing 1
C.1.2 Detailing with the Detail Center 3
C.1.3 General Information – Scale and Dimension Styles 9
C.1.4 Generalities Concerning Detail Types 11
C.1.5 Intelligent 2D-Details 16
C.1.6 Display of Construction Component Lists 18
C.1.7 Component Overview 25
C.1.8 Views Overview 38
C.1.9 Detail Block Overview (Insert) 47
C.1.10 Global Settings 53
C.1.11 Automatic Translation 59
C.1.12 Transfer Drawing Paths 62
C.1.13 Drawing Verification 64
C.1.14 Direct Detailing 69
C.1.15 Modification Management 71
C.1.16 Replace Detail Blocks 78
C.4 InsertExpress 1
C.4.1 Start InsertExpress 2
C.4.2 Manual Insertion Mode 4
C.4.3 Batch Insertion Mode 16
Page VII
C.4.4 Format File 18
C.16 2D-Cutout 1
D MISCELLANOUS 1
D.1 User-Defined Component Parts 1
D.1.1 Special Parts 1
D.1.2 Special Shapes 2
D.1.3 Weld Shapes 11
D.2 BlockCenter 1
D.2.1 Structure of the BlockCenter 2
D.2.2 Creation and Edition of Blocks 4
D.2.3 Insert Blocks 6
Page VIII
D.2.4 Display of Block Structure 8
D.2.5 Database of Block Data 11
E APPENDIX 1
E.1 Structural Element Staircase 1
Page IX
E.5 Structural Element Truss Girder 1
Page X
A Einführung
Introduction
Introduction
Page A - 2
Introduction
A.1 Introduction
Welcome to ProSteel 3D
You decided to buy our ProSteel 3D program because you are convinced that
you will cope with your daily tasks faster and in a more reliable way in the future
by using a CAD software package which is successful, well tried and tested all
over the world.
We are pleased that you selected a product of our company and we hope that
for a long time we will be your reliable partners.
Page A.1 - 1
Introduction
Due to the fact that the integration into the CAD system AutoCAD from
AutoDesk is the most extensive implementation at the moment, the description
of all functions of this manual refers to the version ProSteel 3D Professional for
AutoCAD.
When you bought ProSteel 3D for another platform other than AutoCAD or
another licence model (e.g. without detailing), the actual performance range of
your version may differ from this manual. In addition, there may be differences
due to intermediate updates of the program after publication of this manual.
Page A.1 - 2
Introduction
Insert the installation-CD into your CD-ROM-drive. If the installation doesn’t start
automatically, move to the directory \deutsch on the CD and then start the
program setup.exe.
Important Note: To install ProSteel 3D successfully, you need the administrator
rights for your computer.
The installation recognizes which CAD-systems have been installed if they have
their own ProSteel 3D version available.
Now, you can choose whether you want to install ProSteel 3D for example for
AutoCAD 2004, AutoCAD 2005 or AutoCAD 2006 or for several platforms
simultaneously. Then press the “Continue” button to continue the installation.
In the following, we assume an installation for AutoCAD 2006.
Page A.1 - 3
Introduction
You are now prompted to define the installation folder for the installation.
Normally, ProSteel 3D will be installed on the directory C:\Programme\Kiwi
Software GmbH\ProSteel 3D\R17.2\AutoCAD 2006; C:\Programme
corresponds to your program directory.
If you press the “Search” button, you can define the folder in which ProSteel 3D
V17.2 (here for AutoCAD 2006) has to be installed.
Page A.1 - 4
Introduction
The installation shows the license agreement between you and Kiwi Software
GmbH. Read through the license agreement carefully. If you agree with the
conditions, press the “Yes” button.
If you don’t agree and you want to cancel the installation, press the “No” button.
The configuration file is a text file and can easily be processed using the
Windows-Editor.
Page A.1 - 5
Introduction
Now the installation permits you to select certain components, such as shape
catalogues, COM-examples, roof-wall shapes and special shapes. After a
component has been selected, the files of the component will be installed.
On the right of the dialog, a size value is displayed, which approximately
corresponds to the volume of the files to be installed. After having selected the
desired components, press the “Continue” button.
Page A.1 - 6
Introduction
Finally, you specify which has to be the name of the icon on the desktop.
Then, the installation of ProSteel 3D for AutoCAD 2006 is finished. If you
selected further platforms, you have to repeat the above-mentioned steps. For
concluding information concerning the installation please refer to the
readme.txt file, displayed in the text editor. It can be exported on a printer,
if necessary.
Page A.1 - 7
Introduction
Hardware-Performance (Recommended)
Page A.1 - 8
Dialog Framework
The standard elements (lower button bar) as well as the general behaviour of
the dialogs are described below. When the different commands are described,
these things won’t be explained any more.
Page A.2 - 1
Dialog Framework
Dialog-Commands
OK
By clicking on this button, you close the dialog and the last settings such
as content of the dialog, position on the screen, selected dialog tab, etc.
are stored.
Depending on the command, you are prompted to continue with other things like
e.g. selection of component parts, etc.
CANCEL
By clicking on this button, you close the dialog and the command is
cancelled. If possible, the previous status is restored as it was before
selection of the command.
HELP
When you click on this button, the Online-help is opened.
TEMPLATE
By clicking on this button, you can save or load again the complete
settings of the dialog for the selected command under any template name
you like.
Here, another dialog of ProSteel 3D template management opens which is
described separately in this subordinate chapter.
CLONE
By clicking on this button, you can read the settings of an existing
connection and import it onto another one. This function is especially
suitable for automatic connections.
It helps you to obtain an identical connection to an existing one, the exact
default settings of which, however, you don’t know any more. For more detailed
information, please refer to the descriptions of the individual functions.
Page A.2 - 2
Dialog Framework
UPDATE
When you click on this button, the connection, structure or the component
part are updated according to your default settings.
Normally in ProSteel 3D, you are working in a dynamic mode. Each
modification of a parameter is directly translated into a modification of the
corresponding object so that you can see the results immediately.
In case of very complex structures or less powerful computers, it may be
reasonable to deactivate this automatic update in the global settings of ProSteel
3D and to activate it manually if need be.
ROLL-OVER
By clicking on this button, you alternatively switch on or off the so-called
Roll-Over-mechanism.
When RollOver is switched on, the visible dialog area depends on the
current mouse position. For more detailed information, please refer to the
separate description in this chapter.
GRAPHIC
When you click on this button, the auxiliary graphics of the corresponding
dialogs are alternatively switched on or off. This influences the size of the
dialog on the screen.
Page A.2 - 3
Dialog Framework
When working with the program, you will see that it provides a variety of
different dialog boxes, which are used to enter settings for the functions and
commands. Many of these settings are repeated for construction tasks in
different orders or are used in a slightly modified for (e.g. connection plates with
holes for specific supports) – it would be useful to save these settings for later
use.
For this purpose, ProSteel 3D offers you a template management function.
Many of the dialogs feature a TEMPLATE button. Clicking this button calls up
the template management dialog box where you then can save or load the
settings. Sometimes, the templates can also be accessed via the context menu
of the right mouse key.
Although this is always the same window, the saved entries depend on the type
of dialog box from which you are using the template management dialog. The
only items visible in the command ’Work Frame’ are saved work frames. The
command ‘Plates’ correspondingly offers only connection plate specifications.
The methods of working within the template management are very similar to
those of Windows Explorer. For example, you can organize the templates’
structure in different list branches and easily modify this structure at any time via
Drag&Drop.
Page A.2 - 4
Dialog Framework
Dialog-Commands
LOAD
When you click on this button, the template marked in the selection list is
loaded and the input fields of the dialog box are filled in accordingly. Then,
the dialog will be closed immediately.
You can also double-click the list entry for this command.
SAVE
By clicking on this button, you can save the settings entered in the dialog
frame using a name indicated by you. You first have to select the desired
list branch where your template has to be saved and then click the SAVE
button.
Now an entry with a standard name will be created the name of which can be
modified immediately or at a later moment.
To overwrite an existing entry, select the corresponding entry instead of a list
branch.
NEW FOLDER
By clicking on this button, you can create a new branch (folder) on the
topmost level or even within a list branch to save your templates.
You first have to select the desired list branch and then click the NEW
FOLDER button.
IMPORT
Click on this button to add other templates of the same type to your
current template file. This may be a single template, a list branch or the
complete file.
A file selection dialog opens where you can select the template file to be
imported. It is checked whether you selected the same type.
If the name of some list branches of the imported template file is identical with
the entry in the existing file, you can decide for each branch individually whether
the existing data have to be overwritten or not.
The new branches or templates are only added; they may be re-organized later
by using Drag&Drop.
Page A.2 - 5
Dialog Framework
SORT
Click on this button, and the alphabetical order of the display list is turned
upside down. You can reach entries which are placed further down
without having to scroll up and down the list.
First, you have to select a list branch the order of which has to be changed.
Sorting can be defined for each branch individually.
Context Menu
Most of the dialog commands can be reached via the context menu of the right
mouse key. Further commands are available here.
REMOVE
Select this command to delete the selected template or a complete branch
including all subordinate branches.
EXPORT
Select this command to save the selected template or a complete branch
including all subordinate branches under any file name you like. The data can
be added again at any time using the IMPORT command or they can be made
accessible to other users for import.
After selection of the command, the file selection dialog opens where you can
select a file name or a file path.
FAVOURITES
Select this command to add the selected template to the favourites’ list or to
remove it from this list.
Page A.2 - 6
Dialog Framework
Version Control
You are perhaps used to the fact that in other programs and in previous
ProSteel 3D versions already defined templates were often lost during an
update.
This is the reason why the data structure of template file was equipped with a
version and type control. Your new defined templates remain compatible with
the following versions and when former files are loaded, any new added values
will have a standard value.
Select EXPORT and IMPORT as file type dBASE III List in the dialog
commands to export individual templates or branches into the dBASE-format or
to import them from there.
If the selection is not possible, format conversion is not available for these dialog
templates.
Favourites
You can collect selected templates individually in a favourites’ list. These lists
are displayed in the dialogs of the functions to have a quick selection of
templates available.
First click on the corresponding entry to define a template as favourite. Then,
select the option Add to favourites in the context menu. Now, the entry is
displayed in bold type.
To remove an entry, click on the entry again and select the entry Remove from
Favourites in the context menu.
Page A.2 - 7
Dialog Framework
A.2.3 RollOver-Mechanism
Individual Control
Due to the fact that perhaps you don’t want to have a RollOver-mechanism
activated for each dialog, it can be switched on or off for each dialog individually.
You may even completely deactivate the RollOver-mechanism in the global
settings if you don’t like this way of working at all. However, your individual
defaults are kept in each dialog frame and become valid again when the
mechanism is activated.
Page A.2 - 8
Dialog Framework
Many dialogs have a graphic depiction on the right. This is either a pure auxiliary
graphic explaining the dialog parameters or – depending on the command – a
pick frame for the determination of reference points (“monitor“).
Auxiliary Graphics
The auxiliary graphics show a depiction in the form of a diagram, e.g. a
connection or a structural element with the most important dimensions, which
can be modified in the dialog frame.
Monitor
The monitor frame helps you to define the reference points e.g. at the insertion
of shapes.
Page A.2 - 9
Dialog Framework
Pick Lengths
Most input fields for entering distances allow picking the distance in your
drawing. Then, the picked length is entered into the input field. This extension
permits comfortable seizing of distances from your construction.
To do so, select the entry Add Picked Length in the corresponding field via the
context menu; the dialog frame is temporarily hidden, and you can pick the
distance via two points.
If you select the entry Add Picked Length (without Z) instead, the distance will
be calculated without Z-coordinates.
Pocket Calculator
Most input fields for entering distances alternatively allow the use of an
integrated pocket calculator to calculate the values. The new calculated value
then is entered into the input field.
To do so, select the entry Add Calculated Value via the context menu; the
pocket calculator is displayed. If a value was entered into the input field before,
it will be automatically displayed in the pocket calculator.
Page A.2 - 10
Input Options
Some additional functions are available in all fields where you can enter a
length, distance or coordinate. These commands, however, are not available for
fields where you enter texts, angles, or general digits such as factors or scaling
values.
You have access to these functions by calling the context menu with the right
mouse key in the corresponding input field and then select the desired entry
The well-known Windows functions for input fields such as e.g. Copy and Paste
will of course be at your disposal there in future, too.
Additional Functions
Pick Length If you select this function, the dialog is hidden and you can
pick two points in the drawing. The distance from one point to
the other is calculated and the result is entered into the
corresponding dialog field. Then, the dialog is displayed again.
Pick Length without Z If you select this option, the Z-coordinates are removed
at distance calculation. Running is the same as described
above.
Pocket Calculator A small pocket calculator is displayed when you use this
option.
When selected, the calculator takes over the content of the
current field and you can directly calculate with this value.
When the calculation is finished and you want to copy the
result into the current input field, just quit the calculator using
the COPY button.
Page A.3 - 3
Input Options
ptions
When the program prompts an object selection, you can select the desired
component parts via window or via selection. In this case there are two
functions, which can be rather useful.
Comparison In most of the functions, and in the case you want to select all
parts, you can answer the selection with RETURN. Then, all
parts of the current drawing will be selected.
Filter When you interrupt the selection with ESC and SHIFT, the
filter function is selected and the function is not left.
In this case you would filter your input for all parts being longer than 2000 mm. If
you press the OK-button, the parts are selected on which the filtering is based.
Then, the original function is carried out together with the filter result.
For a detailed description of the filter possibilities, please refer to the description
of PS_SEARCH command.
Page A.3 - 4
Input Options
Use of CTRL-Key
Bolted Joint The bolted joint command saves the last created bolt to avoid
searching through the database if the next bolt is a bolt of the
same type and length, etc. When you keep the CTRL-key
pressed during bolted joint command, the stored data are
deleted and the program is forced to read the bolt data from a
file.
Select View At Select View command you can set whether double-clicking
quits the dialog. This setting is turned upside down when the
CTRL-key is pressed simultaneously.
Display Class You can move the dialog of display and area classes
lengthways. To return to the original status, keep the CTRL-
key pressed while the corresponding dialog is opened.
NC-Data If you keep the CTRL-key pressed while selecting component
parts for NC-creation, the Debug-mode is switched on.
Diverse graphical outputs are generated for NC-creation. They
are rather meant for development, but sometimes they help to
solve problems as well.
Positioning If you enter the starting value of positioning, the next following
value will be calculated. If you have alphanumerical values,
which start with A, this is not possible, because you have to
enter a 0 and the result will be an <A> displayed. A pressed
CTRL-key creates an <a>.
Work Frame If you want to delete the list values of a dimension, you have
to put the focus on it and keep the CTRL-key pressed. Using
the ALT-key allows elegantly editing of the field.
Positioning At automatic positioning the subsequent calculation of
component parts can be switched off using the CTRL-key.
Page A.3 - 5
Input Options
Use of ALT-Key
General The pressed ALT-key avoids working off the link update. No
updates due to modifications are carried out. You can e.g. use
this function to move parts without causing a reaction of the
connected parts.
Render Export After the parts for Render-Export have been selected, a
standard file name is used. The ALT-key permits file name
selection.
Object View The object view first creates a non-aligned view on the part.
Alignment is made via RETURN-button. If you press the ALT-
key at selection of view direction, an aligned view will be
directly created.
Free View This is not carried out using Clipping. If the ALT-key is
pressed, the global clipping distances will be used.
Osnap A pressed ALT-key during Object Snap selection inserts the
reference points as well, if existing.
Handrail At shape selection, the selection of the previous type can be
taken over if you keep the ALT-key pressed while selecting
the shape class (post, hand rail, knee-high guard rail, etc.).
The same function is valid at modification of shape status, i.e.
whether the corresponding shape is used or not.
Edit Drill Holes At modification of drill holes, you can cancel the blocking of
bolt fields by means of the ALT-key. These then can be
deleted as well. Use this option carefully!
Lattice/Truss Girders Same function as for the selection of handrail shapes.
Select View at Select View command, double-clicking on it activates the
selected view. The ALT-key only moves to the corresponding
UCS.
Hangar Frame At insertion, the frame is created with the entered width. The
ALT-key creates a frame with the width of the entered points.
Haunch If you press the ALT-key while seizing the connection shape, a
ceiling joist is carried out.
If you press the ALT-key while seizing the supporting shape,
the plate thicknesses are adapted to the supporting shape.
Page A.3 - 6
Input Options
Ladder The ALT-key causes that the ladder length is calculated from
the third point.
Insert Shapes If you choose Select Position, a pick into the drawing causes a
rotation by 90°. The ALT-key causes a rotation by -90°.
Stiffeners If you keep the ALT-key pressed during selection, the program
is forced to an input via angles.
Copy At selection via menu points instead of via dialog, the ALT-key
causes a conversion of the setting, whether the operation is
valid for group or not.
Working Areas Activating the focus from one of the three list fields for
distances permits comfortable input of the area. If the CTRL-
key is pressed, the distances are deleted.
Line Cut Pressing the ALT-key at selection causes not only a cut but, if
need be, an adaptation, too.
Connect Pressing the ALT-key at selection of the second shape avoids
type check and everything is connected.
ArcShape Osnap and Center: The ALT-key causes that the endpoints
can be seized as well.
Bolt Grips If a bolt is modified using its grips, the ALT-key causes that
the endpoints can be moved freely in space, otherwise only in
bolt direction.
Purlin Connect. If the frame is modified, moving of the grips along a line
causes the movement of the line without modifying the size. If
the ALT-key is pressed, the line is moved and the size is
modified depending on the neighbouring lines.
Plate Grips Same effects as purlin connection object.
Shape Osnap and Center. The ALT-key causes that the endpoints
can be seized as well.
2D Details In groups, the movement of an accessory part doesn’t cause
new drawing of the main part. The modification will only be
visible after regeneration. Pressing the ALT-key forces re-
structuring of the group even without regeneration.
Grips For shapes, you can specify whether the length modification
has only to be effected in shape direction or freely. Using the
ALT-key turns this setting upside down.
Page A.3 - 7
Input Options
Page A.3 - 8
Project Manager
In all ProSteel 3D versions it is possible to store drawing files, parts list files or
similar things on the folder you like. This feature is often very useful; on the
other hand, however, the problem is to keep all files of a project together.
Up to now, it was not possible to store the pre-settings, templates or even
configurations related to the project. In the current version, a project manager
has been implemented offering exactly these options.
Page A.4 - 1
Project Manager
In the upper line, you see the set project path where the projects are filed and
from which the stored projects are displayed. In the list, all available projects are
displayed, the lines on the right show the information stored for the
corresponding project.
Page A.4
4-2
Project Manager
The change of the AutoCAD main dialog informs you whether a project has
been loaded. Name and file path of the loaded project are displayed there,
instead of the information that you are working with a certain AutoCAD version.
Open this dialog to see the name of the current project displayed in the bottom
line as well.
Page A.4 - 3
Project Manager
The following dialog appears when you want to create a new project. Use this
dialog to enter the project data.
Project Name Enter the desired name of your project. The remaining paths
are modified as well according to your inputs. However, they
can be overwritten individually.
Model Files Enter the path to be used for storing your model files. In
contrast to the other paths, it is not possible to force AutoCAD
to use this path as previously set. Therefore at storing, you
have to take care manually that this path will be used to store
your model files there.
This button allows interactive path selection if you don’t want
to use the proposed path.
This button deletes your individual input and activates the
previously set path again.
Page A.4
4-4
Project Manager
Detail Files This is the path for your detail drawings. The Detail Centre
takes over the selection made here as pre-setting.
Parts Lists.. This is the path for your parts list files. The file for the creation
of parts lists takes over the selection made here as pre-
setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If
another project was activated at the last selection of the parts
list creation, the path still is the one set for this project.
NC Files This is the path for your NC files. The NC-creation takes over
the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the
new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at
the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still is the one
set for this project.
PPS Files This is the path for your PPS files. The PPS-function takes
over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only
the new selection is concerned. If another project was
activated at the last selection of the PPS-function, the path still
is the one set for this project.
Export Files This is the path for your export files. The export function takes
over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only
the new selection is concerned. If another project was
activated at the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still
is the one set for this project.
Temp Project If this option is activated, you can store the temporary files
separated from the standard storing place and organize your
settings related to the project. In the temporary files e.g. the
last active dialog content, the dialog position, etc. are stored.
Temp Files Enter the path for your temporary files.
Copy from Enter the path from which all existing temporary files have to
be copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with
a bare installation, but you will find the usual environment,
even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.
Templates Proj... If this option is activated, you can store the template files
separated from the standard storing place and organize your
settings related to the project.
In the template files, all data are stored which have been
created via the template management.
Template Files Enter the path for your template files.
Copy from Enter the path from which all existing template files have to be
copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a
bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even
if from now on it will only be valid for this project.
Page A.4 - 5
Project Manager
Styles Project If this option is activated, you can store the style files
separated from the standard storing place and organize your
settings related to the project.
This option is valid for all 5 types of style files (detailing style,
position flags, weld marks, elevations, bolts).
Style File Enter the path for your style files. This path is used to file the
corresponding subdirectories for the 5 types of style files.
Copy From Enter the path from which all existing style files have to be
copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a
bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even
if from now on it will only be valid for this project.
DWG Project If this option is activated, you can store the Dwg format
templates separated from the standard storing place and
organize your settings related to the project.
DWG Frame Enter the path for your frame files.
Copy From Enter the path from which all existing Dwg frames have to be
copied into the new directory.
Project Descr. Here you have the opportunity to describe your project in 10
lines. The data are displayed at project selection and have to
facilitate selection.
Page A.4 - 6
Global Settings
This dialog box and its pages allow you to enter the standard settings for several
functions. You access the dialog by selecting the ‘ProSteel 3D/Options item via
the context menu of the right mouse button when no objects are selected.
Identical values for the corresponding ProSteel 3D components resulting from
these settings can be modified at any time for each part via the “Change PS
Properties” command.
Most entries are explained with the individual functions; therefore just some
settings will be explained in the following.
Page A.5 - 1
Global Settings
Options
Analysis View For shape properties, an additional tab for the static view is
available. If this option is not required, you can deactivate it
here generally.
Double Click The part properties can be processed by double clicking the
part.
Unit Dialog You are asked at the beginning of a new drawing in which unit
system you want to work (metrical or British). Otherwise, the
current AutoCAD-setting will be adopted.
As the consequent use of the same unit system within a
drawing is indispensable for the correct display of shapes, the
modification of the system variable MEASUREMENT that is
responsible for this can cause unwanted results.
This option grants that the once selected unit system is kept
and a corresponding hint will be displayed in case of (mostly
unwanted) modifications.
Enable DSTV The shape and bolt designations in a parts list are named
according to the latest DSTV standard.
Page A.5 - 2
Global Settings
Remove Modifications Drill holes e.g. which lie outside of the shape after a
length modification has been performed, are deleted
automatically.
Remove Links Logical links, which haven’t any meaning any more, are
deleted when parts are deleted. During normal operation, this
option should be turned on.
Remove References When the drawing is cleaned with the AutoCAD
command “Purge”, in order to reduce the drawing size,
unused shape references can be deleted after confirmation.
Check DWG Each time the drawing is opened, it is verified with regard to
invalid group entries. In some cases, unexpectedly big
drawings could be created which is avoided using this option.
Recalculate Parts Internal calculations are not carried out by ProSteel each
time a part is „touched“, but only if it is really necessary. This
shortens the processing time of some functions.
Group as a Whole This option permits selection of groups as a whole if the
AutoCAD system variable “Pickstyle” has been set
accordingly.
Convert Boolean In case of Boolean volume operations, the solid, which is
responsible for the processing, will be parameterized.
Thus it is possibly to modify the dimensions of the processing
later, even if the solid responsible for the processing doesn’t
exist any more (in the case it was e.g. only an auxiliary object
and has been deleted again).
Check Shape Lengths The shape lengths are automatically verified when a
shape is inserted.
Check Hole Edges The admissible edge distances are automatically verified if
drill holes are inserted.
Description Layer Component parts are placed on the corresponding layer
indicated in the description file
Execute Boolean When logical links are processed, the Boolean volume
operations within the parts are carried out before a cut is
made. The display of component parts can change by using
this option.
Page A.5 - 3
Global Settings
Grips
Shapes
Modify Length A grip is created for length change (or for position change)
and all measurements can be altered.
Move Cuts A grip is created for the section. You might now have one grip
for changing the length and one for changing the section.
Please note: When you move a section grip in a way to shorten the length of the
shape, the length grip is moved simultaneously.
When you move the length grip over the section grip, the shape will be cut off at
the same spot, because you have not moved the sectional plane. When you
move the section grip over the length grip, you eliminate the section from the
shape (although the sectional plane remains at the section grip) the section grip
“seizes” the sectional plane, while the length grip “seizes” the shape length.
When you stretch a cut shape, the section angle within the shape remains the
same, just like in reality.
Move Holes Drill holes receive a grip and can be moved. Otherwise they
remain where inserted when the shape is stretched.
Page A.5 - 4
Global Settings
Move Polycuts Poly-sections receive a grip and can be moved (the original
form of the poly-line is stored; therefore you only move the
line). Otherwise, the section remains where inserted when the
shape is stretched.
Only Along Center Line Shapes can only be stretched along their axis, i.e. a
change of position is not possible.
Layout When you have entered a value > 0 in this input field, the
length of the shape can only be changed via grips in preset
modular steps. When you have entered 0, any kind of change
can be performed.
Plates
Modify Plate Size A grip for changing thickness is displayed, in all other cases
only form changes can be performed.
Move Cuts All other plates fields have same definition as the shape fields.
Please refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Page A.5 - 5
Global Settings
Shapes
With the exception of the additional dialogs and some specifications, most of the
settings can be found under the section describing the shape properties.
Offset Centre Line You specify the length beyond which the centre line has to
exceed the shape ends.
Maximum Shape If you enter a value bigger than 0 and you have checked the
entry ‘Verify Shape Lengths’ under ‘Options’, and shapes are
inserted, a message is displayed drawing your attention to the
fact that the maximum delivery length is exceeded by some
shapes.
A hint dialog appears and the corresponding shapes are
highlighted in colour.
Page A.5 - 6
Global Settings
Shapes...Labels
Page A.5 - 7
Global Settings
Shapes...Sketch Display
Page A.5 - 8
Global Settings
Sketch Size
Sketch Length You can enter the length of sketch display from the centre in
the ‘Value’ input field below to outline the shape as solid. If
you enter the value 0, the result will only be a cross-section
display at the centre.
Relative Length You can enter the relative size of sketch display related t o the
overall length of the shape in the ‘Value’ input field below.
End Offset You can enter the distance of the end points of the displayed
system line towards the actual insertion points in the ‘Value’
input field below.
Layout
Insertion Line The insertion line of the shape is displayed as system line of
the shape (which could for example be the upper edge).
Middle Line The middle line of the shape is displayed as system line.
Here, you can see an example for a sketch display as well as some
corresponding dimensions:
Page A.5 - 9
Global Settings
Shapes...Name Conventions
Input Fields Here, you can indicate a general default consisting of format
variables and constant designations for the indicated shape
type in question.
All format variables are placed in round brackets and start with
a $-symbol outside the brackets. Thus they can be identified
as variables at once. This is followed by the format
specification for the desired dimension.
Format Specifications:
$(W) shape width
$(H) shape height
$(T) shape thickness
$(D) outside diameter in case of round shapes or edge
length at square shapes
Page A.5 - 10
Global Settings
Select from List Dimensions of e.g. end plates which are preferably produced
of flat steel can only be selected from flat steels existing in the
database.
When the option is not activated, you can indicate any lengths
and widths.
Metrical/Imperial
List Here, you select the kind of shape designation from the
selection lists depending on the unit system of the model.
Places after Decimal Point Here, you specify the accuracy of the
dimensions in the list display depending on the unit system of
the model.
E.g. it is possible to nevertheless use the American designations in models with
metrical unit system and to have them displayed with a higher accuracy than
metrical designations would normally permit.
Page A.5 - 11
Global Settings
Straight Plates
With the exception of the additional dialogs and some specifications, most of the
settings can be found under the section describing the shape properties.
Grid lengthwise Here you enter the lengthwise grid distances if a grid is to be
displayed.
Grid cross-wise Here you enter the cross-wise grid distances if a grid is to be
displayed.
Grid Length This is where you specify the maximum grid length running
from the outer edge of the plate or from existing inner
contours. If you enter the value 0, the plate will be displayed
with a complete grid. This option permits you to display the
plate without complete grid. The display is limited to the
contour edges. Shapes that are situated below remain visible
by this way.
Grid Height Enter the grid height here.
Grid = Thickness The grid height always corresponds to the current plate
thickness.
Page A.5 - 12
Global Settings
Offset Middle Line If you selected the display as middle line, this is where you
enter a projection of the middle line over the two plate
surfaces.
In contrast to shapes, the centre line of plates is not running
along the longitudinal direction but along the plate thickness.
Input Thickness You can indicate the plate thickness in the insertion dialog, as
you like. Otherwise, only the values of a selection list are
available (preference values).
Plates...Labels
Since the dialog is identical with the shape labelling, please refer to this chapter
for the meaning of the input fields.
Page A.5 - 13
Global Settings
Plates...Description
Description of Name Here, you specify the format default of the plate name as
it is used e.g. at labelling and in the property fields.
Position Flags Here, you specify the format default of the plate name in
position flags.
Export Here, you specify the format default of the plate name at the
export of parts list data.
Page A.5 - 14
Global Settings
Round at... Here, you specify the accuracy to which the specifications
concerning dimensions of the plate name have to be rounded.
This doesn’t have any influence on the actual dimensions of
the plate model.
Length greatest... The greatest value of dimensions is always regarded as plate
length. This doesn’t depend on how you inserted the plate.
Plates...Calculation
Here, a dialog opens where you can determine the method for calculating the
weight of the plate resp. the surface to be painted. These specifications
influence the result in the parts list output.
The values can be defined according to the exact form, according to the rubber
tape-method (as if a rubber tape was tightened around the plate) or according to
the smallest surrounding rectangle.
For plates having a grid (e.g. to display a gridiron) you can reduce the weight to
the percentage value indicated in the input field Weight at Grid.
Page A.5 - 15
Global Settings
Bolts
Layout Bolts can be inserted into the drawing with different display
settings: as Middle Line, Line with Circle, Extruded Circles or
in real Display.
Back to Back permits automatic bolted connections back-to-back; the bolts
are guided through all parts (penetrating bolts).
Global Workloose It is not possible to set an individual clearance in the dialogs,
but a uniform value is used instead.
Round...to When the bolt is attached, the found clamping length is
rounded to a clamping length which can be divided through
the indicated value.
Round bigger... The rounding is set to the next bigger value. The found
clamping length is not decreased, but always increased.
Search smaller... If a bolt cannot be created with the found size, the next
smaller bolt will be searched and used.
Bolt Weight The bolt weight is calculated approximately unless a weight
has been indicated in the database.
Page A.5 - 16
Global Settings
Work Frame
Page A.5 - 17
Global Settings
Values
Resolution: The input fields are used to specify the resolution for creating
circular volumes. The higher the resolution, the more detailed
the display but the computer processing speed decreases.
Use high-resolution settings only for large scales and
important details.
Due to some special features in the volume-modeller, you
should only specify odd numbers here. However, this only
influences the Facet Modeler.
2D Subpart Specify the size of the pick helper symbol for detailed
construction groups. You need the pick helpers to access the
individual parts of construction groups in the workshop
drawing after the detailing.
Clip Plane Distance Specify the front and rear section plane distances of the
object view.
Rounding Stiffener Thickness Here, you specify the accuracy the plate
thickness of the calculated stiffener thickness has to be
rounded at stiffeners in connections.
An unnecessary accuracy can thus be avoided resp. only
certain plate thicknesses, which are available in the workshop,
will be used.
Page A.5 - 18
Global Settings
Logical Links
Page A.5 - 19
Global Settings
Revision Check
Length Tolerance
Tolerances Here, you specify the tolerances to be used for comparing the
component parts. You can specify the values for line length as
well as the comparison of drill holes, lengths and weight.
Modifications are determined by means of a type of
comparison which is also used for positioning.
Single Parts
At Changes Here, you specify the behaviour of the single part position
number at a changed part.
Keep – The position number is not changed.
Confirm – The position number is only deleted if this is
individually confirmed for each part.
Delete – The position number is always deleted.
Page A.5 - 20
Global Settings
Storing Here, you specify what has to happen with the invalid (former)
position number at a changed single part.
No Storing – The position number is ignored.
Confirm – The position number is only stored as original
position if this is individually confirmed for each part.
Save – The position number is saved as original position.
Groups
Here, you specify the behaviour of the group position number at a changed part.
The possible specifications correspond to those for single parts and are
described there.
Others
Modify Flag The part is only checked as modified if it has already a
position number.
Page A.5 - 21
Global Settings
Display
Viewport Here you can set the support of optimum depiction when
working with view windows in the paper area.
Without Support – No adaptations are made within the
depiction.
Only for normal output – The depiction of the shape labelling
is e.g. adapted to the depiction scale if dynamic adjustment
option has been activated.
Complete Support – A complete support of the depiction takes
place.
Shape Clipping The active UCS plane (top view) displays the cross-section of
the object tapered to it theoretically. This option should be
turned on.
When this option is switched off, you do not get a correct
cross-section top view of an object if it starts below and ends
above sectional plane.
Plate Clipping This option is identical with ShapeClipping, but it is only valid
for plates.
Page A.5 - 22
Global Settings
Suppress... Any shape labelling inserted into the model is hidden if the
function “Hide / Shade” is selected.
Cache 2D The result of all line calculations effected by the volume-
modeller (e.g. at a 2D-depiction, object snap, etc) is written
into an intermediate storage. A new calculation is only made in
case of modifications.
Thus the processing speed for the determination of AutoCAD-
object snap-points especially in case of complex construction
groups is considerably increased.
No Bolts... Bolts are not displayed when the function “Hide / Shade” is
selected.
Real Bolts... Bolts are displayed as real objects when the function
“Hide/Shade” is selected. This option should be turned on
during normal operation.
Real Arc... Curved shapes (arcs) are displayed as real objects when the
function “Hide/Shade” is selected. This option should be
turned on during normal operation
Position Flags at Shade All position flags placed in the model will not be
hidden when the function “Hide/Shade” is selected.
Additional Lines at Shade All lines in the model, like centre lines, gravity lines
or other construction lines will not be hidden when the function
“Hide/Shade” is selected.
Workframe at Shade All work frames within the model will not be hidden when
the function “Hide/Shade” is selected.
Display Hole Holes are always displayed as polygons consisting of lines,
even if it is a matter of real holes in ACIS-objects.
No Subpart Grips There is no output of subpart grips at plotting.
No System Lines There is no output of system lines of structural elements at
plotting.
Page A.5 - 23
Global Settings
Colours 1
Input Fields Here, you set the colours to be used for the different display
markings and objects of the program by indicating the
AutoCAD colour number. Please refer to the corresponding
commands for the meaning of the different markings.
COLOUR SELECTION
You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking
the corresponding input field and then loading the AutoCAD
dialog for colour selection.
Page A.5 - 24
Global Settings
Colours 2
Input Fields Here, you set the colours to be used for the different display
markings and objects of the program by indicating the
AutoCAD colour number. Please refer to the corresponding
commands for the meaning of the different markings.
COLOUR SELECTION
You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking
the corresponding input field and then loading the AutoCAD
dialog for colour selection.
Page A.5 - 25
Global Settings
Page A.5 - 26
Global Settings
Dialog Settings
Expert Mode Here, you can configure different display properties in the
dialogs. The following options are available for selection:
Beginner, Middle and Expert. This setting has an influence on
the display of constructional graphics in the dialogs and more.
Accuracy Here you specify the value for the display accuracy of lengths,
angles and other values. If you selected the option “Use
AutoCAD settings”, the accuracy depends on the system
settings (LUPREC). Otherwise, you specify the desired value
here.
RollOver Here, you switch on RollOver for the dialogs.
Suppress ToolTips Here, you switch off the auxiliary ToolTips.
Input of Hole Dia You can specify any hole diameter. If this field is not
checked, you can only specify hole diameters from a given list.
Dynamic Point Input This option permits dynamic zoom and pan during the
picking of points or lines.
Tabs one after the other If there isn’t enough place, the selection tabs for the
pages of a dialog are displayed one after the other instead of
next to each other.
Page A.5 - 27
Global Settings
Dialog Settings...ToolTips
Page A.5 - 28
Global Settings
Dialog Settings...Properties
In this dialog, you can specify the default settings for the properties of individual
object types in ProSteel 3D.
Select the object type in the Selection List. The depiction of the dialog tab will be
adopted. Please refer to the descriptions of the different object types for the
meaning of the entries.
Page A.5 - 29
B Modellierung
Modeling
Modeling and Parts Lists
Page B - 2
Layer Functions
The program is equipped with an automatic layer control. Normally you don’t
have to take care of this.
If you use the program commands to create different objects such as shapes,
dimensions, welding symbols, etc., these are created on their own layer.
The activation, deactivation, and switching of layers is one of the most
frequently performed tasks when using AutoCAD. ProSteel 3D supplies its own
switching functions for this purpose. Switching to the most important layers can
be done with just one click, and without long searches. Select the command by
clicking its associated button or enter PS_LAYER from the keyboard with the
indicated parameter.
Page B.1 - 1
Layer Functions
Page B.1 - 2
Layer Functions
Page B.1 - 3
Layer Functions
Page B.1 - 4
Construction
truction Utilities
The program offers several options to create construction lines, divide distances
evenly or measure distances which all serve as design and constructional aids.
These lines are created on their own layer (default is Ps_const), so that all of
them can be jointly hidden or deleted.
Page B.2 - 1
Construction Utilities
Page B.2 - 2
Construction Utilities
You may also use selected settings to create construction lines directly and to
create construction lines much more rapidly.
The number and type of the lines depends on the Number and Line Type
settings as described in the previous dialog window regarding construction lines
command PS_CONST. The commands remain active until terminated by
pressing the ESC-key or the right mouse button.
HINT: The construction lines are created only within the current user coordinate
system plane. It is best to use them only in the views.
PS_CONST_HOR
This command creates a horizontal construction line.
Click a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_VER
This command creates a vertical construction line.
Click a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_PAP
This command creates a construction line running parallel with
a reference line.
First click the reference line and then on a point the
construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_PAE
This command creates a construction line running parallel with
a reference line using a specified distance.
First enter the desired distance and then click the reference
line. Finally, click the side of the reference line along which the
parallel line is to be created.
PS_CONST_SAP
This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a
reference line.
Click the reference line and then on a point the construction
line is to intersect.
Page B.2 - 3
Construction Utilities
PS_CONST_SAE
With Distance: This command creates a perpendicular
construction line for a reference line
With Distance from a Reference Point: First enter the desired
distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the
reference point and then on the side of the reference point
where the perpendicular line is to be created.
PS_CONST_DVD
This command divides a reference line into equal segments
and creates corresponding perpendicular construction lines
along this line (also utilizing the start and end point).
First enter the number of sections and then click the reference
line.
PS_CONST_DEL
This command deletes all construction lines drawn up to then
on the layer created for the construction lines.
Page B.2 - 4
Construction
truction Utilities
Choose the Measure command if you would like to measure a distance. Then
click two points, which returns the following dialog box showing a few
measurement results.
The area ‘UCS Coordinates’ shows the measuring results regarding the current
user coordinate system!
Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points.
Distance in X, Y, Z is the distance in the direction of the respective coordinate
axis.
Dist Direct is the direct distance of the points.
Angle is the angle from the start to end point in reference to the user coordinate
x-axis.
The section ‘WCS Coordinates’ shows the measuring results regarding the
current world coordinate system.
Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points in the WCS
and Cos X, Y, Z is the so-called ‘directional cosine’ of the vector from start to
end point (a mathematical size which normally hasn't any further meaning for
you).
Page B.2 - 5
Construction Utilities
Page B.2 - 6
3D Component Part Views
The object view is a very important tool because it allows you to look at nearly
any ProSteel 3D-object from a certain direction. The object view command is
used to align the UCS plane on an object, which results in a perpendicular view
on this plane.
The origin of the UCS can either be perpendicular from the pick point to the
centerline or be situated at the pick point itself. This depends on the selected
setting ‘Object View’ or ‘Centered Object View’.
The object is aligned in such a way as to center the pick point on the screen and
align its insertion direction parallel to the X-axis, which means that a shape
inserted into a work frame at a slant is displayed as running horizontally, and the
surrounding work frame is rotated accordingly.
HINT: If the view does not match the model position select the command
again (e.g., using the right mouse button with the context menu) and
confirm immediately with RETURN. The view is aligned. Alternatively, you
can keep the ALT-key pressed while selecting the view direction. Thus, the
view is forced to align as well.
Page B.3 - 1
3D Component Part Views
The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Object
View’ has been selected: Pick the steel component defining the view or hit
RETURN to align the view.
After part selection, coloured coordinate crosshairs are displayed on the
selected component and the following message appears in the command line:
Select the desired axis. Now use your mouse to click the corresponding
coloured circle and the object view is displayed with the selected direction.
Page B.3 - 2
3D Component Part Views
In principle, this command is an object view; thus you can refer to the above
chapter for the basic description.
In contrast to the object view that only allows 6 possible view directions
(rectangular or parallel to shape direction), the surface view offers you the
option to look on each surface of the component part. In case of special shapes
with sloping surfaces it is easier to obtain the suitable view.
The picture below shows you an example of a surface view: By clicking the
displayed line (component edge), you can get a view on the surface 1 or 2.
When you select the function, you first have to click the desired component part
at a bordering edge between two surfaces. Then the coordinate crosshairs are
displayed at this position and you can select the desired view by clicking an
axis.
If you have selected the command PS_FACE_VIEW_CEN, the origin of the view
is situated in the middle of the clicked line.
Page B.3 - 3
3D Component Part Views
The default is an isometric display of the model diagonally from the right front.
However, four other global view variants with their own direct calls are possible
as well: PS_GLOBAL_VIEW2 ... PS_GLOBAL_VIEW5.
The global views are freely definable similar to the AutoCAD input “Apoint” for
the view in the program configuration file ps_st3d.cfg and initially indicated with
default values.
...(other entries)
(other entries)...
The numbers placed in front of the view refer to the number of the command or
button, i.e., _VIEW, _VIEW2 to _VIEW5.
Page B.3 - 4
3D Component Part Views
The top view command is identical with the AutoCAD command “vpoint 0,0,1” ,
i.e. you are viewing the current UCS-plane vertically.
This command switches to the true model top view from within the global
view. It does not have a function in the other views because you already view
the plane vertically.
Remember the difference between this top view and the top view used for a
work frame with roof:
Page B.3 - 5
3D Component Part Views
The ’Free View’ command creates a model view where you select a source and
target point. The view then presented appears to be from your source point to
the target point.
The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Free
View’ has been selected: Select the target point of the line of vision direction.
Now you determine the target point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it.
The following message appears in the command line: Select the source point of
the line of vision direction.
Specify the source point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it and the
view is visible on the screen.
The cutting plane command is activated. Changing the distances is not possible
here and can only be done using the global settings of ProSteel 3D.
Page B.3 - 6
3D Component Part Views
Working with a 3D model can quickly turn complex, especially if many parts are
spatially stacked. ProSteel 3D offers a command to hide parts in front of and
behind the current work plane – the cutting plane.
This facilitates the design process since only those objects are visible that are
close to the same work plane and prevents the accidental manipulation of
stacked shapes. When selecting one of the defined views or an object view,
such objects are automatically hidden, provided that you have not turned off this
command globally.
Sometimes it is however also reasonable to look at all component parts of the
model in the depth – to have an overall orientation. This is the reason why this
function can be switched on and off.
Page B.3 - 7
3D Component Part Views
Page B.3 - 8
3D Component Part Views
3D-design usually utilizes the isometric 3D depiction. This means that a line
located very far back appears to be as long on the screen as the distance
located further to the front.
In reality, however, distances appear to shrink the farther they are removed from
an object. This effect can be simulated with the perspective view.
The perspective view is a form of free view using a fictional camera. You are
prompted for the position of source point (camera) and target point (motif, centre
of picture) and this determine the line of vision. The parameter Focal Distance is
used to indicate - as in photography - the focus of the camera. Larger values are
used to zoom the object as if using a telephoto lens. Smaller values create a
wide-angle effect.
The parameter Distance is used to subsequently change the distance to the
target point and move back and forth along the indicated line of vision.
If you select the command, the following message appears in the command line:
Select the desired function Off/Distance/Focal Distance/ <Set>. You can now
select a function or select the command directly using the corresponding button:
Lines of vision changes are only possible using coordinates and the pick
function is deactivated. Changing to the model global view does not yield the
desired result until the perspective view is deactivated again.
Page B.3 - 9
3D Component Part Views
Remember that the perspective view is only a display view and does not allow
any changes. For that, switch back to the isometric display.
In the following, you will see some examples of the difference between the
perspective and the isometric display as well as the effect of the focal distance
on the isometric display:
Isometric Display
3D Global View
Isometric Display
Front View
Isometric Display
Page B.3 - 10
3D Component Part Views
Perspective Display
Front View
Perspective View
Focal distance = 50
Front View
Perspective View
Page B.3 - 11
3D Component Part Views
Page B.3 - 12
Move and Copy Parts
The notes about the AutoCAD standard commands mention the fact that
ProSteel 3D objects are treated as AutoCAD elements, and can be copied or
moved the same way. This is correct, but the ProSteel 3D copy and move
commands offer you additional help by offering the option of limiting the
direction of the move. Apart from that, you can specifically take the group
structure into consideration.
Using AutoCAD object snaps in a view may result in points being selected that
are not in the proper plane. The ProSteel 3D copy and move commands prevent
this by limiting the direction of the move to the current user coordinate system
plane or even to one axis direction.
If several individual components have been assembled into construction
modules or groups, this command can be used to process the entire group by
selecting just one part of the group. This will eliminate unnecessary searching
and collecting of the parts within a selection set.
After the command has been selected, a dialog box will become available
featuring the following options, each single tab permitting a certain action.
This button carries out the selected action for single parts
without taking into consideration a possible group.
This button carries out the action for complete groups. In the
options, you can specify whether this selection has to be
made only when the main part is picked or for each part of the
group.
Page B.4 - 1
Move and Copy Parts
B.4.1 Move/Copy
Alignment Here, you select the move direction of the actions. A cone
shows you the move direction.
3D – The selected elements can be moved in all three
dimensions.
2D – The start and end points of the move are perpendicular
to the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only
moved within this UCS-plane.
X-Axis - The start and end points of the move are
perpendicular to the X-axis of the current UCS-plane. This
means that shapes are only moved parallel to the X-axis
within this UCS-plane.
Y-Axis - The start and end points of the move are
perpendicular to the Y-axis of the current UCS-plane. This
means that shapes are only moved parallel to the Y-axis
within this UCS-plane.
Z-Axis - The start and end points of the move are
perpendicular to the Z-axis of the current UCS-plane. This
means that shapes are only moved in vertical direction to this
UCS-plane.
Free – You can move the selected elements in any of the
three dimensions. The elements “drag” with the crosshairs and
thus can be visibly moved.
Multiple The elements can be moved several times.
Page B.4 - 2
Move and Copy Parts
B.4.2 Turn
Page B.4 - 3
Move and Copy Parts
B.4.3 Mirror
Page B.4 - 4
Move and Copy Parts
B.4.4 Align
Surface Method
When applying the surface method, you can only make use of one element.
Select the element at an edge neighbouring the desired surface. Then, you
obtain a coloured display of the surfaces available for selection. The target
surface is selected analogously.
Page B.4 - 5
Move and Copy Parts
3 Point Method
If ‘3-Point’ was selected, specify the original position after object selection by
clicking the origin as well as a point on the X- and Y-axis as a reference
position. Then indicate the desired new position by clicking the origin as well as
a point on the X- and Y-axis.
The parts are then aligned according to the specifications with the origin points
being identical.
The example below shows how the left shape was aligned on the right shape as
a copy. It is moved and rotated at the same time.
Page B.4 - 6
Move and Copy Parts
B.4.5 Clone
Cuts All normal cuts are transferred. This includes the mitred cuts
as well.
Drill Holes All drilled holes are transferred.
PolyCut All poly-cuts are transferred.
Notches All outlets are transferred.
Boolean All Boolean operations are transferred.
Page B.4 - 7
Move and Copy Parts
When you start this action, you first have to select the component with the
manipulations to be transferred. Then select the components, which are to
accept the manipulations.
However, only parts with the same position number as the original part will be
considered.
Please remember that the transfer of the manipulations refers to the coordinate
system of the parts. For example, if you look at a shape whose parts coordinate
system has its origin on the right side and you would like to transfer a drill hole
to a part 100 mm from the right but its parts coordinate system originates from
the left, this component will receive the new boring 100 mm from the left as well.
Page B.4 - 8
Move and Copy Parts
B.4.6 Rotate
This command permits a rotated copy with vertical offset to distribute e.g. the
steps of a spiral staircase. Two methods can be applied. The number of steps
and the angle between the steps, or by an angle area and the steps to be
distributed within this area either/or defines the rotation.
Page B.4 - 9
Move and Copy Parts
B.4.7 Settings
Swap Effect The meaning of the ALT-key during selection of the parts is
changed.
If these functions are directly selected via the menu, normally
the selection as single parts is activated. If you keep the ALT-
key pressed during selection, this has the effect that as group
is selected.
Group only... The selection as complete group is only effected if the main
part has been selected. Otherwise the selection is made at
any part of a group.
Page B.4 - 10
Display / Assign parts
B.5.1 Hide
This command can be used to hide components or whole groups, which means
that the parts are made invisible, and cannot be selected. This command
permits you to hide only selected components or to show only selected
components and to hide all others. This provides a clearer view of the model.
HINT: This command is most practical if individual parts are to be hidden from
view. To hide/show entire groups of parts it is better to use display classes
feature.
PS_Hide
Select the parts to be hidden after selecting the command.
The parts are no longer visible after pressing the ENTER key
or using the right mouse button. The command →’Regenerate’
(not to be confused with the AutoCAD-command
“Regenerate”) will switch all parts back to visible.
PS_Hide_Exclude
This function is working just the other way round than the
previous one. After selecting the command, you can choose
the parts which you don’t want to hide. After pressing the
ENTER key or using the right mouse button, all other parts are
hidden.
PS_Hide_Group
This function is working like PS_HIDE. The only difference is
that the whole group is hidden, if you only selected one part of
the group.
PS_Hide_Group_Exclude
This function is working like PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE. The only
difference is that the whole group remains visible, if you only
selected one part of the group.
Page B.5 - 1
Display / Assign parts
B.5.2 Regenerate
Page B.5 - 2
Display / Assign parts
You can organize ProSteel 3D-objects from different layers into ”Display
Classes”, which are independent of the AutoCAD layers.
Contrary to the command →’Hide’ , which forces you to select all parts
individually, here you can select entire object groups and make them visible or
hidden. This will simplify the view of the model dislayed on screen. For example,
bracings, bay rails, curtain walls, etc. could each be assigned to a display class
and displayed or hidden as needed. Each element can exist in only one class at
a time. This means that it will be removed from one class if it is assigned to
another.
After selection of the command, the following dialog opens.
Class Name The available display classes are listed and the desired class
may be selected. The value of Status indicates if the elements
are currently shown (On) or hidden (Off).
You can edit the content by double-clicking the field Class
Name.
Page B.5 - 3
Display / Assign parts
Status Here, you see the current status of a display class. You can
modify the status by double-clicking on it. It is also possible to
highlight several lines and to carry out the modification for all
highlighted lines.
This button permits to hide parts without creating an
assignment to a display class. See PS_HIDE
Click this button to show all individually hidden parts
again.See PS_REGEN.
Page B.5 - 4
Display / Assign parts
The function works analogously to the display classes. Area classes can be
hidden as well. Please note that in case of overlapping with the display classes
the last carried out action will be valid. This means if you hide parts with display
classes, they can be displayed again by means of assigned and displayed area
classes.
Page B.5 - 5
Display / Assign parts
The part families are another structuring variant of the construction. The
belonging to family classes permits an automatic allocation of position number
prefixes as well as a differentiation of the constructive groups by different
colours. In addition, components belonging to one family class can have a
common detail style for detailing.
Each element can exist only in one family class. This means if it is assigned to
another family class, it will be removed from its former family class. New is the
possibility to assign certain colours and line types for detailing to the members
of a part family. For example, you can assign another colour to the girders of a
2D-depiction than that assigned to the supports.
Display List The currently available family classes are listed as well as the
linked defaults of colour, prefix etc.
Single Parts If you click on a button of this line, the parts are treated as
single parts at selection. In this mode, all data of the family
classes will be adopted into the components.
Groups If you click on a button of this line, only the component groups
are treated at selection of the parts. In this mode, only the
prefixes of the family classes will be adopted for the position
number of the group.
Both If you click on a button of this line, both the single parts and
the groups are treated at selection of the parts.
Page B.5 - 6
Display / Assign parts
By double-clicking on a line, you can modify the definition of the part family.
Page B.5 - 7
Display / Assign parts
Description: Enter the name of your part family here. The entry appears in
the selection list and the part properties.
Pos Prefix: Here, you enter the pos. prefix, which appears in front of each
position number itself if the part belongs to this family.
Colour Enter the colour of the part family here. Indicate the AutoCAD
colour number or select it by clicking the SELECT button.
Detail Style Enter the detail style to be assigned to a component part
belonging to this family. Enter the name of the detail style or
select it by clicking the SELECT button.
Note that assigning detail styles normally should be done
inside the Detail Center. If the Detail Center is open, the
component part list has to be updated after modification of
shape properties.
Page B.5 - 8
Display / Assign parts
Select Line Type Here, you specify the line type determined for the 2D-
depiction. The settings can be defined individually for visible,
invisible and center lines.
Detail Colour Here you specify the colour to be used for 2D-depiction of the
selected line.
Line Type Here, you specify the line type to be used for 2D-depiction of
the selected line.
Please note that the 2D line settings are only activated if the component parts
are displayed in 2D. These settings don’t have any effects on the model display.
Page B.5 - 9
Display / Assign parts
The process status of the part is another possibility to check or classify the
component parts in the drawing.
This function helps you to check the parts in colour according to certain criteria
and thus to display the current process status in production resp. installation in
the CAD model.
Page B.5 - 10
Display / Assign parts
Preset File
You can define the preset values of the process status function (the names as
well as the corresponding colours) in a text file. This can be seen and modified
here.
Page B.5 - 11
Display / Assign parts
Use this command to search for parts and components within a model, which
meet certain requirements.
You can define several conditions, which have to be met at the same time. If
these conditions are met, the part is either marked or all parts not meeting the
requirements are hidden.
Fields This list displays the search terms available to you by clicking
them.
Operator Select the respective condition operator between search term
and comparison value.
Compare Value Here you indicate the value that has to be filled. Only values
existing in the drawing are offered.
In case of names, you can also indicate an asterisk (*) for any
other characters such as e.g. HE* for HEA,HEB etc.
Buttons Use the following buttons to combine the filter condition with
different logical operators.
Page B.5 - 12
Display / Assign parts
Specifications Select the action that has to be carried out with the parts
found.
Mark If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition
are marked in colour. Use the command ’Global Settings /
colours’ to specify what colours to apply.
Hide If this field is checked all parts not satisfying the search
condition are hidden. The hidden parts become visible again
using the command ‘Regenerate‘.
Zoom If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition
are automatically zoomed to.
A dialog opens permitting you to indicate the display size
(zoom factor) and to make an iteration of the different found
parts using the keys << and >>.
Condition List This list displays the current search conditions linked with
AND.
Click this button to add a search condition formed from the
selected search term, operator and comparison value to the
condition list.
Click this button to start the search. First, you have to select
all objects to be included in the search, then the result will be
highlighted or hidden, depending on your choice.
Page B.5 - 13
Display / Assign parts
Page B.5 - 14
Work Frames
Any ProSteel 3D model generation is started with the creation of one or several
work frames.
These work frames aid 3D orientation because they can display the basic
system dimensions (e.g. axes dimensions) as design aid objects, and
automatically create the associated UCS systems of the views created by
defining the work frame.
A simple click of the mouse will change the view.
Basic Types
Before defining a work frame, first decide basic shape desired. The following
choices are possible:
Page B.6 -1
Work Frames
Workframe-Layout Here you specify the design of the desired work frame.
Length Specify the length of the work frame and its longitudinal
division. If the Length input field is activated, you define the
length by means of the overall length and the number of
regular fields.
If the field is not activated, the fields can be defined
individually by specification of the width for each individual
field. Please also refer to the hints at the end of this section.
Width The work frame width is determined analogously to the length.
Height The work frame height is determined analogously to the
length.
Absolute Normally, you enter the height of the different fields. If this field
has been checked, the list data define absolute height values.
Axis Descriptions Axes labels are added according to the settings in the text
pages.
Insert Position Defines the insertion position of the work frame related to the
insertion point.
Roof Angle If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work
frame, you can enter the roof slope in degrees.
Page B.6 - 2
Work Frames
Centre Height If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work
frame, you can enter the ridge height.
Ridge Width If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work
frame, you can enter the ridge width. If it is 0 or equal to the
width of the work frame, only a roof surface will be created.
Asymmetrical Divisions
To simplify the input of asymmetrical work frames, you can choose a special
kind of input. The following dialog opens when you keep the ALT-key pressed
while activating one of the three list values:
In the input field, you can either indicate the different fields separated by a
comma or repeated sections by number*distance. This simplifies the input of
complex divisions.
Keeping CTRL-key pressed while activating one of the three list fields, you will
delete the whole field definition in this dimension.
Existing field definitions cannot be modified using this method. They will be
completely overwritten.
Page B.6 -3
Work Frames
The entries of the dialogs above result in the following display of a ProSteel 3D
work frame in AutoCAD (no additional rotation):
X-axis: axis 1
Y-axis: axis A
Z-axis: perpendicular to axis A/1
Page B.6 - 4
Work Frames
When selecting the views to be created, the overlapping views of the same work
plane of other work frames may be omitted because normally they are of no
further use for you (when selecting the corresponding plane, you will see the
whole view).
In connection with the object-oriented feature of ProSteel 3D there are good
reasons for creating these views. It is e.g. possible to move the complete work
frame and this view is perhaps missing. However, if the above picture
corresponds to the reality, you can omit the front and right side view of the
platform because the ‘hangar’ work frame already provides them.
If a view is selected, you will see the expected view. The associated UCS
system has adjusted itself to the movement of the object.
Additionally, you can subsequently set up individual cutting planes for each work
plane and effect other modifications using the context menu “Change PS
Properties”. Please remember: The frame layer has to be unlocked for any
changes to take effect!
Page B.6 -5
Work Frames
All further options correspond to those of the rectangular work frame. Please
refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Page B.6 - 6
Work Frames
All further options correspond to those of the rectangular work frame. Please
refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Page B.6 -7
Work Frames
All further options correspond to those of the rectangular work frame. Please
refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Page B.6 - 8
Work Frames
Use this command to create views on all surfaces directly. You can directly
select them later using the command PS_SETUCS. Depending on the selected
form, some options are not available.
Page B.6 -9
Work Frames
Height Axis A view is created for each created axis into the height.
Use Axis Descriptions You can either select standardized names such as
X_1,X_2 for length and width axes or you can use the
specified axes names.
Height with Coordinates For the height axes, the heights are additionally
added to the name.
Group Name Since several work frames may be inserted into one drawing,
these have to be equipped with their own code. The group
name is placed in front of all views. In this case, it is R1_X2.
Distances Cut.Surfaces The views can automatically hide all elements
situated outside a certain distance. Here, you specify these
distances for all views of this work frame, separated in front
and back.
Page B.6 - 10
Work Frames
The settings for the axes names can be made separately for X- and Y-axis. We
will only describe one axis here. The names can be generated automatically or
you can add a name to each axis individually.
Depiction 123/ABC - Choose the axis name type. The designations may
either be numerical (123) or alphanumerical (ABC).
Text, Circle... – Here you specify the depiction of the text. The
text can either be displayed just as it is or with the selected
border. If you have selected ‘Block’ depiction, you may use an
own text design. Please refer to Blocks for more detailed
information.
Connection Line A line is drawn from the corresponding edge of the work frame
to the text.
Start Value indicates the start of automatic axes names.
Size The text size is specified. At blocks it is defined by the
attribute size.
Scale You can enter a scale for the blocks.
Distance indicates the distance of the text to the edge of the work
frame.
Main Axis When several work frames are involved, you can here enter
the name of the main work frame, if the current frame is rather
considered to be a subordinate frame. It can also be used as
prefix.
Suppress First Axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This
option suppresses the display of the first axis.
Suppress Last Axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This
option suppresses the display of the last axis.
Avoid I, O When alphanumerical axes names are used, you can refrain
from using I and O to avoid any possibility of confusion.
Decreasing Normally, axis labelling is effected in increasing order, e.g.
1,2,3, etc. This option has the opposite effect.
Position The axes can be attached either in front or at the rear, or on
the left or on the right.
2 Lines Main and subordinate axes are displayed in 2 lines.
Dynamic The axes names are always adapted to the corresponding
view direction. Thus, a good readability will be guaranteed at
any time.
Axis Gap Here, the distance of the actual grid to the connection line of
axis name is indicated.
This entry is only displayed if you edit the grid in a 2D-detail.
Page B.6 - 12
Work Frames
EDIT
Click on this button to edit the different grid axes individually.
Here, you can enter the name and the main axis for each single axis. In
addition, you can specify whether the axis name has to be overwritten manually
(manual) and whether this axis has to be displayed (invisible).
Switch over by double-clicking the entries in the first two columns. The entries of
the last two columns can be edited by double-clicking.
Here, you can add any additional axes to the grid where work frame views can
be built. e.g This can be existing constructional axes of architect’s plans.
This function helps you to create an axis grid completely out of an existing 2D-
axis plan. First, you insert a temporary grid into the plan and then you align it to
a reference point as desired. Afterwards, you add the grid axes by clicking on
the existing 2D-axes.
Page B.6 - 14
Work Frames
B.6.8 Options
Text Scale The axes names are scaled using this factor.
Colours The colours of the different work frame elements can be
selected freely.
Either enter the colour number directly or check the
corresponding field and use the left button for dialog selection.
All colours are reset to standard values with the right button.
Page B.6 - 16
Work Frames
You can also use your own block definitions instead of circles and rectangular
for bordering the axis names. They have to be equipped with attributes, which
then are replaced by the actual axes names.
For more detailed information about creation of user-defined blocks, please refer
to the separate technical information of your ProSteel 3D-specialist.
From File Only blocks are used which have already been defined in this
drawing.
DWG Blocks Blocks of external drawings are used. They are loaded unless
existing.
Block Path The path from which the blocks can be loaded.
Block Name X The selected block for the axes names in X-direction.
Block Name Y The selected block for the axes names in Y-direction.
Page B.6 - 18
Choose View
Use this command to select the views defined by the work frames command or
by adding new views.
Once you select a view, ProSteel 3D places the UCS into the selected work
plane and displays the 3D model looking at the plane vertically. The specified
cut planes are activated at the same time so that only the objects within this
area are visible.
In addition, you have access to all other auxiliary functions for view control using
this dialog.
This dialog shows you the views, which are the result of the settings for a work
frame with the area name ’R1’. The views available in the model are sorted and
displayed in this list. Please note that you can modify the name of a view
manually via Change Properties.
Zoom Extents After a view has been activated a Zoom Extents is carried out
at once to have a complete look on the model.
Clipping-Plane If a view is activated, the clipping-planes are activated as well.
This means: All elements in front of or behind the view
reaching beyond the defined distances are not displayed.
Page B.7 -1
Choose View
Double Click If you double click an entry, the selected view is automatically
activated and the dialog is closed. If this option is deactivated,
only the view is displayed. If you keep the CTRL-key pressed
during double clicking, you can inverse this setting.
If this option is selected, the selected view is activated and the
dialog is closed.
This option allows the creation of another view. You are asked
for the name and then you have to indicate a rectangle. After
that, this view will be created in the current UCS and entered
into the list.
This option allows the view via 2 points. The dialog is closed
and you have to specify the target point of the view as well as
the camera point of the view.
This option permits a view on an object. The dialog is closed
and you are prompted to select an object. Then, you can
select the desired view via coloured arrows.
This option permits an UCS on an object. The dialog is closed
and you are prompted to select an object. Then, you can
select the desired UCS-alignment via coloured arrows. See
also PS_ObjectUCS.
This option permits to edit the properties of the selected view.
See also chapter Change Properties/Views.
Page B.7 - 2
Insert Shapes
The actual design work with ProSteel 3D starts when shapes are inserted into
the model. However, you need not deal with shape dimensions, representations,
etc., but simply instruct the program which shape shall be inserted where and
the program will carry out the operation. When inserting, you need not pay
attention to overlapping shapes: there are many possibilities of correcting
overlapping afterwards using a mouse click.
First, make sure that the shapes are correctly positioned. Since the shop
drawings are based on this position, proceed with care.
From now on, you will work in work frames of the model that are smaller:
After selection of the command, a dialog window appears where you can specify
the basic behaviour of the command and further settings. You can create any
kind of straight, bent or cranked shapes.
Page B.8 - 1
Insert Shapes
Shape Selection
Shape Type Select the general shape type here. The ProSteel 3D shapes
are divided into 5 different types:
Standard Shapes – These are shapes based on a data base
included in the standard delivery range.
Special Shapes – These are shape definitions which you can
create yourself by drawing the cross-section once and
creating a shape out of this cross-section.
Roof-Wall-Shapes – These are special shapes created by you
which have been optimized for roof-wall installation.
Combination Shapes – These are shapes which are combined
out of several already defined types.
Weld Shapes – These are also user-defined and permit any
shape which can be welded by means of plates.
Resolution Here, you select the resolution of the depiction Low, Normal
and High for special shapes to make the monitor display
clearer in case of complex types.
You can change the resolution at any time afterwards if e.g. a
more detailed depiction is required.
Page B.8 - 2
Insert Shapes
Shape Class Depending on the selected shape type, the available shape
catalogues are listed here.
You can specify which catalogues for standard shapes are
listed by means of the shape catalogue selection described in
this chapter. For all other shape types, the created shape
catalogues are listed from the corresponding directories on the
hard drive.
Shape Size After a shape catalogue has been selected, all included shape
sizes will be displayed in this list.
Key Each shape has its own clear access key.
This access key can be entered directly here to be able to
create non-standardized shape sizes of tubes, flat steel, round
iron, etc.
Further Defaults
Material Select the material of the shape here.
Layer Here, you can specify on which layer the shapes have to be
filed.
Part Family If family classes have been defined, you can set them here.
The selection of the family class can influence the colour of
the part.
Detail Style If detailing styles have been defined, you can set them here.
Display Class If display classes have been defined, you can set them here.
Area Class If area classes have been defined, you can set them here.
Description If general parts descriptions have been defined, you can set
them here. The selection of the description can influence the
colour and the layer.
Delta X The insertion offset in X-direction; this field can only be
entered, if you have selected the position ‘Free’ as insertion
point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).
Delta Y The insertion offset in Y-direction; this field can only be
entered, if you have selected the position ‘Free’ as insertion
point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).
Item An item number can be used directly here.
Page B.8 - 3
Insert Shapes
Length Specify the length of the shape. This is important if you want
to insert shapes in the cross-section. Inputs in this field
overwrite the length specified by the insertion points.
Turn Here, you indicate the angle of rotation used to turn the shape
around the insertion axis.
Create Group This option creates a group out of the shape after insertion.
Insertion Points The standard insertion points of the shape are displayed on
the monitor.
User-defined Insertion Points
The user-defined insertion points of the shape are displayed
on the monitor.
Monitor The selected shape is displayed as cross-section on the
monitor. The possible insertion points are shown as well.
Select one of these points to insert the shape at this insertion
axis in longitudinal direction.
Additionally to the corner and center points further points
appear with a slightly smaller depiction (hole crack, center of
gravity or manually created insertion points at special shapes)
as well as a bigger point (free placing).
Insertion of Shapes
After having selected the shape type, resolution, shape class and size, the
shape can be inserted. There are several options to insert shapes.
In general, a shape is always inserted by means of two 3D-points. These points
can either be seized by picking the points or by picking a line. For this purpose,
the shape is positioned in a way that – if you stood at the end point and looked
into the direction of the starting point – the view corresponds to the depiction on
the monitor.
However, since two points alone don’t clearly define the shape position in the
space, a third point is defined which determines the position (rotation)
depending on the situation:
Page B.8 - 4
Insert Shapes
Insertion Commands
ALONG LINE
First you are prompted to select a line. The end points of this line are
used as insertion points of the shape.
Since in most cases it is not clear which one of the line points is the
starting and which the end point, the program displays a cone for asymmetrical
shapes. This cone allows exchanging the insertion points and to obtain that the
shape is mirrored at the Y-axis.
In the case of a dynamic dialog, this can alternatively be realized via the button.
If the selected line is a poly-line, a cranked shape will be inserted along the poly-
line. The bend radius is either taken from the input value on the option tab or if
this is 0, the minimum radius will be used.
ALONG 2 POINTS
First you are prompted to pick any two points in the space, which then
are used to insert the shape.
ALONG DIAGONAL
This option is also available if another point than the middle axis has
been selected as insertion point.
First you are prompted to select a line or to select two points using the
‘P’ option. Now the shape is inserted along these points as follows: The selected
insertion position at the starting point is kept (e.g. center of the lower edge). At
the end point, however, the opposite position is used (in this case center upper
edge).
If the ‘Select Position after Insertion’ option is activated as well, the positions are
exchanged with rotations via the left mouse button.
ALONG 3 POINTS
You select the starting and end point where the shape has to be
inserted. Dynamic mode (see options) will be activated automatically. In
addition, you are prompted for the third point defining the alignment.
The shape dynamically follows each move of the mouse pointer and the position
can be determined very precisely.
Page B.8 - 5
Insert Shapes
Additional Functions
INTERRUPT DIALOG
All inserted shapes are still connected with the dialog, so that
subsequent modifications can also be transferred to already inserted
shapes.
If you don’t want this option, you can interrupt the connection using this button.
However, the shape is not deleted in this case.
Page B.8 - 6
Insert Shapes
SHAPE DATA
Click this button to open the following dialog where all relevant shape
data are displayed:
MIRROR
All inserted shapes, which are still connected with the dialog, are
mirrored along their Y-axis. You will obtain this by exchanging the
insertion points.
TURN POSITIVE
The shapes are turned positive (turned left in shape direction) around
their insertion point using the entered value.
TURN NEGATIVE
The shapes are turned negative (turned right in shape direction) around
their insertion point using the entered value.
Page B.8 - 7
Insert Shapes
Apart from normal straight shapes, you have also the possibility to insert a bent
shape. The bent shapes have a constant bending radius.
All settings for selection of the shape type, material, etc. are the same as in the
case of inserting straight shapes. For information, refer to this chapter.
All settings on this tab are stored separately from the straight shapes so that
your defaults on this page don’t disturb the settings for straight shapes.
Insertion Functions
ALONG ARC
First you are prompted to pick an existing arc on the base of which the
shape will be inserted. The position of the arc in the space is not
important.
ALONG 3 POINTS
First you are prompted to pick the center point of the arc, the starting
point and the end point.
The points are perpendicular to the current UCS plane and the shape
then is inserted on the base of these points. It is not possible to insert a shape,
which is positioned in the space using this method. Nor can this command
create an arc of 180 degrees.
Page B.8 - 8
Insert Shapes
The third page contains some additional defaults influencing the behaviour
during shape insertion.
Height The height above the current UCS-plane where the shapes
are inserted
Start Offset The offset at the starting point of straight shapes
End Offset The offset at the end point of straight shapes
Radius The rounding radius at shapes which are inserted several
times
Scale The insertion scale if the shapes have to be inserted as 2D
depiction
Horizontal Dist. The distance of the shapes if a shape class has been selected
permitting an offset of several shapes in horizontal direction.
(SHAPECLASSLAYOUT=HORDOUBLE, QUADRUPLE, DIAGONAL)
Vertical Dist. The distance of the shapes if a shape class has been selected
permitting an offset of several shapes in vertical direction.
(SHAPECLASSLAYOUT=VERDOUBLE, QUADRUPLE, DIAGONAL)
Angular Insertion If you select an insertion along a defined length and position,
you can select here which point of the shape has to be used at
the pick point
Insert…X,Y Plane All picked points are perpendicular to the current UCS-plane
before being evaluated.
Page
e B.8 - 9
Insert Shapes
Orientate This option permits to rotate the shape around its insertion
axis immediately after insertion. For this purpose, click
somewhere in the model with the left mouse key, and the
shape will be rotated in increments of 90°.
Dynamic The shape is “hanging“ on the mouse pointer during insertion.
Normally, the points are seized first and then the shape is
inserted.
Reference Points The insertion points of the shape are entered as reference
points into the shape. This permits later tracing back of the
original insertion points and, if need be, their dimensioning.
3 Point Method This option permits the insertion by means of two planes.
As 2D-Shape After insertion, the shape is projected as 2D-shape onto the
current UCS-plane. You can scale the shape for a depiction
related to scale.
Close Dialog After the insertion is finished, the dialog is closed. If this option
is not activated, the dialog returns and has to be closed
explicitly.
This behaviour of the dialog permits direct modification of
already inserted shapes.
Keep Length The entry in the Length input field is restored at next opening
of the dialog.
Enable Chains at Points Input
At points input, the last point each will be used as starting
point for the next shape.
Adjust to Work frame
Supports are adjusted to the work frame into which they have
been inserted.
Group Girder Position
These setting are only important if the command “Girder Position” is activated.
Connect AEC-Lines The AEC-lines (static effect lines) of the inserted
subordinate girders are automatically connected with the AEC-
lines of the main girders.
Notch The subordinate girders have a notch at the main girders.
Notch Template Select the desired notch template from the available
templates.
Click this button to jump directly into the dialog ‘Notch’ where
you can specify the settings for the notch and create new
templates.
Page B.8 - 10
Insert Shapes
SHAPE CATALOGUES
Click this button to limit the displayed catalogues at shape selection to
the types important for you.
In addition, you can freely determine the order of the entries to find
frequently used types on top position in the selection list.
Available Shape Series In this list (on the left) all country specific shape series
available in the program are listed sorted according to
countries. You can completely activate or deactivate the
shape series of a certain country.
The registration of a country is effected via a *.cfg file in the
shape data directory.
Available Shape Classes In this list (in the middle) all shape classes registered
by the activated country specific shape series are listed.
The registration of possible shape classes of a country is
effected via the entries in the corresponding *.cfg file in the
shape data directory.
Page
e B.8 - 11
Insert Shapes
Current Shape In this list (on the right) all shape classes are displayed which
are available in the commands as entry.
These are displayed there in exactly this order.
The database entries of the corresponding shape file define
which shape sizes are available for the shape class.
Metric The shape names are displayed in metric unit system.
Imperial The shape names are displayed in imperial unit system.
Automatic The shape names corresponding to the setting of the current
drawing are displayed. This means that in a metric drawing
only metric shape names will be displayed.
Preferred Level In the different shape files it is provided that the data records
can have a certain priority.
If this field is checked, only the shapes are displayed the
preference value of which is smaller or equal the value
selected here.
ADD The shape class selected in the middle list will be added to the
end of the selection list.
INSERT The shape class selected in the middle list will be inserted at
the currently marked position of the right list.
DELETE The shape class marked in the right list will be removed from
the selection list.
INSERT ALL All shape classes of the middle list will be taken over into the
right list.
DELETE ALL All shape classes of the right list will be removed from there so
that the list will be empty.
Please note that in all ProSteel 3D functions only the shape classes in the right
selection list are offered for selection.
Page B.8 - 12
Insert Shapes
A shape can also be executed as a so-called cranked shape. For this purpose,
bent or straight segments will be added to a straight or already cranked shape.
SHAPE SEGMENTS
After this button has been clicked, the main dialog disappears and the
following dialog opens.
Straight Segment
Length The length of the straight segment to be added
Page
e B.8 - 13
Insert Shapes
Bent Segment
Radius The radius of the bent segment
Angle The opening angle of the bent segment
Rotation The current rotation angle of the segment with regard to the X-
axis (longitudinal axis) of the shape
The segment is additionally turned positive (to the left) using
the neighbouring angle.
Page B.8 - 14
Insert Shapes
It often occurs that girders have to be inserted between two main girders
(change). Instead of inserting the individual girders manually or instead of
copying them, you have the possibility to insert subordinate girders at main
girders using the girder position option.
Page B.8 - 15
Insert Shapes
Here, you define the desired distances to the corresponding shape ends; a line
displays the position of the shape.
Page B.8 - 16
Insert Shapes
If you want to have several shapes inserted automatically, the program offers
you several possibilities. A frequent application is e.g. the generation of a
supporting grid with previously defined joints.
Insert Columns
Starting Height The starting height (Z-coordinate of the insertion point) of the
selected segment
End Height The end height (Z-coordinate of the insertion point) of the
selected segment
Click on this button to insert a blank line in front of the
selected entry. Then, you can indicate the starting and end
height of this new segment.
Click on this button to remove the selected entry again.
Page
e B.8 - 17
Insert Shapes
Insert Girder
This function permits to insert several girders at the work frame axes
(grid). At the intersection points of the axes, they are automatically
divided into segments.
To do so, you should first be in a plan view on the desired area because the
girders are always inserted in the current UCS. Then, you have to click on the
lower left and the upper right point of the area.
Now, all grid axes situated in this area are examined and the girders are
inserted along the axes according to the specifications of the shape insertion
dialog. Finally, these are divided at all intersection points of the grid axes.
Page B.8 - 18
Insert Shapes
Page B.8 - 19
Insert Shapes
Page B.8 - 20
Insert
rt Plates
Apart from given standard shapes and freely defined special shapes of any kind,
you can insert plates of any shape into the model – in the program, such plates
are called poly-plates. Such plates are flat or three-dimensionally edged plates
of equal thickness such as gusset plates or other types of connecting plates and
butt straps.
The other plate types commonly used for steel structures such as base plates,
end plates or stiffeners can be created by the program using automatic
functions. The program also names them. These functions are explained later in
the user’s guide; here you find a general explanation of plates of any thickness.
Page B.9 - 1
Insert Plates
Insertion Height This is the height of the plate above the current UCS.
Page B.9 - 2
Insert Plates
Label You can take the name of your plate from an editable file. The
content of this file is displayed in this list. The file is
..\Prg\pro_st3d.pdc. In addition to the name, you can
define a weight as well which has to be indicated in plain text.
After selection of a name, the material is directly set as well.
Material List of all available materials
Part Family If part families are defined, you can set them here. The
selection of part family can influence the colour of the
component part.
Detail Style If detailing styles are defined, you can determine them here.
Display Class If display classes are defined, you can determine them here.
Area Class If area classes are defined, you can determine them here.
Description If general part descriptions are defined, you can determine
them here. The selection of the description can influence the
colour and the layer.
Layer Here, you can specify on which layer the plates have to be
stored.
This option permits free picking of a polygon. This polygon is
used to form a poly-plate after the dialog was closed.
No construction lines or similar things are necessary. Take
care that no crossings are generated by your input. Then,
plate creation will not be possible.
This option permits to form a plate on the base of an existing
contour. The contour can be a poly-plate, a circle or an arc
which is not closed.
The plates can alternatively be created on the current UCS or
on the contour ECS.
A rectangular plate with the desired dimensions is created at
the selected insertion point using this option. The form of
polygonal plates can be modified as you like whereas
rectangular plates always remain rectangular unless you
change this status using Change Properties.
Insert a plate at any line using this option. The length of the
line determines the plate length; the width and the thickness
are defined by your input.
Page B.9 - 3
Insert Plates
After having realized this insertion, you can select the position, rotation and the
insertion point via the dialog. The rotation can either be modified in 90°
increments or in freely selectable increments. The plate then is rotated around
the insertion line.
CL After insertion, the plates are still connected with the dialog.
Further modifications are still possible. Use this button to
interrupt this connection.
Dialog-Commands
SURFACE GRID
Click on this button to define the alignment of the surface grid. Usually
this grid is aligned to the plate ECS, it can be modified using this button.
Page B.9 - 4
Insert Plates
PLATE DIMENSIONS
Click on this button to define the calculation direction. First select the
plate and then the direction according to which calculation has to be
made. You can cancel the manual specification of direction in the plate
properties.
BEND
Click on this button to add edged or bent segments to the plate. The
result is a three-dimensionally bent plate which however is representing
a single component part and which can be depicted as flat via unfolding.
A dialog opens where you can select the reference edges and make further
settings (see under ‘Edged Plates’).
Analysis of Dimensions
The calculation of plate dimensions is either carried out according to an
automatic pattern or it can be specified manually. At automatic calculation, the
following order is respected:
Page B.9 - 5
Insert Plates
Page B.9 - 6
Insert
rt Plates
B.9.3 Gratings
Gratings are a special case in plate production. In principle, you can call any
plate a grating, but often customers ask to fall back on standard sizes
depending on the manufacturer. Another problem is to determine the weight for
the parts list which traditionally can only be calculated in an insufficient way.
ProSteel 3D is able to manage gratings (resp. tear plates, fence elements, etc)
in their own database files indicating the exact weight per piece. Here, you can
comfortably select and insert these elements.
Selection List Here, you select a grating element for insertion. The
dimensions are determined by the database and cannot be
modified later.
Click on this button to insert the grating element selected from
the list. In order to do so, you have to click on the point of
insertion.
Click on this button to have distributed the selected grating
element automatically within a boundary.
In order to do so, you first have to click on the border (polyline)
and then specify the alignment and the origin of distribution.
See also under ‘Roof and Wall Covering’.
Page B.9 - 7
Insert Plates
Apart from the different forms of flat plates, you can also create three-
dimensionally edged or bent plates by using ProSteel 3D. These represent a
single 3D-component part which can be depicted in 2D as flat plate with the
corresponding bending edges via
unfolding.
To generate an edged plate, you first have to have inserted a flat plate. This
plate determines the alignment of the edged plate. Now, click on the BEND
button and another dialog opens.
Flange Length Here, you enter the length of the segment in the direction of
the bending angle.
Front Distance Edge Here, you enter the front offset in the direction towards
the reference edge. Positive values mean that inwards the
segment becomes smaller.
Page B.9 - 8
Insert Plates
Rear Distance Edge Here, you enter the rear offset in the direction towards
the reference edge. Positive values mean that inwards the
segment becomes smaller.
Bending Radius The radius of the bend related to the neutral fibre (half of the
plate thickness). To avoid problems with the volume modeller,
the radius should always be a little bit more that half of the
plate thickness.
Bending Angle The angle of the bend; this is related to the reference segment
(reference edge).
Click on this button to rotate the current plate edge including
the subordinate plate edges in positive direction around the
reference edge. The rotation is effected with the angle
specified in the neighbouring input field.
Click on this button to rotate the current plate edge including
the subordinate plate edges in negative direction around the
reference edge. The rotation is effected with the angle
specified in the neighbouring input field.
Dependance of Segments
The following example vividly illustrates the connections between the segments
and their dependencies. You see the isometric depiction of an edged plate and
the plan view on the base plate (1).
First, the segment (2a) was added to the base plate (1) by using a bending
angle of 45°. Then, the segment (3) was added to segment (2a) by also using a
bending angle of 45°, but in addition it was equipped with a front and rear
(positive) distance to the edge. Finally, the segment (2b) was added to the base
plate (1) with a bending angle of 90°.
If you now delete or modify the segment (2a), you will also delete or modify the
depending segment (3).
Page B.9 - 9
Insert Plates
Dialog Commands
ADD SEGMENT
Click on this button to add a new plate edge to the plate. In order to do
so, you have to click on the plate at the desired reference edge of a
plate segment. This determines the alignment of the new segment.
The new plate segment is always subordinate to the reference segment. If the
reference segment is modified later, the new segment will also be modified in
relation to this.
REMOVE SEGMENT
Click on this button to remove an existing plate segment (including all
subordinate segments). In order to do so, you have to click on the plate
segment at any edge you like.
MODIFY SEGMENT
Click on this button to modify an existing plate segment later. In order to
do so, you have to click on the plate segment at any edge you like.
Any subordinate segments of this plate segments will be modified too in
relation to this.
Important Hint: Please take care that you don’t modify the basic polygon
of a plate (e.g. by adding an edge, or similar things) when you have
already added segments for an edged plate. The reference edges of the
segments would be modified as well and the consequence could be an
undesired behaviour.
Page B.9 - 10
Insert Plates
Always ECS If you want to insert a plate after an existing contour, you can
insert it either according to the current UCS or according to
the object contour.
This button has the effect that you always insert according to
the object ECS. The settings on the first page will be ignored.
File Path The file path to possibly existing database files for gratings.
Click on the neighbouring button to comfortably select the
path.
Grating Catalogue
The desired database file for gratings.
Close The dialog is closed after insertion of a plate.
Page B.9 - 11
Insert Plates
Page B.9 - 12
3D-Modifications
For volume modelling, ProSteel 3D does not use the AutoCAD solid command
ACIS, but rather a modified version, which works faster and produces smaller
graph files.
Consequently, you cannot combine ProSteel 3D objects and AutoCAD 3D solids
(e.g. subtract their volumes). In case you do combine objects, there will be no
errors, but nothing will happen! In order to give you the same performance
range as with AutoCAD, all solids have been redefined.
As these solids are real ProSteel 3D objects, they can be processed with the
help of ProSteel 3D commands (e.g. drilled). These solids can be detailed as
normal component part.
Please note that the component parts need a clear direction for detailing. The X-
axis of the UCS valid at insertion is taken as standard. You can, however,
determine the axis anew by means of the context menu „Change PS
Properties“.
Cube/Rectangle: PS_SOLID_BOX
This command creates a rectangular object.
You determine the edges by clicking the two diagonally
opposed corner points or by entering their coordinates. In
case the volume cannot be determined by using the points
you entered (maybe you clicked on two points on a UCS
plane), the program prompts you to enter the missing
dimensions.
Sphere: PS_SOLID_SPHERE
This command creates a sphere.
First, you have to enter the central point of the sphere and
then the diameter of the sphere or click it.
Page B.10 - 1
Insert Solids
Cylinder PS_SOLID_CYLINDER
This command creates a cylinder.
First, you have to enter starting and end point of the cylinder
and then the radius or click it.
Cone PS_SOLID_CONE
This command creates a cone or truncated cone.
First, you have to enter starting and end point of the cone axis
or click it and then the starting and end point radius.
Torus PS_SOLID_TORUS
This command creates a torus.
This requires that you first click or enter the rotation axis and
then enter the outer and inner radius.
First, you have to enter or click the longitudinal axis. Then you
can enter the outer and inner radius at the respective starting
and end point.
Pipe->Rectangle PS_SOLID_RECT2CIRCLE
This command creates a transition from a circular to a
rectangular cross-section.
First, you have to enter or click the lower left and upper right
point of the rectangle and then click the circle.
Page B.10 - 2
3D-Modifications
This requires that you click the points that are to form the
envelope. Using this command, you can create almost any
shape (without arcs).
Extrusion PS_SOLID_EXTRUDE
This command creates a volume by extruding a poly-line,
which you have drawn beforehand.
You first click the poly-line and then enter the desired height.
The poly-line is then extruded along positive Z-direction of
UCS.
Page B.10 - 3
Insert Solids
Page B.10 - 4
3D-Modifications
B.11 3D-Modifications
It may be necessary to correct the length of shapes and plates already inserted
or to provide bevels, notches, etc.
When inserting the component parts, you have paid attention to inserting the
shape at the correct position using the correct alignment, e.g., you have
positioned the axis on a system line. Very often component parts overlap and
must be adapted subsequently. Additionally, it may be necessary to rework your
model due to modifications...
When you select the command, the following main dialog appears with the
commands for all parts.
Page B.11 - 1
3D-Modifications
Cut at Line
The shape is cut at an imaginary plane, the line being oriented vertically to the
active UCS-plane. Working in a view simplifies your work, since the shape is cut
“at this line”. If the shape could intersect with the line (i.e. you consider the line
to be of infinite length!), the shape is cut. To extend the shape, hold down the
ALT key while clicking the end to be extended.
Page B.11 - 2
3D-Modifications
Page B.11 - 3
3D-Modifications
Cut at Shape
The shape is cut or extended at another shape. When the shape is cut,
the shorter section is always cut off.
Click the shape to be cut and then the shape along which this shape is
to be cut.
The plane actually hit by the centerline (or the extended centerline) of the shape
to be cut will be the cut plane. If the centerline does not meet any surface, no
cut can be made!
Please note that a logical link is created between the parts if this option is
applied. The result will be that if one part is modified, the cut will be
automatically updated.
Divide a Shape
By using this function, you can divide a shape at a cutting line into two
shapes. A single shape, a plate or several elements can be divided into
two independent elements.
To start with, select the shape to be divided. Then, click the cutting line. When
you have entered a distance in the main dialog Distance, both new ends will be
shortened by this value. Depending on the setting, you can divide several
elements at the same time.
However, please note that the distance refers to a vertical distance between
shape and cutting line.
Distance The two new shapes are shortened by this value at the cutting
line. The arising gap has the double distance value.
At Plane If this option has been checked, you are asked for three
points, which have to form a plane. The parts are divided
along this plane.
Page B.11 - 4
3D-Modifications
The cutting line may be any line. If the line is slanted, the shapes are divided
accordingly. If you indicate only one point, it will be used perpendicular to the
centerlines.
The information for the parts lists is identical for both parts with that of the initial
shape, except for the length. In order to master the course of the cut line better,
it is recommended to work in one of the view.
For example, you can easily create changed girders at platform constructions by
first laying the shapes to be changed as a whole and then dividing them at their
bottom trains. Vice versa, bottom trains can be removed rapidly and the
changes at this position can be cancelled.
Change to the top view and use the dialog box for the processing of the
elements. As an alternative, you can also process the Y-axes of the general
overview in the front view.
Page B.11 - 5
3D-Modifications
Page B.11 - 6
3D-Modifications
Rectangular Outlet
Page B.11 - 7
3D-Modifications
Wedge-Type Outlet
Page B.11 - 8
3D-Modifications
Circular Outlet
Page B.11 - 9
3D-Modifications
Position
You still have the possibility to rotate the inserted notch or cut-out by any of the
three coordinate axes. Just click the +90/-90 button, if you want to rotate the cut-
out in 90° steps. If you require a different angle just enter the value into the
Rotation Angle field and then click the +PHI/-PHI button.
Page B.11 - 10
3D-Modifications
Polygonal Cut-Outs
Using this command, you can cut out shapes along any freely drawn contour
(poly-line). Thus, you can e.g. create notches that are not covered by the
program via the special notch function.
You can also subtract one shape from another to create penetrations, e.g. to
obtain slotted tubes, penetrated handrail posts or others.
If you have entered a value in the Gap Spacing input field of the main dialog, the
cut-out is regularly extended to all directions by the indicated value to gain some
“space” for inaccuracies of production.
In any case, the created polygon will be extended to the top and to the bottom in
the UCS Z-plane. Therefore, please pay attention that your UCS has been
selected accordingly. In case of a direct use of this function via the command
bar, the current settings of the main dialog apply.
Click this button if you have not yet a contour in form of a poly-
line or circle or arc.
You can enter the different points as you like, but be careful
that the lines don’t overlap in the polygon.
Click this button if you have already a contour in form of a
poly-line, etc.
Click this button if you want to subtract the contour of another
solid from the selected object (penetration or solid to be
subtracted).
Complete Here, you select whether the solid to be subtracted has to
penetrate the selected object completely or partially. This is
not valid for solids to be subtracted.
Gap Spacing Here, you can indicate a gap by which the cut contour is
increased before the subtraction.
If you have ‘divided’ a shape using this function, you will not obtain two shapes.
This has to do with the volume modeller of AutoCAD. You must take care not to
create two parts of a shape - e.g., by prior shape shortening.
If you want to obtain two shapes, please use first the function ‘Divide’ and divide
the shape at a suitable point.
Page B.11 - 11
3D-Modifications
In the following you can see two examples for the working of polygonal cut-outs:
on the left, there is a normal poly-cut and on the right, there is a milling via a
solid to be subtracted.
Create a Penetration
On the first two pictures, you see the situation in the front
view and in the top view (the cutting planes are switched
off so that you can see the depth.
in the third picture, you see the cut-outs in the big tube
(the two slanted tubes have been omitted in this
representation).
Page B.11 - 12
3D-Modifications
Shortening
Click this button to shorten a shape by picking two points.
Their perpendicular distance to the center line specifies the
shortening value.
Click this button to shorten a shape by explicitly indicating the
value.
Page B.11 - 13
3D-Modifications
Extend
These functions can be used analogously to shape shortening
in order to extend a shape. However, this doesn’t work if the
selected end has been modified by a cut.
Mitered Cut
Using this command, you can combine two shapes by means
of a mitered cut, which can also be carried out as 3D-cut.
The bisecting line determines the cutting plane. If the height of
the two shapes differs, the outer edges are not aligned.
Using this command, you can also carry out a mitered cut.
The intersection points of outer and inner edges determine the
cutting plane here.
This means that even shapes of different height are correctly
cut aligned.
This function cuts two shapes in a way that an arc element of
the shape type picked first can be inserted with the specified
radius.
Radius The radius of the arc element to be inserted; this radius can
either be entered as absolute value or as many times the
maximum diameter of the first shape. In this case, you enter
e.g. *2.
Gap A gap of this thickness is kept between the shapes at mitered
cuts.
Page B.11 - 14
3D-Modifications
Please note that a logical link is created between the parts at these cutting
commands. The result will be that if one part is modified, the cut will be
automatically updated.
Here, you see some examples for mitered cuts, which have been created using
different variants:
Page B.11 - 15
3D-Modifications
Modify Contour
Use this function to add another edge to the plate. For this
purpose, you have to pick the plate at the position to be
inserted.
Now, a new contour point will be created at the picked
position, which can be moved using the grips.
Use this function to delete an edge from the plate.
Page B.11 - 16
3D-Modifications
Mitered Cut
These functions permit mitered cuts between two plates.
Since they are identical with those of the shapes, you can
refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Gap A gap of this thickness is kept between the plates at mitered
cuts.
Page B.11 - 17
3D-Modifications
ProSteel 3D permits you to create wall elements so that you can have displayed
for example the neighbouring buildings of your construction as well, if need be.
These functions help you for further processing the wall elements, e.g. to attach
openings.
Windows/Doors
Height Height of the window or door
Width Width of the window or door
Radius The radius of the rounding of the upper edge of a window or
door
Breast Height Breast height of the window
Click on this button to insert a window opening into an existing
wall element.
Click on this button to insert a door opening into an existing
wall element.
Page B.11 - 18
3D-Modifications
Edges
Click on this button to insert an additional vertical edge into an
existing wall element.
Click on this button to remove a vertical edge from an existing
wall element.
Specify Height
Click on this button to specify the height of a vertical edge at
the upper or lower side of the wall anew. Afterwards, the wall
is running diagonally from the neighbouring corner points to
the modified corner point.
Page B.11 - 19
3D-Modifications
Multiple Selection
Cut at line You can cut several parts simultaneously at one line without
having to select the function once again.
Cut at Object You can cut several parts simultaneously at another part
without having to select the function once again.
Divide You can divide several parts simultaneously without having to
select the function once again.
Polycuts You can cut an object simultaneously at several poly-lines
without having to select the function once again.
Loop
Cut at Lines The command ‘Cut at Line’ is repeated until it is explicitly
interrupted.
Cut at Object The command ‘Cut at Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly
interrupted.
Divide The command ‘Divide Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly
interrupted.
Page B.11 - 20
3D-Modifications
Miscellaneous
Close Dialog The dialog is immediately closed after an action.
Otherwise, you have to quit it manually, but you could at once
select another command instead.
Page B.11 - 21
3D-Modifications
B.11.6 Notch
Producing a Notch
For this purpose, you first have to click on the shape, which has to be notched,
and then the shape specifying the contour.
When you select the command, the connection is created on the base of your
last setting. Now you can fit the connection in the appearing dialog; you can
check the result immediately in the model.
Page B.11 - 22
3D-Modifications
Layout Here, you select the shape of the cope. The different variants
are shown in the picture below:
Group Distances
Distances The following dimensions can be set for upper flange and
bottom flange separately:
Page B.11 - 23
3D-Modifications
In the Radius input field, you can indicate the radius of ‘Drill
Holes’ or ‘Radial’ option.
Page B.11 - 24
3D-Modifications
Standardized Notches
Page B.11 - 25
3D-Modifications
B.11.7 Outlet
Using this function, you can insert simple geometrical shapes of outlets and
countersunk parts into your shapes. With repeated use, any complex structure
can be created.
You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes. The dimensions are
entered via a dialog box. Since the entered data can be directly checked on
screen, the entries are not described in detail.
Creation of Outlets
When selecting the function you are prompted to indicate the shape to feature a
cut-out. First, click the shape and then select the cut-out insertion point.
The following dialog box appears where you enter the dimensions of the cut-out
and its relation to the insertion point. In the model, the current shape of the cut-
out is shown in red colour. After quitting the dialog box, the displayed cut-out will
be cut from the shape.
Page B.11 - 26
3D-Modifications
Apart from rectangular contours, cut-outs can also be created with a wedge-
shaped or with a cylindrical (radial) contour.
Position
The dialog box ‘POSITION Folder’ also offers you the option to rotate the
inserted notch or cut-out by any of the three coordinate axes.
Just click the +90/-90 button, if you want to rotate the cut-out in 90° steps. If you
require a different angle just enter the value into the Rotation Angle field and
then click the +PHI/-PHI button.
Page B.11 - 27
3D-Modifications
Here, you see the example for creating a cut-out in a shape or in a plate:
Page B.11 - 28
3D-Modifications
For volume modelling, ProSteel 3D does not use the AutoCAD volume modeller
ACIS but the modeller which is used in Architectural Desktop as well. This
modeller works faster and produces smaller graph files.
Consequently, you cannot process ProSteel 3D objects with the Boolean
operations of AutoCAD (e.g. subtract their volumes). In case you do combine
objects, there will be no errors, but nothing will happen! In order to give you the
same performance range as with AutoCAD, all Boolean operations were
redefined (see also the command → ’Basic Solids’). Another option is to use the
ProSteel 3D properties to convert the Prosteel 3D objects into ACIS volume
models and then to process them with AutoCAD. Your drawings will then
become larger and more sluggish.
Add PS_ADD
This command creates a new volume by adding two existing
volumes.
You have to click both objects and the newly created object
receives all parts list information of the object you clicked on
first.
Subtract PS_SUB
This command creates a new volume by subtracting one or
several volumes from an existing volume.
First, you have to click the object from which the other
volumes are to be subtracted. Then click the objects whose
volume is to be subtracted (these will be deleted in the
process!).
The new object receives all parts list information of the object
you clicked on first. Please note, that you will not create two
independent objects in case you “split” the first object in the
process.
Page B.11 - 29
3D-Modifications
Cut-Set PS_COMMON
You have to click both objects and the new object will receive
all parts list information of the object you clicked on first.
The first part is brought into line with the second, while
preserving the second part.
Page B.11 - 30
Plate Editor
A special plate editor is available for processing of plates. This editor allows for
modifying the contour by adding or separating poly-lines in a fast and
comfortable way. You may see the poly-line as a plate of the same thickness
and position like the plate to be processed.
In addition, you can add chamfers and edges. All commands can also be carried
out via the normal manipulation. The use of the plate editor is recommended
when poly-plates have to be processed in complex situations because it can
hide the other component parts and it automatically enters the plate level.
When loading the function, click the plate to be modified first. Then a dialog
appears where you can enter further indications with regard to the desired
processing.
Page B.12 - 1
Plate Editor
Boolean Opera… Here, you specify what kind of processing has to be carried
out: either Add, Subtract or Common.
Side Select from which side of the plate the processing has to be
carried out.
Contour You can use a polygon either as complete solid or as contour
line. Please pay attention that the poly-line has to be closed,
even if it is used as contour.
Distance If the poly-line is used as complete contour, you can enter an
offset towards the contour.
Milling Width If the poly-line has to be used as milling contour, you can
enter the width of the contour here.
Depth Here, you enter the depth of processing if the poly-line is not
used completely continuous.
Hide Parts If this option is activated, all other component parts are hidden
at plate selection. This is valid from the next selection onward.
Continued The poly-line is used as solid with the plate thickness, i.e.
continuous.
Page B.12 - 2
Plate Editor
Page B.12 - 3
Plate Editor
Chamfer
Use this button to select the corresponding corner of the plate
if you want to add a chamfer to a plate. Then, the input fields
are released.
Layout Here, you select which kind of chamfer has to be carried out:
straight, convex or concave.
Radius/1st. Edge Here, you indicate the radius at convex/concave version or the
length of the first edge at straight version.
2nd. Edge Here, you indicate the length of the second edge of the
straight chamfer.
Page B.12 - 4
Plate Editor
Rounding Off
Use this button to select the corresponding plate edge to
round off an edge. Then, the input fields are released.
You can define the rounding off either via the radius or via the
height of the rounding above the straight edge.
Radius Specify the rounding radius.
Min. Radius Here, the program shows you the minimum radius that is
possible.
Height Specify the height above the straight edge.
Max. Height Here, the program shows you the maximum height that is
possible.
Page B.12 - 5
Plate Editor
This function serves for processing of one or more edges. The edges can be
chamfered, rounded off, been equipped with a radius or seamed.
Page B.12 - 6
Plate Editor
Top Side The processing is made at the upper side of the plate.
Bottom Side The processing is made at the lower side of the plate.
Top Edge Var1 This value is either the length of the first
edge, the rounding radius or the depth of the seam.
Top Edge Var2 This value is either the length of the second edge or the height
of the seam.
Selected Edge Here, you indicate from which edge to which edge the
processing has to be made.
When you click the edge and the side is switched on, the
edges are displayed in a numbered way. You can select the
processing area. If the starting value is equal to the end value,
the processing will be carried out all around.
Page B.12 - 7
Plate Editor
Page B.12 - 8
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Shapes and plates can be provided with different drill holes. Existing drill holes
of a shape can be transferred to another shape, and oblong holes, countersunk
holes or step borings can be created as well. Now, it is also possible to create
thread holes.
In addition, you can use this command to bolt component parts directly without
having to generate drill holes first. Then, you can carry out the ‘Bolt’ command.
The distribution of bolts is indicated in the same way as for drill holes but the
bolts automatically create the necessary drill holes in all participating component
parts.
The program manages drill holes in the form of Drill Hole Fields. This means
that groups consisting, for instance, of 2 x 2 holes will be drilled in one
operation. In the dialog box you enter the individual hole pitches and then insert
the complete hole group.
The drilling depth is always along the Z-axis of the active UCS plane. A
description of the drill hole field is given in the X/Y plane of the active UCS.
Although it would be possible to drill holes in the general overview (global view),
it is easier to work in one of the views.
After selection of the command, a dialog box appears where you can set the
basic behaviour of the command and other default parameters. Depending on
the selection, the displayed content may differ.
Page B.13 - 1
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Layout Select the general form of the drill hole field here.
Rectangular – In a rectangular drill hole field, the drill holes
are arranged in a rectangular way around the insertion point
forming rows and columns.
Radial – In a radial drill hole field, the drill holes are arranged
in a complete or partial circle around the insertion point.
Additional input fields are displayed allowing you to define
round drill hole fields.
Single Holes – The position of each single hole can be
determined individually.
Page B.13 - 2
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Page B.13 - 3
Drilling / Bolted Connections
You can also adopt a drill hole field with simultaneous bolted
connection into a new shape so that the new shape is drilled
first and then bolted. First select the properties of the shape
and click on the EDIT button in the “Drill Holes” tab.
The drill hole dialog described here will be displayed and you
can adopt the drill holes with bolts using ‘Bolts/Add’.
Monitor Here you can see the creation of the drill hole field and define
the insertion point.
Page B.13 - 4
Drilling / Bolted Connections
You can enter the predefined marking gauges of the shape by typing the letter
W instead of a pitch, e.g. 2*W. If no specific marking gauge has been defined for
the current shape, the program will prompt you to enter one.
Page B.13 - 5
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Alternatively to drilling option, you can directly add a bolted connection to the
component parts. For this purpose, you have to select at least 2 component
parts the distance of which is not bigger than specified in the gap input field.
All settings with regard to drill hole field, diameter, etc. are made on the first
page.
Page B.13 - 6
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Single Hole Bolt The insertion of bolts into a part is allowed as well.
Turn The bolts are turned before insertion.
Update auto The connection is automatically updated if a component part
has been modified. A logical link is created between the
participating component parts.
Page B.13 - 7
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Page B.13 - 8
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Page B.13 - 9
Drilling / Bolted Connections
ProSteel 3D can automatically verify the admissible edge distance during drilling
of component parts. It is also possible to carry out this control manually for
certain parts.
If an automatic control has to take place, which is activated directly during
drilling, you have to switch on the corresponding option in the global settings.
You can specify the admissible edge distances of shapes and plates for each
hole diameter in a table. The corresponding drill hole then will be verified by
means of this table and the part will be marked in colour if the distance is too
small. If the automatic control is activated, an info window appears during
drilling. However, the drilling will be realized nevertheless.
In this table, you can assign the corresponding minimum distances for any
existing drill hole diameter, separated according to shapes and plates.
Page B.13 - 10
Drilling / Bolted Connections
When you quit this dialog with OK, the indicated values are adopted into the
table and this list is sorted anew according to the available diameters.
Automatic Control
If the automatic control of the edge distances has been activated and the
program detects smaller edge distances during an operation, a warning
message will be displayed.
However, this warning is only a hint; the corresponding drill hole will
nevertheless be inserted into the component part. Please note that this
message might not appear before end of the action.
Page B.13 - 11
Drilling / Bolted Connections
Page B.13 - 12
Bolts
B.14 Bolts
After all component parts, to be bolted with each other are selected, the
program checks the position of the parts with regard to possible bolting (if need
be, with regard to drillings which are situated one above the other and having an
allowable tolerance; but it does not check possible mounting). Necessary bolt
lengths are calculated and the bolts are inserted according to your default
settings with regard to type and possible washers. Then, the bolts are adopted
into a bolt list for later parts list.
Bolt management is still effected via styles, which may be created by the user.
There is however one important modification: the necessary data from which the
bolts are generated are not summed up any more but they have been divided
into the corresponding components. This allows you to put together the
components of a bolting completely; and length calculation is designed on the
basis of the selected component parts. The result is considerably more flexible
and bolt definitions more accurate.
Page B.14 - 1
Bolts
s
The components are bolted automatically after part selection and selection of
the bolt style. The holes in the component parts are analysed and the
corresponding bolts are selected and inserted.
After having loaded the function, you will get the following screen display:
Page B.14 - 2
Bolts
Length Addition Indicates the value by which the bolts are extended. This is
valid for all kinds of insertion.
Gap distance Indicates the maximum distance between two holes which are
assumed to belong to the bolting. If this value is exceeded the
holes cannot be bolted.
Angle difference This is the difference of the angles of the drilled holes in
degrees. If this value is exceeded, the holes don't align and
cannot be bolted.
Colours bolt= indicates the colour of the bolt on the monitor,
monitor= indicates the colour of monitor background
This button allows bolting of component parts.
Select the desired parts and the bolts will be inserted into
these component parts according to the existing holes.
This button allows bolting of component parts.
Select the desired parts as well as the area of bolting and the
bolts will be inserted into these component parts according to
the existing holes.
This option permits manual insertion of a bolt. Select start and
endpoint of grip length and the bolt will be inserted.
This button permits to attach a single nut and/or disk without
the corresponding bolt.
To do so, pick the insertion point of the nut or washer and then
the direction of the bolt head (where it would normally be).
To attach a nut and/or washer directly at a round bar steel,
first press the ESC-key, and then click the round bar steel at
the desired end.
This button allows rotation of one or several bolts. Select the
corresponding bolts and they will be rotated.
Page B.14 - 3
Bolts
s
Bolt style Here, user selects the bolt style, which is to be modified.
This button opens the dialog for bolt definition.
Page B.14 - 4
Bolts
Page B.14 - 5
Bolts
s
Bolt Definition
When the button for bolt definition is pressed, the following dialog opens:
Page B.14 - 6
Bolts
Parts list entry Here you specify the entry of this bolt, which is to be written
into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may be
used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt length.
In addition, the following two variables are possible: $(GLM)
for min grip length and $(GLX) for max grip length.
Export name This name is used for data export. The above-mentioned
conditions are valid as well.
Material Here the bolt material is selected. Only those materials are
listed which have been defined as bolt materials.
Tension Enter the tension as a percentage.
Length Addition Enter the additional length of the bolts. The bolt will be
extended by this value after length calculation.
Layout Specify whether the bolt has to be a shop bolt or an assembly
bolt. This specification has influences on the parts list. When
an assembly list is created, only assembly bolts will be taken
into consideration.
Units Specify the units the data file is based on.
Coating Select the coating of the bolt.
Colour Select the colour of the bolt in the model.
Bitmap You may select a bitmap that is used in the selection lists of
this style.
Click on this button to open the AutoCAD-dialog for colour
selection. When you have clicked on the corresponding input
field before, you can comfortably select the colour.
Click on this button to open the file selection dialog and you
can select the bitmap for the bolt style.
Countersunk head
The bolt is displayed as countersunk bolt.
Parts list entry The bolt is adopted into the parts list.
Inner Hexagon The bolt is executed as inner hexagon.
Page B.14 - 7
Bolts
No DM Check For this bolt, a diameter check will not be carried out.
Normally, all entered diameters which are found will be
reduced to standard values; e.g. a bolt with bolt diameter
DM=12.5mm cannot be created.
Individual Mounting Space
The bolt has a standard mounting space or the bolt style has
an individual mounting space.
Upper Area Enter the width of the mounting space at the bolt head either
as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the
diameter via *xx or as addition to the diameter via +xx.
Enter the length of the mounting space at the bolt head either
as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the length
via *xx or as addition to the length via +xx.
Lower Area Enter the width of the mounting space at the bolt base either
as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the
diameter via *xx or as addition to the diameter via +xx.
Enter the length of the mounting space at the bolt base either
as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the nut
height via *xx or as addition to the nut height via +xx.
Page B.14 - 8
Bolts
s
Nut Definition
Data file Indicates which data files are used for nuts with this style.
Only nut files are displayed.
Partlist entry Here you specify the entry of this nut, which are to be written
into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may be
used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt length.
Export name This name is used for data export. The above-mentioned
conditions are valid as well.
Material Here the bolt material is selected. Only those materials are
listed which have been defined as bolt materials.
Partlist Entry The nut is adopted into the parts list.
Page B.14 - 9
Bolts
s
Washer Definition
Data file Indicates which data files are used for washers with this style.
Only washer files are displayed.
Parts list entry Here you specify the entry of this washer, which is to be
written into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may
be used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt
length.
Export name This name is used for data export. The above-mentioned
conditions are valid as well.
Material Here the washer material is selected. Only those materials are
listed which have been defined as bolt materials.
Partlist entry The washer is adopted into the parts list.
Page B.14 - 10
Bolts
s
Data file Indicates which data files are used for washers with this style.
Only washer files are displayed.
Parts Entry U-washer
This definition is used in case U-shapes are applied. The
same is valid for I-washers.
Here, you specify the entry of this washer, which has to be
written into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may
be used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt
length.
Export name this name is used for data export. The above-mentioned
conditions are valid as well.
Material Here, the washer material is selected. Only those materials
are listed which have been defined as bolt material.
Partlist entry The washer is adopted into the parts list.
Replace standard washer
The standard washer is also executed as wedge washer for
this definition.
Page B.14 - 11
Bolts
s
On this page, you can define threaded rods and insert them into the model.
Bolt Style Use the indicated style to define the thread of the threaded
rod.
Diameter Indicates the diameter of the threaded rod.
End Offset Indicates the end offset of the threaded rod.
Round to Rounds the overall length of the threaded rod to the indicated
value.
The threaded rod is inserted into the model by using 2 points.
Page B.14 - 12
Bolts
s
B.14.4 Sort
This dialog page serves for management of bolt style selection lists and for
creation of new bolt styles.
Serves for creation of new bolt styles. After selection, you are
asked for the name of the new style. Then, the style is created
and is equipped with the settings of the current style.
Allows loading of a style from the file. The style is inserted at
the current position.
Page B.14 - 13
Bolts
Page B.14 - 14
Insert Stiffeners
Insertion of Stiffeners
You can insert stiffeners either in views or in the global view. When you have
selected normal stiffeners (i.e. stiffeners running vertically to the shape axis),
you are prompted to specify the shape where the stiffeners are to be inserted.
After selection, the program prompts you to specify the center of the insertion
point of the stiffeners. Click the point you want on the shape or on a construction
line. Your pick point is generally placed perpendicular to the shape axis.
When you have selected ‘Full Stiffener’, the stiffener is inserted to fit. When you
have selected ‘Half Stiffener’ or ‘To Measure’, you are prompted to specify the
fastening side of the stiffeners. Click the flange side with which the stiffeners are
to be in contact.
Let’s assume that you have drawn the construction lines on the upper flange in
the top view as shown on the left. If you click the line at any point, the pick point
is always positioned perpendicular to the axis and used as the insertion point of
the stiffeners.
Page B.15 - 1
Insert Stiffeners
Dimensions
Layout Here you select the shape of the inner corners of the
stiffeners.
Page B.15 - 2
Insert Stiffeners
Page B.15 - 3
Insert
rt Stiffeners
Connect
On this page you specify the weld style in the case the stiffeners have to be
welded directly. You can also attach weld cracks to mark the stiffeners in the
shape.
Page B.15 - 4
Insert Stiffeners
Create Group If this field is checked, the stiffeners and the shape are
arranged to create a group. If the shape is already part of
another group, the stiffeners are allocated to that other group.
Options
Angle insertion If this field is checked, stiffeners can be inserted in the shape
using a slant. At insertion, you are prompted for a line
specifying the direction.
The necessary extension of the stiffener width is automatically
calculated.
Page B.15 - 5
Insert Stiffeners
Angle Here you can enter the position angle related to the centerline.
2D-Section If this field is checked, an automatic 2D section is inserted
directly at the stiffener. This section can be displayed during
detailing.
The cutting plane is situated slightly in front of the stiffener and
it ends slightly behind the stiffener; the cutting direction is
always in shape direction.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Oblique Stiffeners
In principle, the insertion of oblique stiffeners is the same as described above,
except for the fact that you are prompted to define a position line of the
stiffeners. Click a (construction) line showing the orientation of the stiffeners.
Now, the stiffeners are inserted into the shape in an oblique position. The
distances refer to the outer corners of the stiffener plates.
If you select the command via “PS_RIP_ANGLE”, you will be prompted for the
position line right during input and can then click it.
Show the center line of the shape in the top view and use the ‘virtual point of
intersection without Z’, in order to get an exact center point of insertion using the
‘point of intersection’ of the axis and the construction line.
Page B.15 - 6
Plate Connections
No further action on your part is required because the program does the rest for
you. The shape to be connected is cut to the proper length and is fitted with the
connection plate. The plate and supporting shape are drilled and bolted together
and – depending on your selection – the additional components for the stiffeners
are attached.
Then you will see a plate connection with the default values of the last
connection created with this function followed by the display of the dialog for the
parameter settings.
If you want to create e.g. a plate resistant to deflection instead, just switch to the
dialog tab for plates resistant to deflection and select the desired plate. On
screen, the connection changes immediately to display the current settings.
Switch back to the layout tab to see the current dimensions, which can be
dynamically adjusted.
Page B.16 1
Plate Connections
Layout of Plate Specify the layout of the connecting plate. The following figure
displays different connection types, which can be created.
Page B.16 - 2
Plate Connections
Group Dimensions
Width means the width of the plate (in case of I shapes: parallel to
the shape flange).
Thickness means the thickness of the plate.
Length means a fixed length of the plate independent of the shape
height.
Entering the value 0 for the length, you can enter the plate
length variably in the Offset Top and Offset Bottom fields as
distance from the upper and lower edge of the selected shape.
Gap means that an indicated space is left between the supporting
shape and the plate. This allows you to consider e.g. finishing
tolerances.
Offset Top means the distance from the upper shape edge. Positive
values reduce the plate dimensions towards the middle.
Negative values increase the plate dimensions beyond the
shape.
Offset means the distance from the lower shape edge. Positive
values reduce the plate dimensions towards the middle.
Negative values increase the plate dimensions beyond the
shape.
Doubler Plate Here, you can create a second plate with different dimensions
than the first one. The input fields for the dimensions of the
second plate are released after the option has been clicked.
As Poly-Plate The inserted end plates are not created as flats but as poly-
plate.
Rotate Connection In case of asymmetric plates you can define the plate
position here. Use this option to turn the complete connection
by 180° around the insertion axis, if upper and lower side were
exchanged at generation of the connection.
Page B.16 3
Plate Connections
Equal Plates If you want to insert two identical plates, you have to activate
the option Double Plate and set the option Equal Plates.
Now the dimensions of the second plate are the same as for
the first one and two identical plates are inserted.
Click this button to adjust the first plate to the cross-section of
any existing shape.
Click this button to copy the data of the first plate into the input
fields of the second plate.
Plate Offset Horizontal means that the complete plate connection is shifted
parallel to the flange of the connecting shape.
Vertical means that the complete plate connection is shifted
parallel to the web of the connecting shape.
The different default types can be called directly as well. If you have selected
the connection type ‘Splice’, you can define a separation line for a continuous
shape by pressing RETURN or the right mouse button when you are prompted
for the supporting shape.
Normal: PS_ENDPLATE_NORM
As Splice: PS_ENDPLATE_SPLICE
At Flange: PS_ENDPLATE_FLANGE
Page B.16 - 4
Plate Connections
Drill Holes
Group Vertical
The drill hole spacing in a vertical direction (height) is determined. Depending on
the entry, the values have different meanings. Examples are given at the end of
the command description.
Upside Here, you enter the distance of the upper row of holes from
the plate’s upper edge. If this value is 0, and the value in the
box Downside is also 0, the only entry that will be used is in
the Middle field.
Middle Here, you enter the distance of the first and second row of
holes from the upper and lower plate edge. The holes will be
distributed uniformly between the two outer holes if this value
is 0. The other rows of holes will be arranged in the same
manner if the number is greater than 4.
Downside Here, you enter the distance of the lowest row of holes from
the plate’s lower edge. If this value is 0, and the value in the
box Upside is also 0, the only entry that will be used is in the
Middle field.
Page B.16 5
Plate Connections
Group Horizontal
The drill hole spacing in a horizontal direction (width) is defined here. Examples
are given at the end of the command description.
Left Here, you enter the distance between the outer left row of
holes and the central left row of holes, if the number of rows is
4.
Middle Here, you enter the distance between the two inner rows of
holes. The rows of holes are generally arranged centrally,
unless they are offset by an entry in the Offset field.
Right Here, you enter the distance between the outer right row of
holes and the central right row of holes, if the number of rows
is 4.
Offset Here, you enter a simultaneous shifting of all rows of holes
with respect to the right plate edge. If you enter a negative
value, shifting will be carried out with respect to the left plate
edge.
Page B.16 - 6
Plate Connections
Connect
Bolt Settings
Bolt style You can select the type of bolts (e.g., DIN 6914) to be used for
the connection using this list.
Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose Here, you enter the required clearance of the bolted
connection, in most cases 2 mm.
Click this button to process the bolt style or to create a new
one.
Weld Settings
Weld Style Specify the kind of weld seam.
Weld... You can specify which weld seams have to be created in the
model using the options Weld Flange Side or Weld Web Side.
The Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the
corresponding input fields.
Click this button to process the weld style or to create a new
one.
Page B.16 7
Plate Connections
Stiffening Plates
As Poly-Plate All kinds of stiffening plates described here which normally are
carried out as flats can be transformed into a poly-plate using
this option.
Backer Plates You can specify additional backer plates automatically or
according to certain dimensions. Thickness, width and length
can be specified separately.
Top Plate A cover plate can be created According to Girder in an
automate way. The cover plate can be adjusted even further
via thickness, edge distance and offset.
Web Plates
Web Plates Additional web plates can be generated as well. Indicate the
position of the web plate by means of the option web plate left
and web plate right.
Dimensions The size is specified by thickness, width and length.
Drill Holes No/Dia. indicates the number and the diameter of the drill
holes. The Hole Distance and the horizontal and vertical offset
of the web plate to the plate centre can be specified as well.
Page B.16 - 8
Plate Connections
Stiffeners
Stiffener On the side of the end plate, stiffeners are inserted into the
supporting shape at the level of the flanges.
Inner Stiffeners Use this option to create additional stiffeners between the
already created stiffeners. In the input fields, you specify the
number and the distance to the upper and lower edge of the
plate.
Support Stiffeners Here, you can insert additional diagonal ribs into the
supporting shape. With the Height entry, you define the
distance of the lower insertion point to the inner side of the
flange.
The prerequisite for generating this stiffeners is the use of a
bottom train having a rib on the side of the bottom train an a
cover plate.
Click this button to select the command for insertion or edition
of stiffeners. Here, you can modify the values and create new
templates.
Please note that the settings for stiffeners cannot be made independently here.
You only select a template containing the necessary parameters.
The advantage is that you have to define a certain kind of stiffener only once
and then only select it by using its name. However, you mustn’t forget that in
case of modifying this page after having modified this stiffener template
the existing stiffeners are updated as well (i.e. they will obtain the
dimensions of the modified template).
Page B.16 9
Plate Connections
Here, you see an example of an end plate connection with bottom train, cover
plate and diagonal stiffener in the supporting shape:
Page B.16 - 10
Plate Connections
Bottom Train
You can add additional haunches and further stiffeners to each of the previous
connections and create a strengthened connection. Bolted knees, etc. can be
generated in a relative fast way.
Select Haunch If the entry Top Haunch is checked, the haunch will be created
on the upper side of the shape to be connected. If the entry
Bottom Haunch is checked, the haunch will be created on the
lower side of the shape to be connected.
Haunch Length the length of the bottom train
Cut Width the width of the bottom train at the intersection side
Top Height the width of the bottom train at the top side
Flange Width the width of the bottom train flange
Flange Thickness the flange thickness of the bottom train
Plate Thickness the thickness of the web plate of the bottom train
Facet Size chamfer preset at the supporting side of the web plate
Facet Horizontal specification of the horizontal part of the chamfer at the
connection side
Facet Vertical specification of the vertical part of the chamfer at the connection
side
Page B.16 11
Plate Connections
Page B.16 - 12
Plate Connections
Form Group
Form Group
Create Group At insertion of the end plate connection, groups are
automatically created out of the inserted parts.
With Bolts Bolts are added to the group as well.
With Welds Welds are added to the group as well.
Notches
Safety Copes... For the end plate connection, you can specify at which
position a safety notch has to be inserted. This is a standard
process in Northern America.
You can choose whether you want to attach the notch on the
Top left, on the bottom left, on the top right or on the bottom
right.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page B.16 13
Plate Connections
In the selection list, you can see the connections according to DAST, which is
available for the selected shapes. You can control the basic connection data in
this list, and the necessary shape stiffeners are displayed as well.
Tension, Shear... Here, you can enter a maximum load for the connection (in
KN) for the corresponding load type. In the list, only the
connections suitable for these loads will be displayed.
Plate List In this list, the possible connections according to DAST are
displayed. Select the desired connection by clicking it.
The individual list fields display the data on which the
connection is based. You might have to shift the column size
to view all data. After the selection, the connection is
immediately updated with these data and the values are
transferred to the other dialog tabs for possible adaptation.
No Connection Possible
Page B.16 - 14
Plate Connections
Page B.16 15
Plate Connections
Page B.16 - 16
Plate Connections
Just as the data for plates resistant to deflection and those subject to shear
forces is recorded in databases, you can also create a database containing
user-defined plate connections and later load these stored types using a
selection list.
In principle, this serves the same purpose as storing and then loading free
plates with the template function. User-defined plate connections can display a
larger amount of data in a more clearly organized structure because all
parameters are visible in the view.
You can also process or export the data with any standard DBASE editor.
Since the dialog and process after creation of the database is almost identical –
except for the selection - with those for the plates resistant to deflection, you can
refer to this chapter for the meaning of the settings (see ‘Plates Resistant to
Deflection‘). How to create the database is listed in the technical supplement or
just ask ProSteel 3D dealer.
Page B.16 17
Plate Connections
Page B.16 - 18
Base Plates According to DSTV
Page B.17 1
Base Plates According to DSTV
Layout
Group Options
In Shape Direction If this option is activated, the plate is always attached
normally beneath the shape. If the shape is slanted in the
space, the plate is slanted as well.
Page B.17 - 2
Base Plates According to DSTV
Drill Holes
Page B.17 3
Base Plates According to DSTV
Bolts / Dowels
On this page, you make the settings of anchor bolts or welds. Anchor bolts are
only displayed as symbols and cannot be detailed.
Group Bolts
Tie Bolts Anchor bolts are inserted for the inner drill holes.
Label The designation of anchor bolts for the parts list; this name
can contain two variables, $(ID) for inner diameter and
$(OD) for outer diameter.
...Outside Anchor bolts are inserted for the outer drill hole field as well, if
defined.
Use Dowel Dowel elements are created as volume bodies.
Input Field You can specify a database file from which the dowel
definitions can be taken.
In Bolt Partlist The dowels are taken over into the bolt part list.
No Detailing The dowels are not taken over into the DetailCenter.
Group Weld Settings
Weld Style Style name for the welds if a weld has to be effected.
Page B.17 - 4
Base Plates According to DSTV
Standard Definitions
Data base entries are saved for certain DIN shapes. If you have selected a
shape having such entries, these will be displayed in this window. You can
influence the selection by means of different selection criteria. Only data records
corresponding to these criteria will be displayed.
Support Load Enter the minimum load of supports which is known. The
program searches the entries supporting this load or a higher
load.
Hole Dia. The desired drill hole diameter for anchor bolts.
Concrete Quality Quality of concrete foundations
Select a displayed data record by double-clicking on it. All data are set
accordingly. Please note that only the plate dimensions and the inner drill holes
are set. Other settings are not modified.
Page B.17 5
Base Plates According to DSTV
Dowels
In addition, you can specify the type of dowel for fixing the base plates.
You can modify the execution of the dowel with the anchor bolt by modifying the
values for diameter, length and key.
Assignments
As it is the case for each dialog creating component parts, here too, it is
possible to make all assignments for each individual shape directly. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page B.17 - 6
Web Angle
This command creates steel web angles in three types of shapes IPE, HEA and
HEB. Two web angles will be fastened opposite of each other on the ends of the
shape to be connected when a support shape is not selected.
The shape to be connected is cut to length after the exact definition is entered.
The connection, drilling and bolting is carried out automatically. You can also
select web angle connections according to the standard DAST guidelines.
Shapes
Page B.18 - 1
Web Angle
Shape Class,... Here you can specify the angle shape of the selected
connection. Only shapes that are equal-sided angles and
unequal-sided angles can be selected.
Use Flat The web angle will be made from bent plate steel instead of
angle steel.
Enter the required dimensions in the Thickness, length of
Long Leg, length of Short Leg and Bent Radius input fields.
The program will determine the actual length of the steel plate.
Position Here you determine the side of the shape (Left or Right) to be
connected to the web angle. If both have been checked, a
web angle is created at each side of the web.
Turn Angles The long and short side of the web angle are exchanged so
that the long side is situated at the connecting shape.
Gap Here you indicate the distance to be kept between the end of
the connecting shape and the supporting shape.
Side Offset Here you indicate the distance between the web of the
connected shape and the web angles (normally 0 or a slight
clearance).
Vertical Offset Here you indicate the distance the web angle is shifted from
the axis of the shape to be connected, upwards or to the right
(depending on the position). A negative entry will cause
shifting in the opposite direction. Selecting one of the following
options permits you to make additional specifications referring
to the dimension.
From Edge Means that the vertical offset is measured from the upper
edge of the shape up to the upper edge of the web angle.
Lower Edge The vertical offset refers to the lower edge of shape and web
angle instead of to the upper edge.
Up to First Bolt The vertical offset refers to the centre of the first bolt instead
of to the edges of the web angle.
Page B.18 - 2
Web Angle
Distances
Page B.18 - 3
Web Angle
Connect
Bolt Settings
Bolt Style Select the bolt style (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the
list
Dia. Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose Enter the desired clearance for the bolt connection, usually 2
mm.
Diagonal Offset A shift of the bolt axes between support and connecting bolts.
Gap Spacing Distance between the web of the supporting shape and the
web angle.
Click this button to edit the bolt style or to create it anew.
Page B.18 - 4
Web Angle
Welding
Weld Settings
Weld Style Specify the kind of weld seam.
Weld... You can specify which seams have to be created in the model
via Weld Side of Connecting Shape or Weld Side of
Supporting Shape. The Thickness of the different weld seams
is specified in the corresponding input fields.
Page B.18 - 5
Web Angle
Cope
In addition, you can add a cope to the connecting shape. Here, you enter the
specifications of the cope.
Cope Select an already stored cope template or you enter the cope
data directly.
Connect. Shape Here you define how the connecting shape has to be coped.
You can select Upper Side, Lower Side or Both.
Specify the necessary gap distance for the cope in the Gap
field.
Click this button to create or modify the cope template.
Safety... Here you can specify whether a safety cope has to be carried
out. In addition, the inserted angle can be shortened.
Page B.18 - 6
Web Angle
Standard Data
In the selection list, you can see the web angle connections available in the
database. In this list, you can verify the basic parameters of the connection data.
H(kN), Hz(kN) You can select a web angle according to the DAST guidelines.
Enter the desired load in the input fields. The possible
connection angles will be displayed in the selection list.
List In this List, the possible connections filed in the database are
displayed. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry.
The basic data of the connection are displayed in the different
List Fields.
Page B.18 - 7
Web Angle
Page B.18 - 8
Web Angle
Form Group
Create Group An insert of the web angle connection, the inserted parts are
automatically arranged to form a construction group.
With Bolts... Bolts and weld seams are added to the construction group as
well.
Each Angle An individual construction group is created for each inserted
web angle.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page B.18 - 9
Web Angle
Page B.18 - 10
Shear Plates
This command creates a plate connection (shear plate connection) made from
plate steel and attached to a support shape. If you do not select a support
shape, only one or two web plates are attached to the end of the shape to be
connected.
After you have indicated the specifications the shape to be connected is cut to fit
and the connection is created by the program automatically including all drill
holes and bolt connections.
You also can select connections from an editable database. How to create the
database is listed in the technical supplement or just ask your ProSteel 3D
dealer.
Shapes
Page B.19 - 1
Shear Plates
Page B.19 - 2
Shear Plates
Distances
Page B.19 - 3
Shear Plates
Connect
Bolt Settings
Bolts Select the bolt style (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the
list
Dia Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose Here, you enter the desired clearance of the bolted
connection, mostly 2 mm.
Click this button to process the bolt style or to create a new
one.
Weld Settings
Weld Style Here, you specify the kind of weld seam.
Page B.19 - 4
Shear Plates
Click this button to edit the weld style or to create a new one.
Cope
In addition, you can notch the connecting shape. Enter the corresponding
specifications in this dialog box.
Notch You can either select an already stored notch variant or you
enter the data directly.
Cope Connect… Here, you specify how the connecting shape has to be
notched. You can select Upper Side, Lower Side or Both.
Define the necessary gap distance for the notch in the Gap
field.
Page B.19 - 5
Shear Plates
Standard Data
In the selection list, you can see the shear plate connections available in the
database. In this list, you can verify the basic parameters of the connecting data.
H(kN), Hz(kN) Here, you can select a shear plate according to the loads.
Enter the desired load in the input fields. Then, the available
connection plates will be displayed in the selection list.
List In this List the possible connections filed in the database are
displayed. Select the desired connection by clicking it.
In the different List fields, you can see the basic data of this
connection.
Page B.19 - 6
Shear Plates
Page B.19 - 7
Shear Plates
Form Group
Create Group At insertion of the shear plate connection, the inserted parts
are automatically assigned to a construction group which is
created.
With Bolts... The bolts and weld seams are also added to that group.
Each Plate An own construction group is created for each inserted shear
plate.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page B.19 - 8
Splice Joints
Use this command to create a web and/or flange plate joint between two shapes
out of flat steel. Both of the shapes have to be in alignment along the surfaces to
be connected. If you do not select a second shape, plates are attached to the
end of the first shape. After you have indicated the specifications, the shape to
be connected is cut to fit and the program, automatically including all drill holes
and bolt connections, creates the connection.
You can also select connections from an editable database. How to create the
database is listed in the technical supplement or just ask your ProSteel 3D
dealer.
HINT: Take advantage of the dialog templates and save frequently required
connections as templates. These templates can then be easily loaded.
However, if you are working with a great many connections, we recommend
using a database with user-defined types.
Page B.20 - 1
Splice Joints
Options
Gap Distance Here you indicate the distance between the two shapes to be
respected.
Bolts Specify the desired bolt style for the connection.
Dia Specify the desired bolt diameter from the list or enter the
value directly if this option has been activated.
Workloose This field is used to specify the hole clearance of the desired
drill holes, which usually consists of 2 mm.
Upper Side If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the
upper side of the shape.
Lower Side If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the
lower side of the shape.
Single Side If this field is checked, the splice joint is attached to the side of
the second shape to be connected in the form of a welded
connection.
Upper Inside If this field is checked; an additional plate is attached to the
inner upper side of the shape.
Lower Inside If this field is checked, an additional plate is attached to the
inner lower side of the shape.
Page B.20 - 2
Splice Joints
Top/Bottom
On the second page, you can enter the settings for the upper and lower splice.
Page B.20 - 3
Splice Joints
Edges Inside Indicates the distance from the starting point of the shape to
the first bolt
Dist. Between Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other
Number Cross.. Indicates the number of bolts transversal to the shape
direction.
Edge Outside Indicates the distance of the plate beyond the outmost bolts
Inner Distance Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other.
Dist. Between If there are more than 2 bolts in transversal direction, this
value indicates the distance from one outer bolt to the other.
Thickness Select the plate thickness from the list. If you have activated
the free selection option, you can enter this value directly.
Vertical This value moves the splices in transversal direction to the
shape.
Weld If this setting is activated, no bolts and drill holes will be
inserted, but the parts will be welded with each other. Length
settings are still valid.
As Enter your value here if you want to overwrite the thickness
using the desired weld style.
Weld Style Select the weld style to be used.
Page B.20 - 4
Splice Joints
Left/Right
On the third page, you can enter the settings for the left and right splice.
Number Shape.. Indicates the number of bolts in shape direction at each side
Edges Outside Indicates the projection of the splices beyond the last bolt
Edges Inside Indicates the distance from the starting point of the shape to
the first bolt
Dist. Between Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other
Number Cross.. Indicates the number of bolts transversal to the shape
direction.
Edges Outside Indicates the distance of the plate beyond the outmost bolts
Inner Distance Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other.
Dist. Between. If there are more than 2 bolts in transversal direction, this
value indicates the distance from one outer bolt to the other.
Thickness Select the plate thickness from the list. If you have activated
the free selection option, you can enter this value directly.
Vertical This value moves the splices in transversal direction to the
shape.
Page B.20 - 5
Splice Joints
Data
When you have defined a database for the selected shape, another page will be
displayed. There, you can select the desired entry.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page B.20 - 6
Purlin
in Connection
This function permits the connection of purlin courses to roof girders. Different
kinds of connection are possible. The connection can either be carried out as
standard bolted connection, as connection with a purlin socket made out of a
bent flat steel or by means of a splice or a shape.
The assignments can be managed in a database to allow the selection of the
suitable connections for the different shape sizes (e.g. the correct size of a
purlin socket). When the command is selected, the specified connections
available for selection are offered in a list.
As to how to create the data base, please refer to the technical supplement or
ask your ProSteel 3D dealer.
Bolted Connection
Number Transv. Here, you enter the number of drill holes in transversal
direction of the purlin shape.
Distance Transv. Here you can indicate the axis distance at two or more drill
holes.
Page B.21 - 1
Purlin Connection
Number Length Here, you enter the number of drill holes in shape direction of
the purlin course.
Distance Length Here you can indicate the axis distance at two or more drill
holes.
Bolts Select the bolt type (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the
list
Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose Enter the clearance for the connection.
Offset Here, you can indicate an offset value for the bolted
connection in longitudinal direction. If you enter positive
values, the drill holes are moved in shape direction of the
purlin course; negative values move them in the opposite
shape direction.
List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed
in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry.
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is
based are displayed.
Page B.21 - 2
Purlin Connection
Purlin Socket
Drill Holes Here, you specify the dimensions of the purlin socket as well
as the drill holes of the connection.
The meaning of the distances is displayed in the figure below:
Bolts Select the bolt type (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the
list
Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection
between roof girder and purlin socket.
Page B.21 - 3
Purlin Connection
Dia Side Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection
between purlin socket and purlin course.
Workloose Enter the clearance for the connection.
Create Group The purlin socket and the roof girder are assigned to a
construction group. If the roof girder is already belonging to
another construction group, the purlin socket will be assigned
to this other group.
With Bolts The bolts are assigned to the roof girder belonging to the
construction group as well.
Opposite Side The purlin socket is attached at the opposite side of the purlin
course.
Backer Plates Specify the dimensions of backer plates in the corresponding
input fields. These plates have to be used between roof girder
and purlin socket. If you enter the value 0, no backer plates
will be created.
Offset Here, you can indicate an offset value for the bolted
connection in longitudinal direction. If you enter positive
values, the drill holes are moved in shape direction of the
purlin course; negative values move them in the opposite
shape direction.
List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed
in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry.
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is
based are displayed
Page B.21 - 4
Purlin Connection
tion
Connection Plate
Drill Holes Here, you determine the dimensions of the plate as well as the
drill holes of the connection.
The meaning of the distances is displayed in the following
figure of a purlin connection. If you enter the value 0 for w2,
only one hole will be created in longitudinal direction of the
purlin course.
Page B.21 - 5
Purlin Connection
Bolts Select the bolt type (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the
list
Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose Enter the clearance for the connection.
Supporting Plate An additional supporting plate is created perpendicular to the
plate which can be determined separately.
Click on this button to open the dialog for determining the
dimensions of the supporting plate.
Create Group The plate and the roof girder are assigned to a construction
group. If the roof girder is already belonging to another
construction group, the plate will be assigned to this other
group.
With Bolts The bolts are assigned to the roof girder belonging to the
construction group as well.
Opposite Side The splice is attached on the opposite side of the purlin
course.
Weld Seam The plate is welded to the roof girder. In the Af input field, you
can specify the thickness of the weld seam, and in the
selection list you can indicate the type of the weld seam.
Offset Here, you can indicate an offset value for the bolted
connection in longitudinal direction. If you enter positive
values, the drill holes are moved in shape direction of the
purlin course; negative values move them in the opposite
shape direction.
List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed
in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry.
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is
based are displayed
Page B.21 - 6
Purlin Connection
tion
Weld Seam The plate is welded to the roof girder. In the Af input field, you
can specify the thickness of the weld seam, and in the
selection list you can indicate the type of the weld seam.
Page B.21 - 7
Purlin Connection
Connection Shape
Length The length of the shape in shape direction of the purlin course
Number Here, you enter the number of drill holes in shape direction of
the purlin course. In the input field w3 you can indicate the
axis distance in the case of two or more drill holes.
Base Drill Holes Specify the distance of the roof girder holes to the outer edge
of the purlin course.
Lateral Drill… Here, you indicate the distance of the drill holes in the purlin
course to the upper edge of the roof girder.
Bolts Select the bolt type (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the
list
Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection
between roof girder and shape.
Dia Side Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection
between shape and purlin course.
Workloose Enter the clearance for the connection.
Perpendicular The shape is positioned in a perpendicular way in order to
insert e.g. a U-shape vertically.
Turn The shape is rotated by 90° around the longitudinal axis.
Page B.21 - 8
Purlin Connection
Create Group The shape and the roof girder are assigned to a construction
group. If the roof girder is already belonging to another
construction group, the shape will be assigned to this other
group.
With Bolts The bolts are assigned to the roof girder belonging to the
construction group as well.
Opposite Side The shape is attached at the opposite side of the purlin course
Backer Plates Specify the dimensions of backer plates in the corresponding
input fields. These plates have to be used between roof girder
and shape. If you enter the value 0, no backer plates will be
created.
Offset Here, you can indicate an offset value for the bolted
connection in longitudinal direction. If you enter positive
values, the drill holes are moved in shape direction of the
purlin course; negative values move them in the opposite
shape direction.
Shape Type Here, you can select the shape to be used for the connection.
Special shapes can be used as well.
List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed
in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry.
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is
based are displayed.
Page B.21 - 9
Purlin Connection
Page B.21 - 10
Gusset Plates
This command is used to create a gusset plate which combines several shapes
with each other. The form is optimally defined on the base of the shapes to be
connected and further limiting edges. The shapes and the gusset plate are
automatically drilled and combined with each other by bolts.
To create a gusset plate, you first have to select the shapes to be connected
and then you can select even further shapes serving as additional limiting
edges. These limiting edges influence the form of the gusset plate. For example
you can connect three shapes with a support using a gusset plate and it is
guaranteed that the gusset plate is fit tightly to the web of the support.
Page B.22 - 1
Gusset Plates
Gusset Pos Here, you specify the position of the plate to be created,
related to the connected shapes.
If you have selected ‘Plate Center’, the gusset plate will be
created in the center of the shapes.
If you have selected ‘Plate Upper and/or Plate Lower’, a
gusset plate will be created at the upper edge and/or at the
lower edge of the shapes, depending on the selection. It is
possible to connect shapes with two plates as well.
Limiting Shape If this field has been checked, it is not the edge of a limiting
shape situated next to the gusset plate, which is used as
borderline, but the opposite line.
Iit is possible to design a gusset plate in a way that it overlaps
e.g. the complete flange of a limiting shape.
Weld Bracing If this field has been checked, the shapes and the plate are
not drilled. It is possible to combine them with each other
using a weld.
Form Group If this field has been checked, a group will be formed on the
base of the gusset plate and the connected shapes.
With Bolts If the 'With Bolts' field has been checked as well, the bolts of
the shape to be connected are also added to that group.
Use Existing Holes
Existing holes are used instead of drilling new ones.
Click on this button to add further shapes to the gusset plate
connection. Now, the form of the gusset plate is calculated
anew and the new shapes are also connected with the plate.
Click on this button to remove a shape from a gusset plate
connection.
Page B.22 - 2
Gusset Plates
Please note that you can indicate all distances either as absolute values or as
many times the amount of bolt diameter. Enter e.g. *2 for the double value to
obtain many times the amount of bolt diameter.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog of the component parts, here too it is possible
to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page B.22 - 3
Gusset Plates
Page B.22 - 4
Static Bracing
The program always enters bracings in the active UCS plane, i.e. you should
place the UCS with its origin into the desired bracing plane and align it parallel.
Since the rods are aligned in accordance with the system lines, they should
have been created previously. In case of a cross-stay with uniformly staggered
rods, the middle of the system will be sufficient. The rods can be arranged
alternatively.
In contrast to the dynamic bracing, this bracing here doesn’t react to
modifications. However, it can be created individually piece-by-piece.
Page B.23 - 1
Static Bracing
B.23.1 Settings
Shape Definition
Page B.23 - 2
Static Bracing
Rod Position Determine the position of the bracing rods with respect to the
gusset plate. Front means on the positive Z-axis, Back means
on the negative Z-axis, Both means on both sides and
Centered means that a rod is positioned in the middle of the
axis.
Rod Insertion Here you specify the position of the rod with respect to the
insertion line (system line). You can insert the rod in the
middle, on the gravity line or on the root line.
Rotation: You can insert the rod in its normal position or rotated by +90
degrees or -90 degrees. You can check the selected mode in
the shape window of dialog field.
Mirror: You can insert the rod in its normal position or in a mirrored
way. You can check the selected mode in the shape window
of dialog field.
Plate Thickness: The thickness of the gusset plates
Bolts
Page B.23 - 3
Static Bracing
Edge Distance
The third page serves for managing the edge distances depending on the bolt
diameter which have to be respected when the bracing shapes are installed.
List: You can directly click on the corresponding entries and the
processing mode will be switched on. Then you can directly
enter the value.
Page B.23 - 4
Static Bracing
Edge- 1st Hole Distance of the outermost hole axis in the bracing rod to the
rod front edge.
Hole – Hole Spacing of the hole axes in longitudinal direction
Hole – Edge Spacing of the outermost hole axis in the gusset
Limit Edges Specify the desired distance of the bracing rods to the limit
edges.
Bracing Rod Specify by which value the bracing rod has to be shortened
after its insertion. Thus, the rod will be kept in tension.
Page B.23 - 5
Static Bracing
To a large extent, you can make the program automatically create the
components of a bracing. However, it is possible as well to generate single
components such as gusset plates, etc. individually.
For this purpose, several individual functions are available which will be
described in the following.
BRACING
Click this button to generate bracing rods and gusset plates in one
operation.
However, this function is not suitable for the connection of several rods
from different systems. In this case, you should use the individual functions
instead. After the action has been finished, you return to the dialog.
SINGLE ROD
Click this button to insert single bracing rods that are directly drilled.
DRILL ROD
Click this button to drill existing shapes on their ends, according to the
definitions in the dialog field. You must select the shapes for this
purpose. You will return to the dialog field afterwards.
PLATE AUTO
Click this button to create a gusset plate automatically.
Select the drilled bracing rods that have to be connected and then click
boundary lines for the plate edges.
The program will try to find a suitable plate dimension by keeping the edge
distances and the boundary lines.
Page B.23 - 6
Static Bracing
PICK PLATE
Click this button to determine yourself the shape of the gusset plate.
Select the drilled bracing rods that have to be connected and pick a point
on the planned bracing end. Click the approximate position of the gusset
plate. The edge distances will be displayed.
UCS
If you have not yet aligned the UCS before using the command, you can
do this subsequently: the active UCS plane (and consequently the plane
of the bracing) will be determined by clicking 3 points.
You will return to the dialog field afterwards.
Page B.23 - 7
Static Bracing
Let’s start out from the fact that you want to design a simple roof bracing. The
diagonals are to intersect (without the gusset plate in the middle).
Select the command for bracing and select the ’Plate Middle’
for the UCS position.
Determine the position of the shape and the settings for bolts,
plate thickness, etc. Since the two rods are to intersect, select
the ‘Front’ rod position beforehand. Then click the BRACING
button.
The program will prompt you to enter the system line of the
bracing rod. Click one of the two system lines, e.g., the one leading from down
below on the left to the top on the right.
Gusset Plates
The program will prompt you to enter the boundary line for the gusset plate. You
can control the shape by selecting these lines - some variants are shown on the
left side depending on selection.
You may need construction lines which
have either been created beforehand or
which can be ‘shown’ using two points.
You can confirm by pressing the ENTER
key or by clicking the right mouse
button. The next gusset plate can be
created afterwards.
Page B.23 - 8
Static Bracing
The first bracing rod is complete. The second rod is created in the same manner
with the exception that you select the rod position ‘Rear’ (to avoid intersecting
rods).
If you want to create a bracing with a gusset plate in the point of intersection, do
not stagger the rods. Open, shorten, and drill the rods manually at the point of
intersection. Create a single gusset plate with the function for the bracing
(button PLATE AUTO or PICK PLATE).
Page B.23 - 9
Static Bracing
Page B.23 - 10
Haunches
B.24 Haunches
Upper Chord Enter width and thickness of the haunch top chord.
Lower Chord Enter width and thickness of the haunch bottom chord.
Web Enter the thickness of the haunch web plate.
Coped Shape If this field is checked, and you selected Bottom Train as
haunch type, the haunch is not made from individual plates
but from a coped shape. The shape size corresponds to the
connection shape; all other shape size fields are then ignored.
In the neighbouring input field, you can specify the distance
from the bottom train at the end of the cropped shape
(analogue to the ‘Haunch Head Width’).
Page B.24 - 1
Haunches
Bottom Stiffener If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the base point
of the haunch of the support shape. You can select a stiffener
type in the list displayed here. Just select a stiffener template,
which you previously saved using the command ‘Stiffeners’.
Top Stiffener If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the head point
of the haunch of the connected shape if you selected ‘Bottom
Train’ as haunch type. You can select a stiffener type in the
list displayed here. Just select a stiffener template, which you
previously saved using the command ‘Stiffeners’.
Length,... In the following figure, you can see the meaning of the inputs
for haunch length, roof pitch, bottom width, head width and
offset.
A modification in the input field roof pitch has only an effect if a
haunch has been created without supporting shape.
In the input field Cone Width you enter a width to which the
haunch tapers if required.
Create Group If this field is checked, top flange, bottom flange and web plate
are arranged to form a group
Bottom Train If this field is checked, no top flange is created, e.g. for the
construction of frame corners.
Page B.24 - 2
Haunches
Fixed Size If this field is checked, the head width and any existing cone
width are fitted to the shape to be connected. Inputs in these
fields will be ignored in this case.
Turn If this field is checked and ‘Bottom Train’ has been selected as
haunch type, the haunch on the topside of the shape is
selected.
If the connection appears to be turned, you can rotate it here.
Click this button and the data of an existing connection are
transferred to the connection to be created now. You have to
click the existing haunch connection to achieve the transfer.
Page B.24 - 3
Haunches
When using the haunch command, the last settings are used to create the
connection. Adjust the dimensions in the open dialog and track any changes
immediately in the model.
If you keep the ALT-key pressed when clicking the supporting shape, the
dimensions of the haunch flanges and of the web plate are fitted to the
dimensions of the supporting shape.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page B.24 - 4
Connection Editor
If you select the function via the command name or by clicking on the
CONNECTIONS button, you first have to select all parts of the connections of
which have to be edited. Then, these parts are displayed in a uniform marking
colour (for better orientation) and all other parts are hidden.
If a connection exists between the selected component parts, this connection is
displayed as coloured symbol. You can select the complete connection for
further processing by picking the symbol. You avoid having to look for the
connection via the shape properties.
After the command has been selected, the following dialog opens, the
modifications will not be valid before re-opening of the command for a second
time.
Page B.25 - 1
Connection Editor
Group Display
Length Here, you specify the length of the 3D-arrow for the
connection symbol.
The direction of the arrow shows from the connected part to
the component to which it was connected.
Diameter Here, you specify the diameter of the 3D-arrow for the
connection symbol.
Colour Here, you specify the marking colour for the surrounding
construction as AutoCAD-colour number.
Since the construction only has to serve for your orientation,
you should select a “weak” colour here so that the symbols
can be easily recognized. The symbols themselves are
displayed in green, red and yellow.
Group Options
Hide... The selected objects are hidden to increase a clear view. You
can hide work frames and structural elements (the
construction lines of structural elements). Bolts are always
hidden.
Standard Connections All standard connections are displayed as symbol.
These are the normal connections such as end plates, etc.
which are integrated in ProSteel 3D.
Cut Connections All cut connections are displayed. These are the cuts at
objects or mitred cuts.
COM-Connections All external connections realized via the COM-PlugIn‘s are
displayed.
Delete with When a connection is deleted, all attached parts generated by
this connection will be deleted as well.
Dialog-Commands
DELETE
Click on this button to remove the selected connections completely, i.e.
all component parts and processing actions created by means of these
Page B.25 - 2
Connection Editor
EDIT
Click on this button to edit the selected connection. After the desired
connection has been clicked via the symbol, the corresponding dialog of
this connection opens and the values can be modified.
CLONE
Click on this button to transfer the settings of a connection to another
one.
It is also possible to change the connection type if this is reasonable
(e.g. you can replace a plate connection by a web angle connection).
First, you have to select the connection the data of which have to be transferred
to another one. All connections not being able to seize these data are hidden.
Then, you have to select all connections having to take these data.
Verify Connections
If the ‘Verify Connections’ option has been checked, all connections are verified
with regard to collisions and marginal distances before being displayed as
symbol. The status of this verification is displayed by means of the colour of the
symbol. They have the following meaning:
Page B.25 - 3
Connection Editor
Page B.25 - 4
Groups
B.26 Groups
Various single components, bolts and special parts can be combined to form
groups - i.e. a support with welded endplates and stiffeners.
Certain functions apply to the complete group, even if you only select one part of
the group. The group structure is taken into account for the parts lists and when
the model is automatically detailed and transformed into 2D workshop drawings.
Many of the settings can be done separately for material groups and single
components.
After the command has been selected, the main window opens where the
available functions can be selected. Click on the corresponding button to apply
them. Most of the commands can be directly selected via a separate menu
command.
To permit rapid processing of several groups one after the other, some functions
are self-loading (loop version). If you want to cancel the function, you have to
press the ESC-key or the right mouse button.
In the settings, you can specify for which group commands a loop version is
required and for which not.
Structure
ProSteel 3D-material groups consist of a main part and the associated
accessory parts. You can choose any assignment, or it is automatically set for
some commands on request.
In practise, these groups mostly correspond to the dispatched parts that are
delivered to the site in a preassembled condition. Such a combination is
recommended but not mandatory. You can decide how to best combine the
parts.
Page B.26 - 1
Groups
Parts can be combined to form groups, and you can detach such groups by
using the functions described here.
It is also possible to store material groups as block and to take them over into
other drawings – the structure will remain unchanged. Please note that special
functions are needed in this case. The AutoCAD standard commands for blocks
cannot be used.
Page B.26 - 2
Groups
You can enter the parts list data of the selected group in the
input fields. The position in the field Posnum has been taken
over from the main part provided the “Take Main Part Info”
field was selected. In addition, the outer dimensions and the
overall weight of the group will be displayed.
These input fields can also be accessed via the context menu
‚Change PS Properties“, when you select a part that belongs
to the group.
Page B.26 - 3
Groups
Processing of Structure
Subsequent adding of parts to a group or removal from a group is possible as
well.
Page B.26 - 4
Groups
Miscellaneous
SELECTION Click on this button to choose whether the whole group has to
be selected by selecting only one part of the group, or whether
the parts have to be independent of each other. To do so, click
any part of the group. Then, the mode will be switched over
correspondingly and the current status will be displayed in
command line.
AutoCAD group mode is modified here in the group. This
means that you can e.g. move the whole group using standard
AutoCAD commands by clicking only one part. .
You can switch on or off this behaviour using the AutoCAD-
command for groups.
COUNT All groups existing in the drawing are counted and the number
is displayed in the Number input field.
Page B.26 - 5
Groups
Using the commands available here you can check the created groups, make
the settings and modify the group data for the parts list.
CHECK GROUPS This function checks whether all the groups have a main
part. When a group without a main part is detected, this group
is dissolved.
In addition, when using the command ’Highlight Orphans’ you
can make display the parts that don’t belong to a group.
Groups without a main part may occur when the main part
was deleted and the group has not been detached.
MARK ORPHANS If this field is checked, all valid groups are hidden
according to the specifications when checking a group. Parts
that belong to no group are marked in colour.
Coloured markings are removed once you select the
command ‘Regenerate’ or when you assign the parts to a
group.
Page B.26 - 6
Groups
HIDE Use this function to hide all parts of a group (depending on the
parameters for hiding). To do so, click any part of the group.
When you use the command ‘Regenerate’ or Display Parts,
the parts of the group can be made visible again.
Main Parts Only the main part will be hidden, when the hiding function is
applied.
Single Parts All accessory parts will be hidden, when the hiding function is
applied.
All Parts The whole group will be hidden, when the hiding function is
applied.
DISPLAY Use this function to display all hidden parts of a group.
Alternatively, you can apply the command ‘Regenerate’.
Page B.26 - 7
Groups
Page B.26 - 8
Groups
B.26.4 Settings
This page specifies the behaviour of the commands for group function. You can
control the behaviour of each single command.
Part Selection Here, you can specify the behaviour of part selection at the
different functions.
Multiple – Each part has to be selected separately.
All – You select the whole group.
Execute in Loop For the marked functions the command is repeated in a loop
without having to display the dialog again after each run.
Operation of the different functions is facilitated in case of
several parts.
End Dialog The dialog is automatically closed after the selected function s
finished.
Page B.26 - 9
Groups
Page B.26 - 10
Positioning
B.27 Positioning
Positioning of the existing parts is one of the last steps before final detailing of
the 3D model for workshop drawings.
ProSteel 3D can do this automatically for you. It searches parts of the same
type and defines their number in the model. Of course, you can also assign
position numbers manually.
In the first step before detailing, only the number of pieces (quantity) and their
position numbers must be defined. This data record is the basis for the parts
lists, which can then be generated and printed at once. Later, when preparing
the 2D parts, the position flags with the user-defined layout are attached to
single parts and groups.
In this version, the position flags as well as the height indicators and weld marks
are related to the style. This means that the pre-setting how the position flag
looks like can be set with a style. This style specifies the geometry and the
display properties of the flag.
Page B.27 - 1
Positioning
Page B.27 - 2
Positioning
Filter If you want to position only certain component parts, you can
apply a filter defining which elements of your construction
have to be equipped with a position number or with a shipping
number.
Last Single Here, you see the single part position set last. At the
beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position
numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.
Last Group Here, you see the group position set last. At the beginning,
you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if
you want to start counting at 1.
Next Enter the single part position number that has to be added to
the first part to be positioned anew.
Increment Enter the automatic increase in numbers (normally the
increment is 1).
Send Number The automatic positioning either adds position numbers or
shipping numbers. Use this button to select whether the
function has to add position numbers or shipping numbers.
Use XRefs If external references have been inserted into the drawing, the
component parts are also positioned in these external
references.
Use PlugIn If you have selected an external PlugIn for positioning, you
can add it using this button. The internal positioning of
ProSteel 3D is deactivated in this case.
Click this button to reset the settings of all fields to standard
values.
Click this button to make further specifications for seizing the
shapes etc.
Another dialog opens which will be described in detail in the
following.
Click this button to add the position number for the individual
component parts. For this purpose, you have to select the
parts to be positioned. The program checks whether they are
of the same type and adds a position number according to
your specifications.
Page B.27 - 3
Positioning
Click this button to add only the position numbers for the
single parts. Thus it is still possible to make some
modifications before positioning the groups, if need be..
Click this button to add only the position numbers for the
groups. Of course, the position numbers for the single parts
have to exist already.
Positioning Results
When positioning is finished, a dialog opens where the position number and
further parts list information is displayed for each part.
Page B.27 - 4
Positioning
Page B.27 - 5
Positioning
Further Options
Overwrite Exist… Existing position numbers are overwritten when assigning new
ones.
Equal Part De… Single parts are checked for equality. If they are identical, they
are assigned the same position number. Parts are considered
identical when deviations with respect to dimensions and drill
diameter are within the values given as reference tolerances.
Page B.27 - 6
Positioning
Group Detection The groups are checked for equality as well. Groups are
considered identical when identical single parts are arranged
in the same mounting position.
However, single parts are only compared using their position
number because positioning has already been carried out
before.
If parts are identical but have different position numbers, the
groups will also be assigned different position numbers.
Save Single Part Pos.No.
When a single part, which already has a position number, gets
a new position number at positioning, the existing position
number is saved in the field OrigPosnum in the parts
properties.
Save Group Pos.No.
When a group, which already has a position number, gets a
new position number at positioning, the existing position
number is saved in the field OrigPosnum in the group
properties.
Weld Marks The attached weld marks are taken into consideration as well
when the single parts are checked for equality. Weld cracks
are small drill holes with parts that have to be mounted.
First Main Part… First, all main parts of groups are positioned (and sorted
according to the sorting criteria within the groups), followed by
the accessory parts (also sorted according to the sorting
criteria).
This can be deemed as an additional, even higher ranking
sorting criterion. If this field is checked and you have entered a
position number in the input field Start Accessory Parts at,
positioning of the accessory parts will start at the defined
position number. You may for instance start with 1 for main
parts and with 100 for accessory parts.
Click this button to specify further part properties such as
name, annotation, etc. as additional criteria for the detection of
identical parts.
Then, another dialog opens where you can check the
properties relevant for differentiation.
Page B.27 - 7
Positioning
Groups
Differentiation: When the group is assigned the position of the main part
(normal case), it may happen that two different groups having
the same main part are assigned identical position numbers.
In such cases, the program will check in a second run whether
or not the groups are really identical. If not, it will change the
group position number.
25 → 25.1 – The changed group positions are identified by the
index .1 etc. following their position number
(i.e. 100.1 , 100.2 , ...).
25 → 25A - The changed group positions are identified by the
index A etc. following their position number
(i.e. 100A, 100B, ...).
25 → MAX+1 – Positioning of the changed group positions is
continued after the highest position currently assigned.
When the last group was position 50, the changed groups now
have the positions from 51 onward.
Main Part → Group The position of the main part is taken over as group
position. If necessary, the group position is changed
afterwards during second check.
If this option is not requested, but you rather prefer a separate
number area, the numbers will start at the position entered in
Start Groups at.
Prefixes
Here, an explanatory text can be entered before the group positions. It is
possible to differentiate between support beams, girders and other groups, the
differentiation always being related to the main part of the group.
Support Beams Here, you enter the designation for all vertical shapes. In the
attribute field Position Tolerance, you enter an angle within
which the shape is still considered to be vertical.
Girders Here, you enter the designation for all horizontal shapes. In
the attribute field Position Tolerance, you enter an angle within
which the shape is still considered to be horizontal.
Vertical and horizontal are always related to the model, i.e., to
the XY-plane of the WCS.
Page B.27 - 8
Positioning
Other Groups Here, you enter the designation for all other groups.
Family Prefixes The family classes prefix is set in front if the component part
belongs to a family class and a prefix is planned.
Connections
Names These settings are used for naming the connections
(positioned logical links).
Consecutive Numbering – The connections are numbered
consecutively.
PosNum+PosNum – The name is built using a combination of
the position numbers of the connecting and supporting shape.
PosNum+Index – The name is built using the position number
of the connecting shape and a continuous index.
For more detailed information about connections, please refer
to the main chapter of detailing.
Page B.27 - 9
Positioning
After a position number has been attached to the component parts, no matter
whether it has been attached automatically or manually, you can display this
number and further parts list information at the part using a position flag.
If a position number has not yet been attached to the parts, you can specify new
numbers and enter them into the part.
The dialog tab mostly corresponds to the tab of automatic positioning. Please
refer to this section for a detailed description.
Page B.27 - 10
Positioning
Scale Enter the scale for display scaling of the position texts and
other things. The scale should correspond to the scale of the
detail.
If a global scale has been defined, it will be automatically
taken over here.
Paper Area Here, you specify whether a position flag has to be created in
the paper area.
Shipping No. In ProSteel, you have the possibility to add a position number
and a shipping number to a component part. If this option is
activated, the shipping number will be displayed in the position
flag.
Enter The number specified here will be taken over as position
number or as shipping number into the parts properties.
Page B.27 - 11
Positioning
SINGLE PART
Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached. Then, the
position flag is created with the set style for single parts.
GROUP
Select the part to which a group position flag has to be attached. Then,
the position flag is created with the set style for groups.
GROUPS-SINGLE PART
Select the part of a group to which a position flag has to be attached.
Depending on the part hierarchy, the position flag is created with the set
style for main part or accessory parts.
BOLT
Select the bolt connection to which a position flag has to be attached.
Then, the position flag is created with the set style for bolts.
SHORT POSITION
Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a
short position. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for
short position.
MOUNTING POSITION
Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a
mounting flag. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for
mounting.
Page B.27 - 12
Positioning
FREE
Select the insertion point to which a position flag has to be attached.
Specify the position flag properties such as style, position number, etc. in
the following dialog.
Attaching the position flag via FREE permits you to create position flags even
without direct reference to a component part. You can make use of this option
e.g. for position flags in 2D drawings the parts of which have been dissolved or
drawn manually.
Page B.27 - 13
Positioning
Scale The scale specifies the size of the position flags to be entered.
If e.g. the text height in a position flag style is indicated with
3,5, the position flag will be created with a text height of 3,5 *
scale.
Shipping No. The shipping number is selected instead of the position
number of the part and entered into the position number.
Paper Area The distribution is made in the paper area and the position
flags are created there.
Click this button to start the automatic distribution of position
flags. Select the parts to which position flags have to be
attached. Then, the program starts distribution.
Click this button to exchange the position of two flags.
Page B.27 - 14
Positioning
Sorting
Iterations This value indicates how often a new position has to be
searched for a position flag. The higher the value, the better
the positioning result will be, but the longer the search for a
suitable position of the position flag.
Page B.27 - 15
Positioning
Insertion Point The minimum distance between the insertion point and the
end of the position flag’s guideline
Local Centre Your model is divided into different positioning sections with
so-called local centres. The position flags are arranged in a
circle around these centres and inserted. This value sets the
minimum distance between two local centres.
Offset Flags This value indicates the projection of the flag beyond the edge
of the visible geometry.
Free Hold This value specifies the minimum distance between two
neighbouring position flags.
Delay During distribution, it is possible to look at the distribution
procedure on screen. For this purpose, you have to switch on
the ‘Animation’ option. Here, you specify how much time has
to be (in ms) between the insertion and moving of a position
flag.
Options
One Part per… Only one position flag is inserted for a part having the same
position or shipping number (depending on the setting).
... per Centre Only one position flag is inserted with the same position or
shipping number (depending on the setting) for each local
centre in the drawing.
Place Only Out… The position flags are attached outside of the model geometry.
Break Lines At The guidelines are interrupted in the case of collisions with
dimensions or texts.
Animation You can follow positioning procedure on screen if this option is
activated.
Group Flags Position flags referring to parts with identical position or
shipping number are arranged to form a common flag.
The insertion points mustn’t exceed the maximum distance to
form a group.
Group Distances The maximum distance up to which identical parts can be
arranged to form a group.
Guideline A separate guideline to the flag is created for each identical
part of a group.
Page B.27 - 16
Positioning
Show Count… If you have arranged position flags to form a group, you can
select which number of parts has to be displayed in the ‘Part
Number’ of the flag.
Normally, the sum of the combined parts is inserted. However,
you can alternatively enter the entire number of all parts in the
model having this position number.
Different kinds of depiction are possible when a flag has to be attached to the
main part of a group or to the corresponding group. Since the settings are more
complex, we will display the combinations here.
1. A “normal group flag” is attached to the main part, containing the data of the
corresponding construction group.
2. A group flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data of
the main part.
3. A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part
data and a group flag, containing the group data is attached to it as well.
Page B.27 - 17
Positioning
4. A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part
data, containing the data of the main part is attached to it as well.
Page B.27 - 18
Positioning
Here, you will find different commands for processing the position flags and for
checking or searching for the position numbers.
Use this button to search for the highest group or part number
in the selected component parts. The result is displayed in the
neighbouring input fields.
Click this button to search for component parts in the model.
Enter the position you are looking for in the field Search
Number. Use the options Hide, Check, Zoom Extents to select
how the found result has to be depicted in the model.
Page B.27 - 19
Positioning
Here, you see two results for comparing the position. In the left figure the parts
are identical. In the right one they are not identical. In the dialog window, you
can see in detail where the parts differ from each other.
Page B.27 - 20
Positioning
Default Format Specify the default format with variables so that you can add
additional text.
$(DWGNUM) for the drawing number
$(DWGIDX) for the drawing index
Position Here, you specify whether the drawing number has to be
entered as prefix or as postfix of the position number.
Single Parts The drawing number of single parts is taken over into their
position number.
Groups The drawing number of groups is taken over into their position
number.
Shipping No The drawing number is taken over into the shipping number
instead of into the position number.
Click on this button to modify the position numbers. In order to
do so, you have to select the component parts.
Page
e B.27 - 21
Positioning
You determine the depiction of a position flag by specifying a position flag style
where the geometry, the content and the colours of the position flag are defined.
Style Use this box to select the style you want to use for the
depiction.
Click this button to save the current settings.
Page B.27 - 22
Positioning
Geometry
Line Type Here, you define the kind of guideline to be used.
None – No guideline will be displayed.
Line – Only one line will be displayed.
Arrow – A line with an arrow will be displayed.
Point - A line with a point will be displayed.
Block – A line with any block at the starting point will be
displayed.
Line Block Here, you can select the AutoCAD block, if you have activated
the option ‘Line with Block’.
Bubble Form Here, you define the kind of position number.
None – Only the number is displayed.
Round – The number is displayed in an oval.
Rectangular Bubble – the number is displayed in a field.
Hexagonal Bubble – The number is displayed in a hexagon.
On Line - The number is displayed on the construction line.
Page
e B.27 - 23
Positioning
Text Type Here, you set the type of shape designation in case of length
indication.
U100..160 - The designation is as follows IPE270..7890.
U 100 160 – The designation is as follows IPE270–7890.
U100x160 - The designation is as follows IPE270x7890.
Format Template – The designation is as indicated in the
‘Format Template’ input field.
Alignment Here, you determine the direction of the construction line with
respect to the position text.
Shape – The alignment is parallel to the shape.
Line – You are prompted to enter a reference line by clicking.
The text will be aligned accordingly.
Horizontal – The alignment is in horizontal direction.
Vertical - The alignment is in vertical direction.
Text Style Specifies the text style for the text of the position flag.
Default Format Specifies the format for the user-defined shape designation if
you have selected ‘Format Template’ as text type. The
following parameters are available.
$(N) for part name
$(L) for part length
$(W) for part width
$(T) for part thickness
The result of the format string $(N) $(T)x$(W) would e.g.
be plate 5x380
Prefix / Postfix In the input field Prefix or Postfix you can enter a text which is
displayed in front of or after the position or shipping number of
the position flag.
The default can be set independently of each other for both
numbers.
Separator Specifies a text which is written between position number and
shipping number, if both numbers have to be displayed as
position number entry in the position flag.
Page B.27 - 24
Positioning
Options
No Line No line is drawn beneath the text of the position flag.
Dynamic The depiction of the position flag is dynamically adapted to the
current view.
Length For Group The entire length of the group is output instead of the part
length.
Sizes Here, you define the text sizes in mm for general lettering
(Text Size) and for position numbers (Pos. Size). For printing,
the AutoCAD text sizes are scaled according to selected
scale.
Colours You set the corresponding colour for the flag as AutoCAD
colour number using the fields Line, Number, Bubble und
Text. If you enter -1 as value, the pre-setting will be used.
When you click a position flag via the context menu ‘Change PS Properties’, you
can subsequently modify the properties of each single position flag. This tab will
not be described here in detail because the possibilities for setting correspond to
the parameters explained above.
Page B.27 - 25
Positioning
In this part of the dialog, you maintain your position flag styles. You can create
new styles, load , update or delete styles.
Page B.27 - 26
Positioning
Page B.27 - 27
Positioning
Page B.27 - 28
Drawing Information
When using this command, you can add drawing information to your drawing.
This information will be directly taken over into the parts list. By this way it is
also possible to fill in the title block of 2D drawing when having entered a
drawing border by means of ‘Drawing Border’ command.
Always enter the order drawing number and the modification index, if present,
since this information is evaluated during the 2D detailing process. You can later
query the Detail Centre to find out, which drawing contains the parts and will
receive the file path as well as the probably more useful drawing number.
All Text Fields In the different text fields you enter general information on the
project and on the drawing. Since these fields are self-
explanatory, they are not explained in detail.
Project Name Here, you select a block using the SELECT button for entering
data in its block attributes via the entry fields, provided you
have assigned such entry fields to the variables of the block
attributes.
Page B.28 - 1
Drawing Information
Page B.28 - 2
Create Parts Lists
After having positioned a model or a detailed workshop drawing, a parts list can
be created based on the part data.
The creation of parts lists by ProSteel 3D is divided into two sections, i.e., the
actual creation of the list of materials on the basis of the parts, and the
processing of the list of materials for a printout.
By separating these two functions, the data of the parts lists is also available to
other programs.
For ‘Creating the Parts Lists’ a file is written in the dBASE format as a *.dbf file.
This database format is compatible with many other applications. You can
import, further process and read out the file (in this case, this would finish the
work on the parts lists by using ProSteel 3D).
As a matter of fact, ProSteel 3D also provides the most important functions for
processing and reading out of the data according to your requirements with the
‚Processing Parts List’ command.
In fact, you need no further programs but you have the possibility of using them.
This is the reason for separating the two functions.
Page B.29 - 1
Create Parts Lists
When creating a parts list, you first select the parts to be processed, preferably
parts of a group or, in addition, independent single parts.
You can decide whether or not parts of your selection are to be included in the
list - either collectively via the filter function during creation of the parts lists or
individually for each part. If the ‘Select’ button has not been clicked in the
corresponding parts properties, the part will not be included in the parts lists,
even though you have selected it.
Since further processing and printing of the parts list is carried out with an extra
function, you can register all required parts lists first and store them under
different names.
Part Selection Here, you select the parts on the basis of which a parts list is
to be created.
3D-parts – you select the parts from the model. 2D-position
flags – the parts list will be deducted from the position flags of
a detailed workshop drawing. From modified 2D drawings you
can generate new bills of materials.
Page B.29 - 2
Create Parts Lists
Options
Verify Position... Only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts lists
that have a valid position number.
Only Group Parts Only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts
lists that are assigned to a group.
Create Group Entry A group entry is written into the parts list only for
completely seized groups.
Start Part List Parts list processing is started immediately after creation of
the parts list file.
You needn’t use this function separately if you want to
continue your work directly.
Calc. NC-Cut.. The angle of intersection is calculated by ProSteel 3D
according to the NC-guidelines of the DSTV.
Straight End The parts are rotated that the straight end is situated at the
front.
With Welds Information about welds is written into the parts list file.
Combine Welds Identical welds are summed up to one single entry.
Group Bolts
Bolts without ... Bolts will be included in the parts lists, even if they have no
position number.
... Extra The additional parts for the bolts are separately specified in
the list of materials.
Without Weight Bolts are imported into the parts list without indication of
weight.
Output File The file for the list of materials is stored in the file displayed in
the Name field in ‘dBASE-format’.
By clicking the FILE button you can set the directory in the
same manner as you use to do under Windows.
Page B.29 - 3
Create Parts Lists
Dialog-Commands
WITH BOLTS
By clicking this button, you start part selection. The selected bolts will be
considered as well.
WITHOUT BOLTS
By clicking this button, you start part selection. Bolts will not be
considered, even though they have been selected.
MOUNTING LIST
By clicki
clicking
ng this button, you start part selection. Only the main parts of
groups incl
including
uding bolts will be considered.
Hint: If a part is not imported and should have been, use the context menu
“Change PS Properties“ to check if the “Takeover“ button was not clicked.
Page B.29 - 4
Create Parts Lists
After you have created one or several parts lists using the command Æ ‘Create
Parts List‘ you can further process the bills by using this command. The files of
the parts list can be loaded, modified, formatted, and printed using this
command.
Here, we would like to point out a special feature: a utility program called “List &
Label” developed by Combit GmbH performs the actual print output and list
formatting. This form generator makes it possible to freely design the formatting
and layout of any parts list, add company logos, and preview the parts lists. You
do not need any special knowledge about this utility since its normal operation is
smoothly integrated into ProSteel 3D's program environment. However, if you
would like to customize the enclosed parts list forms to your individual needs,
please read the online help of the “List & Label Designer”, which will explain the
customization of existing and creation of new forms in easy to understand steps.
Of course, you can also obtain a printed documentation from your dealer.
The following sections will describe how to generate and output a parts list first
before discussing the individual options of the parts list processing method.
Page B.29 - 5
Create Parts Lists
Preview
Here, you can see an overview about the most important functions required for
printout and navigation within the preview. As the actual printout is completely
taken over by the additional application “List & Label”, please refer to the online
help of this program for more detailed information.
Page B.29 - 6
Create Parts Lists
You can, however; also directly print the parts list without preview or you can
convert it into other formats like e.g. the Rich-Text Format. To determine the
output target, select in the output dialog of “List & Label” under Output on ... the
desired target in the selection list and click on START afterwards to output the
parts list.
Page B.29 - 7
Create Parts Lists
The component parts list offers only a draft display of the entries. By double-
clicking an entry, another dialog opens listing all parts lists data for this entry.
You can modify any data at this point, which are saved in the corresponding file
immediately once you exit the window with the OK button. This means you
are not working with just a working temporary buffer copy but with the
actual file!
Page B.29 - 8
Create Parts Lists
OPEN FILE By clicking this button, you can open one or several files of a
parts list for processing. The open files are displayed in the list
on the left of the main dialog. When being clicked, the
selected list becomes the current working file.
DELETE FILE By clicking this button, you can delete a stored file.
CLOSE FILE By clicking this button, the current working file is closed and
removed from the list.
SORT FILE By clicking this button, you can sort the current working file
according to two layers of a parts list in an ascending or
descending order.
For this purpose, a further dialog box will be displayed, where
you can select a primary and a secondary layer. The data will
first be sorted according to the contents of the primary layer
and then, in case of equal contents, according to the contents
of the secondary layer.
Data content is modified according to the sorting.
CANCEL By clicking this button, the parts list processing is terminated.
ADD By clicking this button, you can manually add a new data
record to the end of the file. An empty dialog box will be
displayed; where the parts list data can be entered.
DELETE By clicking this button, the data record currently selected in
the part list on the right will be deleted from the file.
ADD FROM FILE By clicking this button, you can add the data of a second parts
list file to the current working file. You have to select an
additional file.
Please note that the content of the current file is
permanently changed when using this option!
Page B.29 - 9
Create Parts Lists
LIST DEFIN… Click this option to edit an existing print layout or create a new
one.
The print layout specifies which parts list data to print in what
format. You can freely design your layout and also add text
and logos. The following dialog box opens where you can edit
the template:
Now you will see a list with the existing form layouts in the
form of templates as well as a description and preview of the
form. If you would like to edit a form just double-click the file
name and the utility program „List & Label“ (see intro to this
chapter) opens. A detailed description of the functionality
would extend beyond the scope of this manual. Please see
the online help of this utility program for further details.
If you would like to create a new form, enter a new file name,
which will return an empty form ready for editing.
LIST HEADER By clicking this option, you can edit the header of your parts
list. The program will give you first the opportunity to import
data from the drawing information (see command Æ ‘Drawing
Information‘) into the parts list header.
FILTER Click this entry to set the filter conditions if you want to output
a parts list with filtered data Only data meeting the filter
condition are output in the parts list.
Page B.29 - 10
Create Parts Lists
LIST NAMES By clicking this button, you can preset standard print
templates for single part, group and bolt lists.
A dialog opens where you enter the print template files to be
used as standard selection. You can also select these files by
a File Selection Dialog. In addition, you can switch off error
check here.
If the field Switch off Posnum Equal Part Detection has been
checked, their position number only recognizes identical parts.
If this field has not been checked (recommended), the parts
are additionally compared with regard to name, length, etc. If
these values don't match for component parts having the
same position number, an error message is created.
Page B.29 - 11
Create Parts Lists
Page B.29 - 12
Create Parts Lists
The following figure shows you an example of an individual part list displayed as
preview in “List & Label”:
Page B.29 - 13
Create Parts Lists
Page B.29 - 14
Drawing Parts List
This command permits the creation of a parts list and its output in the drawing.
Therefore, it is suitable for drawing-dependent parts lists in plans showing e.g.
only one single group.
Since this parts list is an "intelligent" object, modifications in the model can be
automatically seized and displayed in the parts list. In addition, various
formatting options are available which can be controlled directly.
After having selected the command, select the desired parts first and then
determine the desired insertion point of the list in the drawing by clicking a point.
Then the following dialog appears where you can make the basic settings.
Page B.30 - 1
Drawing Parts List
Page B.30 - 2
Drawing Parts List
Check Position... If this option is activated only parts having a valid position
number will be evaluated.
Only Groups... If this option is activated only parts belonging to a group will
be evaluated.
Total Amount... If quantities are used, the total amount will be displayed.
Number*Quantity Groups The displayed amount results from the number of
parts in a group multiplied by the quantity of these groups in
the model.
Bolts... If this option is activated, bolts having no valid position number
will be evaluated as well.
Washers... If this option is activated, washers will be evaluated and listed
as separate parts.
Nuts... If this option is activated, nuts will be evaluated and listed as
separate parts.
Safety Nuts If this option is activated, safety nuts will be evaluated and
listed as separate parts.
Wedge Washers... If this option is activated, wedge washers will be evaluated
and listed as separate parts.
Without Weight Bolts are displayed in the parts list without indication of weight.
Welds Welds are displayed in the parts list.
Add... Identical types of welds are added in the parts list to a
common length.
Click on this button to add further component parts to the
component parts list of the parts list. You then have to select
the parts to be added.
Click on this button to remove component parts from the
component parts list of the parts list. You then have to select
the parts to be removed.
Click on this button to calculate anew and update the parts list.
Here, you can force an update of the list if the automatic
update option has not been activated.
Page B.30 - 3
Drawing Parts List
Move to the second tab “Display” to edit a new created or existing parts list style
and select the style to be edited.
EDIT
Click on this button to edit the selected style.
Style Name The name of the current style; all modifications are related to
this style.
Display List Here, you see an overview of all displayed columns of the
parts list. They are displayed in this order from the left to the
right in the drawing parts list
Page B.30 - 4
Drawing Parts List
Page B.30 - 5
Drawing Parts List
Fill up with Noughts All numerical values are filled up with noughts according to
the indicated format length and digits after the decimal point.
Header The header of the list is taken over to output.
Text Style Select the desired text style. Please refer to the AutoCAD
manual for more detailed information about AutoCAD text
styles.
Sort Depending on the field selected here, the output is sorted in
rising order from the column header onward.
Invert Causes a sorting in descending order from the column header
onward.
Use Prefix At sorting, the entries are separated in prefix and number and
then sorted separately.
The display colours can be globally selected for all elements of the parts list. In
addition, individual colours can be assigned to the different columns as well.
Enter the colour directly by indicating the AutoCAD colour number or click on the
desired input field and then on the SELECT button. Then, you can select the
colour in the dialog as usual.
Page B.30 - 6
Drawing Parts List
Field Name Select the desired field from the data fields.
Name1 This is the name of the column header resp. the first name if
an entry has been indicated in input field ‘Name2’ as well. Two
rows are available altogether.
Name2 This is the second name of column header.
Length Here, you enter the desired column width in text signs. The
exact column width depends on the selected text style.
Dec. Point Number of desired positions after the decimal point.
Text Size Enter the text size of the column. If you have entered the
value 0, the general text size of the list style is used.
Enter the colour of the column text (colour number). If you
have entered the value -1, the text colour of the list style is
used.
Page B.30 - 7
Drawing Parts List
Page B.30 - 8
Drawing Parts List
Footer Enter the desired foot lines. You can use pre-defined variables
as well. The following variables are available as foot lines:
$(N) The number of lines is indicated.
$(F) Multiplication factor addition in %
$(L) Overall length of all parts without addition
$(LF) Overall length of all parts with addition
$(W) Overall weight of all parts without addition
$(WF) Overall weight of all parts with addition
$(P) Overall area to be painted of all parts without
addition
$(PF) Overall area to be painted of all parts with
addition
Addition Percentage by which the determined values have to be
increased. These increased values can be output by means of
the variable $(xF).
Dec. Point. Number of desired positions after the decimal point.
Offset Distance to the corresponding margin.
Enter the colour of the text (colour number). If you have
entered the value -1, the text colour of the list style is used.
Position Enter the alignment of the text: Left, Center, Right or
Automatic. If 'Automatic' has been selected, all texts are
aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.
Units Enter the unit format Metric, Imperial or Automatic. If
'Automatic' has been selected, the default units of the drawing
are used.
Group Row In the Prefix input field, you can indicate a prefix for the
position numbers of group lines.
In the Colour input field you can specify the colour of the
group line. If the value -1 has been indicated here, the normal
text colour will be used.
Page B.30 - 9
Drawing Parts List
The management of the existing parts list styles is organized in the third tab
“Order”.
Click on this button to load the selected style from the hard
drive into the drawing.
Click on this button to create a new list style. To do this you
have to enter a style name (please pay attention that the
name does not exist already).
Then, this style is created with the settings of the style, which
is current at the moment, and it will be used as new current
style. The settings of the style can be individually modified
afterwards.
Click on this button to create a new folder for a clearer
structure of your parts list styles.
Page B.30 - 10
Drawing Parts List
Move to the forth tab “Content” to look at the content of the parts list and to
modify it manually. To modify an entry, double-click the corresponding field and
you can easily edit the entry.
Page B.30 - 11
Drawing Parts List
Page B.30 - 12
Containment List
After having created groups in a drawing, you can make lists and insert them
into the drawing. These lists can display the belonging of certain parts to
component part groups. You can insert these drawing containment lists in the
DetailCenter Express as well.
First select the desired parts after having selected this command. Then, specify
the desired insertion point of the list in the drawing by clicking a point. The
following dialog appears displaying the basic settings.
Style Here, you define how the list has to look like on the base of a
style. The list templates are saved as template via the
template management.
Insertion Point Here, you specify the insertion point of the created list. You
can choose between several insertion points.
Current Layer The list is placed on the current layer of the drawing instead of
on the configuration layer.
Scale Specifies the insertion scale of the list. The scale affects text
heights and distances within the list.
Page B.31 - 1
Containment List
Page B.31 - 2
Containment List
Move to the second tab “Display” to edit a new created or existing list style.
Select the style to be edited.
EDIT
Click on this button to edit the selected style.
Style Name The name of the current style; all modifications are related to
this style.
Display List Here, you see an overview of all displayed columns of the
drawing containment list. They are displayed in this order from
the left to the right in the drawing containment list.
Page B.31 - 3
Containment List
Page B.31 - 4
Containment List
The display colours can be globally selected for all elements of the drawing
containment list. In addition, individual colours can be assigned to the different
columns as well.
Enter the colour directly by indicating the AutoCAD colour number or click on the
desired input field and then on the SELECT button. Then, you can select the
colour in the dialog as usual.
Page B.31 - 5
Containment List
Field Name Select the desired field from the data fields.
Name1 This is the name of the column header resp. the first name if
an entry has been indicated in input field ‘Name2’ as well. Two
rows are available altogether.
Name2 This is the second name of column header.
Length Here, you enter the desired column width in text signs. The
exact column width depends on the selected text style.
Decimal Pt. Number of desired positions after the decimal point.
Text Size Enter the text size of the column. If you have entered the
value 0, the general text size of the list style is used.
Enter the colour of the column text. If you have entered the
value -1, the text colour of the list style is used.
Page B.31 - 6
Containment List
Page B.31 - 7
Containment List
The management of the existing list styles is organized in the third tab “Order”.
Click on this button to load the selected style from the hard
drive into the drawing.
Click on this button to create a new list style. To do this you
have to enter a style name (please pay attention that the
name does not exist already).
Then, this style is created with the settings of the style, which
is current at the moment, and it will be used as new current
style. The settings of the style can be individually modified
afterwards.
Click on this button to create a new folder for a clearer
structure of your list styles.
Page B.31 - 8
Containment List
Move to the fourth tab “Content” to look at the content of the drawing
containment list and to modify it manually. To modify an entry, double-click the
corresponding field and you can easily edit the entry.
Page B.31 - 9
Containment List
Page B.31 - 10
C Detaillierung
Detailing
Detailing
Page C - 2
DetailCenter
C.1 DetailCenter
Once you have created the model, finished editing of the model, have positioned
all of the necessary components, and may have issued a (preliminary) parts list,
the Finishing or Detailing of the 3D components can commence.
Detailing 3D Models
The program generates the usual 2D views of the components for the workshop
plans using the model, which means that the program will disassemble the
model into its components, analyse the geometry of all the individual parts, and
ascertains any existing but invisible edges. Then – depending on the
requirements or your selections – the shape is displayed in several views and
dimensioned and the position flag is attached.
All of this takes place in a split second and in the background. Once the
program has finished with one component, this component is deposited in a
library in the form of a block – clearly organized according to the individual
construction groups and design sections.
After this procedure has concluded you can use the program to help you with
the layout of the parts on your drawing sheets. From here on, you can treat the
parts as if they were the usual drawings generated with a CAD program – but
ProSteel 3D offers you a few extra functions, which facilitate your work.
Intervention Options
You do not have to worry that you are going to be at the mercy of the program
and that from now on all your drawings will reflect the wishes of the software
designers.
A vast number of parameters help you to specify the appearance of your
mapped design. These parameters can be saved as data records and re-
imported depending on the type of drawing (overview, life-size, 1: 10 workshop
details, etc).
This saves you time by being able to detail several parts at once applying one of
these styles – that might already be enough to satisfy the requirements of your
assignment. However, you can also detail small groups of components – one
after the other – or even a single part. You always have access to the smallest
detail.
Page C.1 - 1
DetailCenter
Automatic detailing takes place within the open model, and you tell the program
to detail a certain part using a certain style. You have previously defined or
selected this suitable style. The rest is out of your hands (for now). The result is
a block with the views as interpreted by the program according to your
specifications.
Manual detailing requires that you determine the respective model section
yourself. You are working within a work frame and may use the auxiliary
functions of the program to attach and assign dimension chains, position flags,
height indicators, etc. You can also use such standard AutoCAD elements as
lines, texts, etc. The program only displays the invisible edges correctly and
saves the details as a block – nothing more. This does indeed offer you the
greatest level of influence on the appearance of the details but you have to carry
out each step manually.
The following chapters discuss the ProSteel 3D detail center and all of the tasks
described shortly in the text.
Page C.1 - 2
DetailCenter
When you open the Detail Center for the first time, a clear dialog box will be
displayed with only a few settings. There is nothing more required after the
adaptations to your personal requirements were made. As you know, you „only“
want to get your shop drawings from the model. However, if need be, you can at
any time penetrate deeply inside the drawing derivation. You can make a great
number of settings, ask for information, and check drawings.
The philosophy behind this development is that you can get the same result in
various ways, that you can make a lot of modifications – but you do not have to!
Page C.1 - 3
DetailCenter
Most of the work within the detail center is carried out using the context menus
of the right mouse button or using drag & drop, where you drag an entry onto
another entry. You will also work with tree lists that resemble Windows Explorer
trees. Since these functions are similar to standard Windows functions, they will
not be described here.
Most of the dialogs that can be selected from within the Detail Center are non-
modal dialogs. These dialogs are not always closed once a function has been
selected but can remain open.
This has the advantage of saving you a few mouse clicks and you can adapt
these dialogs to the current situation, which means you are always informed
about the status of the work. You can change settings and watch the changes
immediately on the screen – just as you can do with many of the ProSteel 3D
commands. All dialogs of the Detail Center are synchronized with one another
as much as possible.
Since this means that it does not take very long to accumulate a great many
open dialogs on the screen, the Detail Center will here support your work as
well. Any non-required dialogs are hidden whenever necessary. They are
exchanged with others if the command association changes. Dependent
subordinate dialogs are closed automatically if you close a parent dialog.
Page C.1 - 4
DetailCenter
The following page will give you an overview over the work area of the Detail
Center. This chapter includes an introduction and explains some of the basic
detailing terms. The individual function areas are described later in special
chapters.
Page C.1 - 5
DetailCenter
In general, the Detail Center is divided into three main work levels. Usually, your
building part or component will pass through all three levels until it is visible on
the workshop plan in the form of a detail. However, your work in the different
levels is limited to only a few mouse clicks, if all the basic settings of detailing
are adapted to your requirements.
Even if these works seem to be too awkward and involved for you, because you
do not need the flexibility of the Detail Center, you can use the Detail Center
Express. This part of the program once again combines the remaining steps
until a workshop plan is created. Detailing is worked through according to a pre-
determined pattern. „Detailing by one single mouse click“ became a reality.
Here you will obtain an overview of the parts of the model and their functional
associations and relationships. You can view construction groups, single parts
or whole areas of the model – all clearly structured in tree format. This is the
place where you can manage and change detail styles and link your
components with these styles as well as manage the modification mechanism.
In addition, DetailCenter Express! Is started here.
The second work level offers you an overview of the component or model views
created by the program. You can add or remove views, display a preview and
fine-tune the detail style.
In this overview you decide what exactly is to be processed as a detail block and
start the actual detailing process.
The third and last level features the detailed parts, which are located on your
hard drive in the form of detail blocks. You receive an overview of the detail
blocks of the current model (or other models) and decide which parts to import
or integrate into which drawing.
Placing the parts on a drawing sheet finishes the workshop plan, unless you
would like to carry out a few adjustments manually.
Page C.1 - 6
DetailCenter
Work Tools
Each of the three levels offers access to a window with work tools using the
function button bar. These tools are assigned to the corresponding area. In
order to keep the display area of the construction parts lists as large as possible,
many of the infrequently used functions and settings have been delegated to
these subordinate dialogs.
Information Window
In addition, the context menu offers access to another dockable information
window. All three-work levels are subordinate to this information window, which
shows the current status of the selected entry. Depending on the list, this
window displays the name and type of the part, data of detailing, insertion
location, current status, and much more.
Context Menu
A supplement to every level is a level-specific context menu accessible through
the right mouse button, which lists only those functions that are significant to the
respective list. You will probably use the context menus quite often because
they represent the fastest way to access a command.
Templates
As you already know from the other ProSteel 3D functions, the basic settings of
the Detail Center can be saved as template for each level. The settings of work
tools and of construction parts list are stored.
These templates (as reference) may again be stored in a parent template
together with the global settings for the Detail Center. This allows individual
configuration of the complete DetailCenter.
Page C.1 - 7
DetailCenter
Favourites
After defining some of the templates as favourites for the complete DetailCenter,
this allows fast selection from the favourite list. This is the most comfortable way
if you have to change the setting frequently during one session.
Detail Styles
The detail styles are the cornerstone of the entire detailing process. They
describe how a part is to look as a workshop detail or how the model is to
appear as an overview. The content of the styles is described in detail in the
chapter 'Detailing Styles'. The management and modification of a style is
described in detail in the chapter 'Component Overview'.
Just a preliminary note: A component without detail style cannot be processed
and is ignored by the program when it comes to detailing!
Preview
The detailing of a selected part can be previewed from within the views overview
or directly from within the model. This will create a small AutoCAD drawing
displaying the exact result of the detail style settings applied to this part. The
small drawing shows how the part will be detailed. This window and its drawing
can be zoomed or queried for information because it is an independent
AutoCAD drawing.
Since you can now open this part's detail style, you can track the effects of
different style settings in „real time“. We call this fine-tuning of the detail style. If
you open the preview for another part, you do not have to close this window
first. The content is updated automatically. After viewing the detail, the window
must be closed manually. While the preview is open, most of the functions of the
Detail Center are inaccessible. Please remember: The preview might be hidden
behind some other drawing because so many windows can be open
simultaneously. Also consider the speed of your computer when viewing a great
many details such as construction groups or entire overviews. Do not become
impatient if your computer seems to be busy calculating for what seems like a
long time. Even fast computers need a little computation time, but some of the
latest computers will surprise you with the speed of the update.
Page C.1 - 8
DetailCenter
There are two options for detailing a part when working with the Detail Center:
Either the part keeps its original size and the surrounding text (e.g. dimensions,
labels, etc.) is scaled to fit the part or the part is scaled and the text keeps its
original size. This is to support both of the methods typical for AutoCAD.
Scales
The first method allows for a simple – and unscaled – processing of the drawing
and does not generate the scale until the time of plotting. Components can also
be inserted (unlabeled!) into other plans easily and comfortably. The
disadvantage of this method is that this involves some thinking, to keep different
scales and the same text sizes within one drawing and still have to copy parts
from other drawings.
This is where the second method is more practical: You always plot using the
scale 1:1, always use the same text size, and scale the parts to fit the plotting
scales – just as you would do when drawing by hand. This allows you easy
management of different scales within one drawing.
ProSteel 3D permits both methods when detailing, but you have to stick to one
or the other method within one drawing. This is because the dimensioning styles
are the problem.
Dimensioning Styles
You define certain AutoCAD dimensioning styles in your model, which you can
use within the detail styles for dimensioning. When detailing, the program
creates a copy of the style, and from your settings determines the required text
and length scaling. This style is assigned a new name indicating the length
scaling and is used in the detail block.
Although the program does set the dimension text into the dimension
permanently, e.g. to evaluate contractions, you do want to receive an AutoCAD
associate dimensioning after the detailing has been concluded; thus the copy.
This also keeps your original style intact and you do not need to create separate
styles for each individual scale.
Page C.1 - 9
DetailCenter
If you want to work with the first method using a scale of 1:10, you will obtain a
style with a text scaling=10 and with a length scaling=1. The name could be,
e.g., PS_STD_1_10. Process another detail with different settings of the
AutoCAD dimensioning style and you will obtain the same name for the style.
No problems occurred up to now. Now insert both details into a drawing and the
first one will „win out“ because the name is identical. However, this is typical for
AutoCAD and ProSteel 3D has no intention of changing that.
If you have problems with the dimensioning styles, you can be assured
that this is due to not being consequent in this case.
This is the reason you should make sure that your prototype file, into which you
want to import the details, does not contain any dimensioning styles (if possible),
and that the basic styles with the same name are also identical in different
models if you want to mix together the details of different models. Do not change
the size by only changing the scale (e.g., when manually dimensioning), but
rather define a new style with a new name.
This is the way it should be when using AutoCAD „pure“ because there is a
good reason for it: If you rescale the parts manually, you are simply exchanging
the dimensioning style and all is well again.
Page C.1 - 10
DetailCenter
Single Parts
These are all parts that correspond to a real 3D-component part in the model
and normally are the smallest unit of detailing. The DetailCenter itself, however,
cannot differentiate between production parts and parts of additional purchase
or on stock.
A single part drawing can be generated of every ProSteel 3D volume solid. In
this drawing, the part edges, angles of intersection and drill holes are
dimensioned. Normally the coordinate system of the component part defines the
alignment of standard views, such as front view, plan view, etc.
Weld shapes are an exception. They consist of several single components, but
in most cases they are considered and treated as one component part.
Views
This is a three-dimensional arrangement of component parts in the model as
they can be seen from a defined view direction and with a previously defined
view depth, which is not to be confused with the component part views.
An overview drawing is created in which the position of the component parts to
each other and to existing reference axes (constructional axes) is dimensioned.
Views are derived from the existing model views which were either created
automatically by the workframe (PS_WORKFRAME), or which were added by
you later.
Page C.1 - 11
DetailCenter
Isometric Views
These views show the model in a three-dimensional depiction and are often
desired without the hidden edges. View direction is determined by the five global
3D-model views of the configuration.
It is possible as well to add isometric views to individual details (e.g. groups). In
this case, these are depicted as component part view together with the other
partial views.
Anchorage Plan
This view refers to the plan view plane and shows the plan view including
dimensions together with the depiction of the base plates and supports.
As special feature, it is possible to use different scales for plan view and base
plate details. The dimensioning of the holes can be referred to the plan view
grid.
Page C.1 - 12
DetailCenter
Manual Details
In principle, these are also views of the model, but you can freely determine the
involved component parts and the view direction during detailing.
Manual details allow you to generate unusual views or special detail sections.
As the name implies, you have to attach the dimensioning yourself and you
don’t have any possibility to have the view automatically checked with regard to
modifications.
Manual details don’t appear in the component part list nor do they have their
own detailing style. Scale and display of the component parts are, however
controlled by a temporarily assigned detailing style during generation.
It is true that after generation manual details can be inserted into the drawing in
the same way like standard views.
Multi-Shapes
These are single parts consisting of several components that are normally
treated and dimensioned like a single coherent component part (e.g. weld
shapes).
Depending on the situation it may be that these component parts are not
ordered but individually produced. Therefore, in the DetailCenter you can
consider a multi-shape as components. That means that it appears as an
individual subpart in a component part group, but on the other hand you can still
create single part drawings of the components.
Therefore, it is necessary to activate the option ‘Treat Parts as Single Parts’ in
the 3D-component parts properties for the parts in question.
Page C.1 - 13
DetailCenter
Gusset Details
These are views on the model showing the involved component parts of a
connection (2) or of a group of connections (1) as detailed section.
In most cases, the connecting elements such as plates, bolts, etc. can be
completely seen whereas the connected shapes are only partially displayed.
The connections are recognized via the existing logical links if at least one of
these links is named with an identification code.
A gusset detail appears as separate ‘component part’ in the component part list
of the DetailCenter and a detailing style can be assigned to it. Afterwards, you
treat it in a similar way like a component part group.
For this purpose, activate the ‘Extended Inputs’ for logical links in the global
settings of ProSteel 3D, if not yet effected. In the property dialog of the
connection, you can now enter a clear identification code and optionally a
designation.
Page C.1 - 14
DetailCenter
Here, you see a section of the connection data of an endplate. If you don’t have
any explicit links, perhaps because you modelled everything manually, the
necessary relations can be generated via manual links (PS_MANUAL_LINK).
Page C.1 - 15
DetailCenter
If you have inserted the results of the detailing into a drawing and want to further
process this drawing manually, you have to observe a few things described in
the following section.
Intelligent Details
The result of the detailing process is a detail, as you would draw it with standard
AutoCAD. You can see centrelines, visible and hidden edges, holes, etc. and
the part is still not a true „flat line graphic“. Intelligent details are still displayed as
three-dimensional details when viewing the page containing individual parts or
construction groups at a slant. However, when you print the part it appears
completely two-dimensional
The advantage is that you can subsequently add cuts or dimensions while
taking any possible shape shortening into account.
If you want to change the geometry subsequently, that is in the detailed part,
you have to import the changes with the ProSteel 3D functions if you still require
the intelligent features.
However, if you want to dissolve the detail in its entirety, you have to „explode“
the component like a block. This gives you a group, which can be ungrouped to
reach the lines.
Of course, the consequence is that all of the intelligence is lost. Thus, omit this if
at all possible. Overviews and manual details are an exception – those are
already non-intelligent line depictions.
Shape Shortening
During the detailing you can select whether you want to shorten any parts that
are especially long. Contracted sections are then attached to those sections of a
component that do not show any manipulations in a longer stretch and are
actually of no interest. This gives you the opportunity to display the sections that
are important for the detailing in an optimal size (because you can select larger
scales) or show more components on a given page.
The picture below clearly illustrates the difference. Both shapes are detailed with
the same scale and scaled to the same length.
Page C.1 - 16
DetailCenter
Pick Helpers
The intelligent components of groups have the disadvantage that the individual
parts of a detailed construction group are inaccessible if e.g. you want to move
them subsequently. It would also not help to activate or deactivate the group
using the AutoCAD-groups.
This is why ProSteel 3D features the "Pick Helpers”, which you might view as a
grip variation. If you do not have any part selected in the drawing and you
access the context menu using the right mouse button, you will see the option
ProSteel 3D SETTINGS and the entry Pick Helpers.
Use this entry to toggle the pick helpers on and off. Small little triangles now
appear on the components, which you can now use to select and e.g. move the
parts of a group.
When working with the pick helpers, don't forget the following special feature: If
a building component of a construction group is moved, a new drawing of the
group is only created when you keep the ALT-key pressed during the
movement. Otherwise, the drawing has to be regenerated to obtain the modified
display.
Page C.1 - 17
DetailCenter
Construction component lists are most substantial within the three work levels.
In these lists, the construction components or detail blocks are displayed in a
tree structure that can be used for working in the selected work level.
The user can freely configure Sorting and filters of the parts. Thus there can be
different displays for different tasks.
Page C.1 - 18
DetailCenter
Page C.1 - 19
DetailCenter
Selection List Select one of the filter templates that you specified in the
corresponding list. Select Current Settings when you haven’t
created any template and you want to use the current settings
of the filter dialog instead.
EDIT By clicking on this button you can edit the display filter or
store/select a filter template.
Group Options
Sort Order Here, you select the order of the entries.
Ascending – The entries are displayed in an ascending
numerical or alphabetical order (1,2,3,4...).
Descending – The entries are displayed in a descending
numerical or alphabetical order (...4,3,2,1).
No Sorting – The entries are not sorted.
Show Entries 1x Each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree
structure. The position numbers serve as criterion of
comparison, separated in groups and single parts.
If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two
different group positions, this is only displayed in the first
group.
> New Per Group Each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree
structure, but each single part of a group will be registered
anew per group.
If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two
different group positions, this is displayed exactly once in each
group.
Group Display Here, you select the way group parts will be displayed.
As Group Structure – The building components and bolts of a
group are subordinate to the group entry. This allows an easy
selection of any part of a group.
Only Single Parts – Only the actual parts of a group are
displayed, but not the group itself.
Group and Single Parts – The group (as an entry without
subordinate parts) and the actual parts of this group are
displayed of equal value side by side.
The advantage of this separation is that in case of a user-
defined sorting you can arrange the group and the component
parts separately. Otherwise, it wouldn’t be possible to register
the single parts in the case the group has not been registered.
Nor would it be possible to separate e.g. in groups and
building components of equal value side by side.
Page C.1 - 20
DetailCenter
Display Filter
The display filter allows a very detailed filtering of component parts according to
their properties. You can describe any logically nested filter condition on the
basis of the existing properties (there are no limits with regard to the complexity
of the query).
You may store these filter conditions as templates which can be easily selected.
This allows you to prepare frequent filter conditions that are perfectly adapted to
your application.
Two filters of equal value are available (preliminary filter and main filter) which
are linked by the logical AND.
Although each filter is logically nested by any condition such as 'All shapes
longer than 5000, but no IPE270 or IPE240', it sometimes is easier to work with
the preliminary filter, too.
If e.g. no sheet metal plates are required for a task, you can exclude them
permanently already via the preliminary filter. The standard filter then serves for
your daily work and you can modify this filter without having to add the condition
'No sheet metal plates' each time.
Page C.1 - 21
DetailCenter
Page C.1 - 22
DetailCenter
When all of the three components of a comparative condition have been preset,
you can add them to the complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT
button. Depending on the existing conditions and on the selected logical link, the
appropriate brackets will be set.
Dialog Commands
OPERATOR AND
By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator AND as logical
link for the next comparative condition.
OPERATOR OR
By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator OR as logical link
for the next comparative condition.
Page C.1 - 23
DetailCenter
BRACKETS
Clicking on this button forces the program to manually add brackets to the
filter conditions existing up to that moment.
Brackets are always necessary if you want to link the complete result of a
(partial) condition with another one, because the combination of (A AND B) OR
C is different to A AND (B OR C).
INSERT
By clicking on this button you add the current comparative condition to the
complete filter condition.
DELETE
By clicking on this button you delete the comparative condition that was
added last.
DELETE ALL
By clicking on this button you delete the complete filter condition.
Page C.1 - 24
DetailCenter
Since the component overview constitutes the starting page of the Detail Center,
the functions described here also apply to the other work levels. These are
especially the individual sorting of list display and the use of filters.
When selecting the Detail Center command, this tab will always be active first,
and the current drawing is „scanned“ by the Detail Center.
All model parts are searched according to predefined criteria and then
displayed. This might take some time when large models are involved. All detail
styles are also searched and displayed.
A great number of the described functions may be selected via the context
menu of the right mouse button. Look there whether the corresponding entry is
available if there should be no hint in this documentation.
If you need only a section of a model, use the visibility classes to hide the
unneeded parts. Any parts hidden with the visibility class command are not
recognized by the Detail Center. Please note however that these parts are then
no longer recognized by any of the details.
This is the function bar of the component overview. Buttons no. 1-4 are available
in each work level with the same function.
Page C.1 - 25
DetailCenter
Dialog Commands
RECURSION (1)
By clicking on this button, recursive processing is alternatively switched on
or off.
If it is switched on, any processing applied to a parent entry in the
component parts list (e.g. assign style) is also applied to all subordinate entries.
Otherwise, only the selected entry is processed or all entries on the same level,
if this option is activated in the “model“.
STRUCTURE (2)
Click on this button to open the dialog for display sorting of component
parts list. Here, you can select the standard display or an individual
structure and set user-defined filters.
SETTINGS (3)
Click on this button to open the dialog for the work tools where you can
specify additional settings only for this work level.
Depending on the work level, the global settings are valid, too, which can
be defined separately.
TEMPLATE (4)
Click on this button to store your settings for the Detail Center in a
template or to select this template.
UPDATE (5)
Click on this button to search the selected drawing once more.
This is required if you activated a different drawing in the MDI environment
or if changes were made to the current drawing (e.g. new position).
EXPRESS (6)
Click on this button to start the Detail Center Express, to carry out a
complete detailing according to a specified pattern.
Page C.1 - 26
DetailCenter
PREPARE (7)
Click on this special action button to import all parts selected in the parts list into
the view list and determine the views pre-selected in the detail style.
Component views can be generated only for parts linked with a detail style.
SEPARATOR (10)
Use this separator to enlarge the docked dialog. The drawing next to it will
decrease in size accordingly.
In addition, there is a scrolling bar between the two display lists (if two lists are
available), which you can use for modifying the scale of the two lists.
CLOSE (11)
Click on this button to close the Detail Center.
Page C.1 - 27
DetailCenter
This list displays all available detail styles. The selection consists of the styles
saved in the drawing as well as the style files saved on the hard drive.
Double-click on the desired list entry to open the dialog for the detail styles
where you can modify the entries. Alternatively, you can also use the context
menu option Edit Detail Style.
Modifications apply only to the current session. If you want to save your
changes permanently, you have to save the model or export the detail style as
an independent file to the hard drive.
Clicking on another list entry while the detail style dialog is open updates the
display of the detail style dialog.
Select the detail style you want to save from the list. Then select the context
menu option Save Detail Style. Now, the style is exported as a file with its name
to the hard disk.
If you want to save all styles of the drawing, you select the entry Save All Detail
Styles instead. Now, each style is saved in its own file.
If you want to copy a detail style, select the entry Copy Detail Style. Then, a
dialog appears where you can indicate the new name of the style. The new
detail style is now displayed in the list and can be processed further.
Kindly also take care of the hints concerning the modified file format at the end
of this chapter.
Select the detail style you want to delete from the list. Then use the context
menu option Remove Detail Style. The detail style is now deleted from the list
and the drawing. You can also delete the style from the hard drive.
Please note that this deleted detail style is then no longer available for later
sessions.
Page C.1 - 28
DetailCenter
Some detailing functions such as manual detailing require a default detail style.
Use the context menu to set or remove a default detail style. Just select the
desired style, followed by the entry Set as Default Detail Style in the context
menu. The current default detail style is identified in bold type.
At first loading of the Detail Center, only those detail styles are displayed in the
list, which were saved in the drawing.
You can, however, load additional style files (e.g. the defaults of certain
customers), when you start detailing. If you then save the drawing, these
additional styles will be permanently available in the drawing and will be
displayed at the next loading. To load an additional style select the context
menu option Load Detail Style. Now, you can select a style file by the file
selection dialog.
If you directly want to load all existing style files from the standard folder, then
you select the entry Load all Detail Styles instead.
This additional loading of styles is reasonable if you require a great number of
different styles in your company all in all, but only a part of them has to be used
per order. If you load a detail style existing in the model, the existing style will be
overwritten.
Kindly also take care of the hints concerning the modified file format at the end
of this chapter.
Page C.1 - 29
DetailCenter
This list is the primary working list of the Detail Center because it displays all
parts of a model for current status verification. Display and sorting of the list
depends on the display settings.
Status Indicator
Depending on the component status, the entries feature small pictures. Only
entries with such pictures consist of parts that can be detailed. All other entries
are only parent sorting entries.
Symbol Colours
Gray Parts without any special status. Probably, these parts have
not yet been processed with the help of the Detail Center.
Blue A detail block of this part has already been created. However,
it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has not been modified
compared with the detail block so that this block can be
inserted.
Yellow A detail block of this part has already been created. However,
it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has however been modified
compared with the detail block so that this block has to be
detailed anew before it can be inserted.
Green A detail block of this part has already been created and
inserted into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has not been modified
compared with the inserted detail block so that this detail is
currently valid in the 2D drawing.
Red A detail block of this part has already been created and
inserted into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has however been modified
compared with the inserted detail block so that this detail has
to be updated in the 2D drawing.
Additional Checkmarks
Checkmark A detail style has been assigned to the component part.
Asterisk (*) the part in question is the main part of the associated group.
Page C.1 - 30
DetailCenter
The meaning of the different entries can be easily differentiated by means of the
symbols, because single parts, sheet metal plates, groups, views, etc. have their
own typical symbol.
Use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select multiple entries. This is a Windows-
specific function, which will not be explained here.
Many operations can also be carried out using drag&drop. For example, by
dragging a component list entry on a detail style, you can link the two.
Via the Detail Center, the properties of component parts can be directly modified
in the model. Select the entry PS3D Properties in the context menu after having
selected the desired list entries. For more detailed information about parts
properties, please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual.
In principle, selection is as if you select the part(s) in the model and then load
the properties. In combination with the sorting possibilities of the component
parts list, however, it is possible here to modify e.g. only the material of head
plates. If you are working with a big model, using the traditional way would be
much more complicated.
Don’t forget to update the Detail Center after a modification was made because
the program doesn’t carry out an automatic update deliberately.
Page C.1 - 31
DetailCenter
The component parts list has a direct reference to the model in both directions,
which allows an easy and fast orientation.
On one hand, the components of the entries selected in the list can be displayed
in the model. This allows you to see directly which parts belong to a group, to a
view, etc. To do this, select the option Display Parts Selection in the Model in
the work tools. Now, select an entry in the component parts list and the
assigned parts are colourfully checked in the model. Choose the entry 'Model’ to
remove the marking.
On the other hand, a part selected in the model can be checked in the
component parts list (and selected). To do this, pick the part in the model and
select the menu point Search/Selection Single Part via the context menu of the
right mouse button. Now, the list scrolls to the position with the assigned entry,
the entry is checked and selected. The parent entries such as group list nodes
etc. are "opened“.
Sorting
Sorting of the component parts list always depends on the work tools settings.
The numerical sorting of position within the sorting according to groups, part
types, etc. is always carried out in three steps:
At first, sorting is effected according to the main position number. This number
again is sorted according to an existing position index. If additional prefixes are
available, theses are sorted in the last step. Position numbers, which only
consist of letters, are displayed at the beginning in an alphabetical order. If the
filter 'Display Each Part only 1x’ is checked, only those positions are assumed to
be identical which only differ in their part prefix unless the button 'Don’t Use
Position Number Prefix' has been activated.
Page C.1 - 32
DetailCenter
Partial views and thus details can be created from every component part with a
style. These different sorting help you to link the correct parts with the necessary
style in a rapid way.
You can only detail parts having a detail style. Which details get can already be
determined here.
Associate a Style
In the list, select the parts and then use drag&drop to pull them onto the detail
style – and you are finished! You can also select the parts and use the context
menu to select the option Link with Detail Style.
If you want to pick the parts directly from the model, you have to select a detail
style first. Then, you call the entry Pick Parts to be Linked in the Model in the
context menu, followed by picking the parts in the model (or you select them by
a window). However, you can assign only single parts with this method.
Recursive Association
If a single part has a detail style, this part is detailed with this style in the form of
a single part detail. If, however, a construction group has a detail style, this style
becomes the detail style for the entire construction group detailing.
If you want to generate only group details, the associated single parts do not
really require their own detail style because the group style also applies to the
parts within that group.
Page C.1 - 33
DetailCenter
If you assign style "A" to the model and 'Recursive' is activated, every entry is
linked with this style. If 'Recursive' is deactivated, only the entries Outline,
Complete Plan View, BG 100 and BG 101 are linked with this style, because
they are located hierarchically immediately underneath the model. Since the
model itself is only a sorting entry, it passes the association along to its
subordinate entries.
If you assign style "B" to the BG 101 and 'Recursive' is activated, every single
part of this group is linked with this style as well. If 'Recursive' is deactivated,
only this construction group is assigned style "B".
Select the parts in the list and then use drag&drop to pull them towards the top
and away from the Detail Center – and you are finished! You can also select the
parts and use the context menu to select the option Separate from Detail Style.
Remember that parts without a detail style cannot be processed unless the parts
belong to a group and you want to detail only the group views.
Write-Protection
Hide Parts
You can temporarily remove undesired parts from the component parts list to
get a better survey. To do this, select the corresponding parts and then activate
the menu point Hide Entry in the context menu.
Page C.1 - 34
DetailCenter
Visibility only refers to the component parts list. Don’t mix up this function with
the visibility classes in the 3D-model, which really hide the parts visually and
thus switch to permanently invisible parts.
When the Detail Center is started anew or when you use the command
UPDATE (5), all hidden entries will be visible again.
To import parts into the view list just drag the desired parts on the action button
PREPARE (8) using drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that
you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and the parts are transferred.
You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse.
If you have checked the ‚Import Directly to Views’ option in the settings, you do
not need to do anything else because the style association also transfers the
parts. If you separate parts from their style, they are also removed from the view
list.
When the part already exists in the view list, the entries will be corrected
correspondingly. When the corresponding group already exists in the view list,
the single part will be assigned to this group.
It is always possible to add or remove partial views by modifying the detail style
correspondingly and importing the part anew.
However, if you want to add a partial view only for a certain component part and
the detail style has to remain unchanged, you can add or remove partial views in
the second work level 'Views’ independent of the style settings.
The manual details where the 2D-details are generated largely independent of
the part hierarchies and detailing automatisms are also created in this work
level.
Page C.1 - 35
DetailCenter
Special Settings
You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button
SETTINGS (3).
Page C.1 - 36
DetailCenter
Page C.1 - 37
DetailCenter
If you have imported all of the parts for detailing, the generated views are
displayed in this work level, the views list.
Since most of the important points have already been discussed under
Component Overview, here are just a few special commands of this work level.
Dialog-Commands
ADDITIONAL VIEW
Click on this button to add further views to the selected component part or
to create manual details. Then, another dialog opens (see also: Additional
Views).
After an entry has been checked in the views list, the corresponding parts for the
manual detail are automatically selected. On the other hand, when you select
the first entry of the list, you can select any part by clicking on it in the model.
DETAILING
Click on this special action button to detail all of the parts selected in the views
list, including the mentioned partial views, and to store them on the hard drive as
detail blocks.
The created detail blocks then can be inserted in your 2D-drawings.
Page C.1 - 38
DetailCenter
Views List
Here, you will see all views of the imported parts in the form of entries, which
can be checked for their current status. The display and sorting of the list
depends on the settings of the display templates.
Status Display
The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please
refer to that section for further details. If the view has already been detailed it is
marked with a checkmark.
Preview
Before detailing you can display a preview of the detail or of a single view.
Detailing will take place as it is displayed there.
If you choose only one view you will see exactly that view in the preview.
However, if you select the entire component or group, you will see all existing
views of the part in an order determined by the program.
To activate the preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select
Preview via the context menu. After some computing time displayed by the
status indicator, a drawing window opens containing the possible detailing as a
preview.
If the detail style dialog and the preview are open, you can now change the
different detail style settings and check the effects of the modifications. If the
detail style is not yet open, you can open the dialog via the context menu Edit
with Detail Style. The correct detail style belonging to this view is then already
selected.
Should you notice that the views displayed are too few or show an unfavourable
line of vision on the part, you can add or remove any view.
Just drag the view to be removed towards the top and away from the Detail
Center using drag&drop. If you select an entire component, the entire
component will be removed; if you select the “Detail Views” entry, all generated
views are removed.
To add a view to a component just select the corresponding part and call the
entry Additional Views via the context menu (see also: ‘Additional Views’).
Page C.1 - 39
DetailCenter
Detailing
To start the detailing just drag the desired parts onto the action button using
drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active.
Let go off the mouse button and the parts are transferred. You can also highlight
the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or select the entry
Create 2D via the context menu.
A detail block with the date and time of the detailing is created and saved on
your hard drive every time the detailing process is activated. Every variation of
the same type is thus still accessible later during the insertion process.
You must save the model after the detailing has finished, since the modification
management requires information that has to be written to the drawing. If you do
not save the model, this information is lost.
Special Settings
You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button SETTINGS.
Page C.1 - 40
DetailCenter
Since each component part has its own coordinate system, a clear and constant
main view can be specified with the help of this coordinate system. In case of
standard shapes, the Y-axis of this coordinate system is always aligned parallel
towards the web so that it can serve as reference axis for the plan view.
This guarantees that – independent of the shape position – the front view
always shows one of the two web sides and the plan view shows a flange. The
position in longitudinal direction, however, depends on the insertion direction of
the shape. The starting point of the part is always situated on the left or at the
bottom.
In case of non-symmetrical shapes (e.g. L-shapes), the coordinate system is
rotated around the Y-axis so that you can look inside the shape.
To avoid exchanging up and down you can determine two global front views.
The view in the direction of the ”nearest” part coordinate axis is assumed as
front view of the corresponding shape. To avoid the view on a cross-section you
can define an alternative front view, which mostly has been rotated by 90°.
Page C.1 - 41
DetailCenter
You obtain the result that the position is always independent of the insertion
direction of the part (base plates are always „at the bottom“), but the front view
once can show the web and once the flange – depending on the rotation of the
shape in the view. Tough, parts that are situated further back in construction are
displayed as seen from inside.
Select the entry Set Global Reference View in the context menu of the
component parts list to specify the global front views. Then, you have to click
into the model to get the cross hairs for selection. After that, you select the
desired view direction of the front view and then the alternative view direction.
When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the views are reset to the
default values (0,1,0) and (1,0,0). The current values are displayed in the
information window.
This variant is similar to the global front view. The difference is that instead of
specified reference views you always choose the part coordinate axis, which
show most clearly from the center of construction to the outside. This means
that the front view is always what you would see from the outside if you looked
towards the center of the whole construction.
This method largely corresponds to human imagination, but depending on the
rotation of the shape, once the web and once the flange can be displayed.
The following example shows the effects of the selected main view on the 2D-
display of a shape:
Page C.1 - 42
DetailCenter
Positions 1-4 have been inserted at a rectangular, the Y-axis of the part is
showing to the top and the Z-axis is showing in shape direction. The views A
and B are the specified global front views.
Depending on selection, you will get the front view displayed on the right.
The last variant is that you can specify for each individual part separately which
part coordinate axis has to serve as front view. In general, you can decide to
use variant (B) or (C) and align unfavourable parts individually and
independently.
Select the entry Set Individual Reference View in the context menu of the
component part list to specify an individual front view. Then, you have to select
the desired part to get the cross-hairs for selection. After that, you choose the
desired view direction of the front view.
When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the individual front view of the
part is deleted. The current value is displayed in the information window. Select
the entry Reset All Reference Views in the context menu of the component parts
list to delete the specifications for all component parts simultaneously.
Page C.1 - 43
DetailCenter
Other Views
You have the option to add additional views to a part or to create manual details
from entire model areas. Since the manual details are actually free views, they
too are controlled via this dialog.
You have access to this function via the button ÄDDITIONAL VIEW or via the
entry Additional Views in the context menu. The following dialog window is also
a non-modal dialog which means that you can change your part selection in the
views list of the Detail Center at any time.
Page C.1 - 44
DetailCenter
PICK VIEW Click on this button to define the view level for free views by
picking in the model.
ADD Click on this button to add the selected view to the selected
part.
MANUAL DETAIL By clicking on this button, you can create a manual detail of
the selected part or of any part selection from the model.
Pick on Plane The points picked during definition of a view plane are
projected onto the current view plane.
Add View
If you want to add one of the six basic views, just select the corresponding view
from the list and click on the ADD button.
To add a free view, just select one of the free views 'View A to View F' from the
list. The input field above can be used to change the name to get a more
suitable one.
Then, click on the PICK VIEW button to specify the UCS (origin, X- and Y-axis)
to pick any view or use the ESC key to import the current view on screen.
Finally, click on the ADD button.
The added views are treated during detailing just like directly created views and
automatically further processed.
Page C.1 - 45
DetailCenter
Select the first entry 'Detail Views’ in the views list of the Detail Center to create
a manual detail with any part selection from the model.
Now, click on the MANUAL DETAIL button and enter a name for the detail in the
then opening input field. Then, pick any view by specifying the UCS (origin, X-
and Y-axis) or use the ESC key to import the current view on screen.
After that, you are prompted to select the parts, which are to be processed for
this manual detail.
A window similar to the preview opens, which displays the parts as 3D objects
for now. You can now dimension manually, attach position flags or any 2D-lines
and texts. Manipulations of these 3D-parts are possible as well since they are
only copies from the model.
Then you click on the modified CREATE 2D button, and the 2D-projection
calculation for the 3D-parts is carried out. Of course, you can continue to work in
this window, but you will not have the intelligent properties of the components
available.
Once you have finished your additions, save the window without renaming it. If
you do rename it, the unique allocation for the Detail Center is no longer active.
You can also create a manual detail from construction groups or single parts
without having to select the parts specifically in the model.
Just select the entry of the desired part in the views list. The rest is the same as
for the manual detail from the model apart from parts selection.
Page C.1 - 46
DetailCenter
If you have detailed all of the parts you can then insert the generated detail
blocks into the workshop plans. You will see the saved detail blocks in this last
work level, the insert list.
Since most of the important points have already been discussed under
Component Overview, here are just a few special commands of this work level.
Dialog Commands
UPDATE
Click on this button to search the current output directory of the Detail
Center once more.
This is required if you detailed a new model drawing or if a manual copy of
a complete detail folder was entered into the output directory.
EXPRESS
Click on this button to start the InsertExpress for automatic insertion into
the workshop plans as collective tabs according to a specified pattern.
Page C.1 - 47
DetailCenter
Select the entry Add Detail Library in the context menu to add a detail library.
You can then select an additional folder via the Windows file selection dialog,
which is added to the list.
If normally you are working locally, you also have e.g. access to detail blocks
saved on a network server by using this function.
To delete a detail library, click on the corresponding list entry and use the
context menu to select the entry Delete Detail Library. All detail blocks including
the folder are then deleted.
Please remember that the program doesn’t take into consideration possibly
existing foreign files! ProSteel 3D assumes that the detail libraries only contain
detail blocks for insertion and that no finished drawings or other files are
contained in these libraries.
Page C.1 - 48
DetailCenter
List of Details
Here you will see all of the generated detail blocks as their own separate entries
with date and time when they were created and you can check their current
status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings of the work
tools.
Status Display
The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please
refer to that section for further details. If the detail block has already been
inserted, the entry is marked with a checkmark.
Preview
Before inserting the detail block, you can display a preview. To activate the
preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select the entry Preview
via the context menu.
A new drawing window opens displaying the result of the detailing in the form of
a preview. This detail block can be processed as well.
In case of modification, you mustn’t change the name of the drawing on any
account. Otherwise the detail block cannot be identified any more.
Page C.1 - 49
DetailCenter
Insertion
Every inserted detail block first appears in the current target drawing in its origin
and can then be moved to the desired position within the drawing („sticking to
the checkmark“). You can open several drawings and click on a drawing to set it
as the active one before inserting the blocks. Any details will then be displayed
there.
You can track the parts you have just inserted if you have opened the info
window. You can ignore this part insert or cancel the entire insertion process.
Target Drawing
In order to activate the modification mechanism the program has to know, into
which drawing you are inserting the details. You cannot insert parts until the
drawing has been saved. You should refrain from making any subsequent
drawing name or folder changes as well.
Although the Detail Center has a verification function for “lost” drawings or
details, you will save yourself a lot of time and effort by just leaving the plans
where they are. The location for saving the plans should be considered
beforehand.
Revisions
Once the details have been inserted into the drawing you can manually revise
the drawing. Please remember that the single parts and groups are intelligent
details. For further information please read the comments in the corresponding
chapter of this manual.
Ideally, you should optimize the detail style of the detailing in such a way as to
eliminate any revisions. Only then the modification mechanism can function
correctly, since subsequent changes in the details are otherwise lost if you
select the modification function. It is however true that there are modifications
which are automatically kept, too.
Page C.1 - 50
DetailCenter
US-Mark Numbering
Click on the button NEW DRAWING to count up the index for the drawing
number and the component part index will be reset to its start value. You can
continue insertion in another drawing sheet.
Drawing Synchronization
When you are inserting the detail blocks, the insert information is saved to
special files of the detail library. After all, it could be that you did not open the
model when inserting blocks and opening the drawing in the background can be
quite frustrating because very large models especially require a long computing
time for this operation.
Every time you open the model, the model drawing is compared and
synchronized with these data. You should never delete these files until the
synchronization process is finished and you have saved the model. The
modification mechanism cannot function reliably if the program lacks the
information telling it which part has been inserted into which drawing.
Your work is better protected, if you do not delete the blocks and folders until
after the assignment is completed.
Page C.1 - 51
DetailCenter
Special Settings
You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button SETTINGS.
Page C.1 - 52
DetailCenter
In addition to the settings of the different work levels, you can use this page to
make the fundamental settings of the Detail Center. However, you will also find
special default settings, which are valid for several work levels at the same time
and which are set centrally.
Page C.1 - 53
DetailCenter
Page C.1 - 54
DetailCenter
Synchronize Detail Style The program selects exactly the detail style the currently
checked entry has in the component part resp. views list.
When the dialog window for processing of detail style
parameters is open, the corresponding settings are also
directly displayed there.
> List of Detail Styles dependent The detail styles displayed in the component part
list depend on which type of part is checked. If you have
checked for example a single part, only the styles classified for
single parts will be displayed.
Style classification is effected in detail style dialog. The result
is that only the styles appropriate for the component part or
function will be displayed later.
> Parameter dependent The displayed parameter pages in the detail style dialog
depend on the type of the checked component part. If you
have e.g. checked a single part, the pages for groups will not
be displayed.
Synchronize Part List The Detail Center is always updated to match with the active
model drawing, if several drawings are open. Since this
process may require some time, you can switch off this option
in the case of big models. Update can be selected manually
via the UPDATE button in the component parts list.
In addition, you often don’t want to update the lists while you
are only looking up something in another drawing.
Group Others
Page C.1 - 55
DetailCenter
Search Joints Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which the
different single connections (these are recognized via the
logical links) are combined to a connection gusset.
For more detailed information please refer to ‘Gusset Details’
in this chapter.
Modeller-Tolerance Here, you set the tolerance for contour calculation of the
modeller.
In some rare cases it may be that the contour cannot be
determined correctly at 2D-derivation. This especially occurs
when component parts having very small angles are rotated
towards view direction.
If you detect an incorrect behaviour or if the error message
"Can't calculate Extents" is displayed in the command line of
AutoCAD, you can set here a smaller tolerance value.
Ground Zero Here, you enter the height level which correspond to the X-Y-
plane in the model with the height Z=0 (world coordinates).
For detailing of groups and overviews it is thus possible to
display correct height dimensions.
Thus, you can start with a model at z=0 which should however
correspond to the height level -700 of a building plan for the
coordinate dimensioning.
Base Plane (z) Here, you enter on which height (z-coordinate) the plane for
the plan view and for the anchorage plan has to be laid in the
model (world coordinates). When you indicate the value
<min>, the deepest point which exists in the model will be
taken.
The effect will be that any concrete foundations beneath
supports existing in the model don’t have an influence any
more.
Connection Here, you enter how the connection gussets have to be
displayed.
Only Gusset – only the entry for the complete gusset is
displayed.
As Structure – The entry for the complete gusset is displayed
and, subordinate to this gusset, the single connections, too.
Thus it is easy to check which connections are combined.
Page C.1 - 56
DetailCenter
Multiple Here, you enter how combined weld shapes are displayed.
Only Shape – Only the entry for the complete weld shape is
displayed.
As Structure – The entry for the complete weld shape is
displayed and, subordinate to this shape, the single
components, too.
Thus it is easy to check out of which components the shape
consists. In addition, it is possible to create each single
component individually as a detail.
Pos. No. Here, you enter a general format template for the position
number of weld shape components. This number is used as
an alternative, if there isn’t any position number known from
the 3D-model.
For more detailed information please refer to ‘Weld Shapes’ in
this chapter.
View Depth Here, you enter the distances for the plan view plane and for
the anchorage plan of the sectional area.
Page C.1 - 57
DetailCenter
Dialog-Commands
TEMPLATE
Click on this button to save your settings of the Detail Center in a template
or to select one of these templates.
In this template, the individual settings of all work levels as well as the
global settings are saved. Display sorting and filters can only be processed
by indicating the corresponding templates in the global settings of the
DetailCenter. You can process or select this template file on each work level.
When you have defined one of the templates as “favourite”, this allows fast
selection from the neighbouring selection list.
Page C.1 - 58
DetailCenter
List Here, you can see the terms of the database, which have to
be translated. If you click on one of these terms, it will be
displayed in the Original Text field and you can add or revise
the translation.
Please note that only those terms are displayed, which exist in
the database at the very moment. Therefore you have to
update the database after having modified the model.
Language Here, you select the language, which has to be translated.
Original Text Here, the current entry from the list will be displayed the
translation which you can edit.
Page C.1 - 59
DetailCenter
Translation Here, you can enter the translation of the currently selected
term. Click on the INSERT button and the entry is accepted as
translation into the selected language.
If the term has already been translated into the selected
language before, the translation will be displayed. Click on the
MODIFY button and the translation will be modified
correspondingly.
All Entries If this field has been checked, all entries available in the
database are displayed in the list of the terms, which have to
be translated.
Unknown Entries If this field has been checked, only those entries are displayed
in the list of which a translation into the selected language is
not yet available.
File Path Here, you see the path of the translation database. Click on
File button to modify the database.
Click on this button to modify (select) the translation database.
Page C.1 - 60
DetailCenter
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center
to search in the model. Click on the entry Enlarge Translation from Model. The
model is searched for new terms and these are imported.
Page C.1 - 61
DetailCenter
This function permits you to transfer the drawing numbers saved in the drawing
database or the file paths of the workshop drawings to the component parts
properties of the model drawing.
It is possible to display the drawing numbers of the processed details in the
position flags of an overview. In addition, it would also be possible to export the
parts data via ProSteel 3D standard interface and to have them evaluated by
foreign programs.
Start Transfer
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center
to click on the entry Take over file Paths. Then, you still have the possibility to
verify the drawing database of the model, if in the meantime you moved some
details or modified the drawing numbers.
After the drawing verification was finished (or if you don’t want this option) the
following dialog opens:
Page C.1 - 62
DetailCenter
Group Target
Target Here you specify into which property fields of the parts the
data have to be transferred.
Note 1 – The data are transferred into the note field 1 of the
parts properties.
Note 2 - The data are transferred into the note field 2 of the
parts properties.
Group Links Only the data of the corresponding group are transferred to
each part in the model; e.g. detailed stiffeners are marked with
the reference to the corresponding group drawing.
Equal Positions The data are transferred to all component parts having the
equal position number (separated according to single part and
group) and this even if only the workshop drawing to one of
these positions exists.
Remove before In all component parts, the contents of the selected property
field are removed before transfer is started.
All existing entries are overwritten, this would, however, permit
to transfer and display the drawing numbers of all parts first
and then only the drawing paths of the groups (the drawing
numbers of the single parts would thus be deleted again).
Now, click on the OK button to transfer the current entries of the drawing
database in the component parts properties.
Page C.1 - 63
DetailCenter
Each time when you insert some details in a drawing, a dependence of the
component part on the workshop drawing and vice versa will be saved in the
drawing database of the model drawing. These saved dependences later permit
an automatic update of the workshop drawing or the transfer of drawing
numbers to the component parts properties of the model.
These links are the reason for your having to enter a valid drawing name of the
destination drawings before insertion of details. It is also the reason for your
having to save the model after insertion.
Nevertheless it may be that you have to modify the physical position of the 2D-
drawings after the complete detailing was finished. This is the case if you have
to save them in an assembly folder of the order in the network. In addition, it
may be that you want to move some details from one drawing to the other in
order to add some completions or just because there is not enough place in the
drawing any more.
However, if the model has saved the wrong dependences, and the Detail Center
thus cannot function completely as it should, you can correct this subsequently.
This correction partly is carried out automatically, partly by means of your
manual support. It is divided into the two areas Drawing Path Verification and
Detail Verification.
Start of Verification
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center
and click on the entry Check Dependences. After the note that this function may
require some time and that if need be you can cancel the function the
verification starts.
At first, it is verified whether all paths of workshop drawings saved in the
drawing database still exist. Then, the drawings, which were not found, are
displayed in the dialog. Now, you have the possibility to set the paths or drawing
names anew.
Page C.1 - 64
DetailCenter
After verification of paths was finished, and any necessary corrections were
made, the program passes on to the verification of the details contained. It is
now verified whether all details are contained in the original or now modified
drawings.
Page C.1 - 65
DetailCenter
All the details, which were not found, are now displayed in the list. You have
thus the possibility to link any moved details anew or to remove deleted details.
Page C.1 - 66
DetailCenter
End of Verification
After the verification has been finished, the assignment is structured anew and
the drawing database is updated. You still have the possibility now to remove
the ignored or invalid detail hints from the drawing database. If you refrain from
doing this, the original entries of these details will be kept and you can repeat
the verification at a later moment.
Including Ignored If this field has been checked, the detail hints on ignored
drawings will be taken into consideration, too for correction (all
details giving a hint of these drawings are set as ignored
details).
Otherwise, these are not affected in order to avoid destroying
hints to temporarily moved drawings.
Delete Ignored If this field has been checked, the hints of 2D-drawings of all
ignored details will be removed as well. The data base entry
with possible further information is however kept.
Page C.1 - 67
DetailCenter
Delete Invalid If this field has been checked, the data base entries of any
details, which were not found, will be completely removed.
Otherwise, only the hints of 2D-drawings of these details will
be removed.
When you click on CANCEL in this dialog, the data base will not be modified.
You can repeat the verification process at any time you like by means of
correction.
Thus you can first look at the result of drawing verification in a text file (model
name_LogFile.txt) which are situated in the subdirectory ..\detail of
your ProSteel 3D installation. There, you will find a list of all workshop drawings
linked with the model as well as the status of the details expected to be there.
[HEADER]
Verification file=h:\testmodel.dwg
Page C.1 - 68
DetailCenter
The ProSteel 3D Detail Center can also be used to detail parts directly from
within the model or display a preview of the detail. This means dimensions of
construction groups can be checked, or only a few selected parts within a
complex building, which are urgently needed, can be detailed.
Perhaps area classes have not been used, but it is now desired to detail a
special truss. Large models pose the problem of being able to identify this part
directly.
The Detail Center offers a few helpful tools, but the following method is even
easier:
To detail a component part directly from within the model, select a default detail
style first, so that parts without a detail style can be detailed.
Now highlight the parts to be detailed within the model and then select the
context menu via the right mouse button. Depending on the parts selected, a
preview can be created from a single part or a group or these parts or groups
can be detailed directly. Select the desired function from the context menu.
A group can be detailed or displayed in the preview whenever the main part of
the group has been selected.
Page C.1 - 69
DetailCenter
Direct Detailing
If you want to work with direct detailing, you will be prompted to specify if all of
the selected parts without a detail style are to be linked with the default style
first. If you confirm this question, these parts will be highlighted in the Detail
Center as well since the linking is permanent. If you answer no to the question,
only those parts are detailed, which already have a detail style.
The parts will then be directly detailed or the preview is displayed.
If additionally valid and saved 2D-workshop drawings are open, the parts can
even be inserted into the drawings directly after detailing.
In the context menu, a list of the valid drawings will be displayed in a
subordinate tab of the corresponding detailing selection (respectively the entry
Detail Library for 'Not Insert'). If such a drawing is selected, you will directly
reach the insertion mode fort he selected drawing after detailing has been
finished. The parts can be placed there.
Page C.1 - 70
DetailCenter
Status Indicator
Valid Details
Blue A detail block of this part has already been created. However,
it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing.
Green A detail block of this part has already been created and
inserted into a 2D drawing.
Modified Details
Yellow A detail block of this part has already been created. However,
it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing.
Red A detail block of this part has already been created and
inserted into a 2D drawing.
Page C.1 - 71
DetailCenter
Update Drawings
Any parts highlighted in red can be updated automatically. Select a specific
component or a parent and only the parts contained in these are updated. If you
select the "Model" entry, all parts are updated.
Selecting the context menu after having selected the part, use the entry Update
only modified 2D-drawing to activate the modification mechanism. However, if
you want to force also an update of non-modified (green) parts to replace e.g.
the detailing by another detail style you have to select the entry Update 2D-
drawing in the context menu.
One by one, all of the affected drawings are opened in the background, the
parts are newly detailed and inserted directly into the original drawing position,
replacing the old ones. Should you have one of these drawings open at the time,
you can watch this replacement happen “live” right in front of you.
Subsequent Modifications
This procedure might take some time to complete; then all plans are once again
current and the latest detail blocks are ready for insertion. Use the ‘Display only
Latest Blocks’ option for the insertion to place the details.
You should remember, however, that the modification mechanism functions
optimally only if the tips and notes from the previous chapters are observed. You
should, therefore, work through those chapters very diligently.
Page C.1 - 72
DetailCenter
Since in future versions keeping of modifications will become more and more
efficient, this protection against update is only a temporary help, which will
become superfluous again later. The adoption of modifications combined with
the efficiency of the automatic mechanisms of ProSteel 3D requires an
enormous amount of time and energy in program development. This is the
reason why modification management will only become perfect according to our
requirements step by step.
Select the entry Protection against Update in the component parts list of the
Detail Center to protect the dimension or the position flags; weld marks, etc.
against update or to release them again. Then, the following dialog opens which
is described below.
Page C.1 - 73
DetailCenter
Group Selection-Filter
Selection-Filter Here, you can enter the filter for automatic object selection.
Only those objects will be taken into consideration, which
meet the filter condition.
Select Objects – You specify manually by your selection,
which objects have to be protected or released. No filter will
be applied in this case.
All Objects – All objects in the drawing are automatically
selected without applying a filter. Processing of course only
refers to dimensions, position flags, weld marks and height
indicators.
Dimension – Only dimensioning objects are automatically
selected in the drawing.
Each Flag – All position flags, weld marks and height
indicators are automatically selected in the drawing.
Only Position Flags – All position flags are selected in the
drawing.
Only Weld Marks – All weld marks are selected in the drawing.
Only Height Indicators – All height indicators are selected in
the drawing.
Click on this button to activate the protection against update
for the selected objects unless it already exists. If you have
checked the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the
desired objects have to be selected first.
Click on this button to remove the protection against update
for the selected objects if they have one. If you have checked
the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the desired
objects have to be selected first.
Of course, this function has to be applied in the 2D-workshop drawings and not
in the 3D-model. Please also remember that you cannot compare the protection
against update with a blocked layer. If the dimension to be protected was only
on a blocked layer, it would be kept there, but the newly created (synonymous)
dimension would not be deleted.
Page C.1 - 74
DetailCenter
Reset Modifications
Before the first detailing takes place, the drawing should be initialized, i.e. it
should be set to „zero“. This will ensure that the modification mechanism
functions optimally.
As the component parts in the model remember their modification even during
modelling, it may be that the corresponding markings have already been set.
This could cause some irritations.
Select the entry Reset Modification Code via the context menu of component
parts view to reset any existing information about model modification. The
entries, which details are situated on which drawings, are kept as well as the
already detailed detail blocks.
Please select the entry Initialize All Anew from the context menu to reset the
model completely. Initialize Component Part selectively resets the currently
selected component part.
Please note, however, that now any information will be deleted (unless the
assigned detail styles)! It will then no longer be possible to ask the model where
the different component parts were inserted or to insert component parts already
detailed but not yet inserted.
This complete initialization is reasonable if you made some detailing beforehand
„as a test“ or for a meeting and you now want to create the final workshop plans.
Page C.1 - 75
DetailCenter
Drawing List
At any time, ProSteel 3D can create a drawing list giving you a survey on the
inserted details and their status of modification. This drawing list is based on the
current entries in the drawing database and on the status of the so-called
“modification flags” of the component parts.
Therefore, it is recommended to verify the drawing first. The program
automatically offers this drawing verification after the function has been
selected. It is of course also possible that hints which were recognized as invalid
shall nevertheless remain valid because the drawings have only been moved
temporarily.
Creation of File
Select the context menu of the component parts list and click on the entry
Output of Drawing List. A text file (Modelname_DrawingList.txt), will be
created in the subdirectory.. \detail of your ProSteel 3D-installation
containing first a survey on all 2D-drawings and the number of inserted details.
If one of these details has been checked as modified in the Detail Center, this
drawing is reported as being modified. Therefore, this statement doesn’t mean
that the drawing has actually already been modified. It means that it still has to
be modified. In addition, you will find a detailed list per drawing, which details
(position numbers) are contained and which of them has already been modified
in the model.
On the following page, you will find an example of a drawing list. Since an
external program via code words might evaluate the content of this list, the
output of these key words is always in English.
As you can see in the example, there are 6 single parts (2 of them modified) and
2 groups in the drawing with drawing number ABC_PL03. Therefore, the
drawing is checked as being modified.
Page C.1 - 76
DetailCenter
[h:\testmodel_views.dwg]
DrawingNumber=ABC_AN01
Changed=no
Parts=
ChangedParts=
Groups=
ChangedGroups=
Views=Hall_SEI_R,Hall_X_1
ChangedViews=
[h:\testmodel_bg.dwg]
DrawingNumber=ABC_BG02
Changed=yes
Parts=
ChangedParts=
Groups=3,7,10,31,49
ChangedGroups=3,7,31
Views=
ChangedViews=
[h:\testmodel_plates.dwg]
DrawingNumber=ABC_PL03
Changed=yes
Parts=35,38,40,43,45,46
ChangedParts=40,46
Groups=50,55
ChangedGroups=
Views=
ChangedViews=
Page C.1 - 77
DetailCenter
This function allows new detailing of detail blocks directly in the workshop
drawing by simple selection. This permits you for example to assign a better
detail style to some “unfavourable” details still during insertion.
Settings
Display Field Here, you see the currently selected detail style used for
replacing.
List The available detail styles for new detailing.
When you have activated the option ‘List of detail styles
dependent on Part’ in the global pre-settings of the
DetailCenter, only the styles are displayed here which have
been classified for the corresponding type.
Click on this button to process the currently selected detail
style. The detail block is replaced with the modifications.
Please note however, that this function actually changes the
detail style of the model.
Page C.1 - 78
DetailCenter
Click on this button to detail the detail anew with the currently
selected detail style; then it is replaced in the drawing.
Replace a Detail
To replace a detail block you have to open the workshop drawing with the
inserted detail blocks as well as the corresponding model drawing.
Now select the entry Replace 2D-Detail Block in the context menu of the
component part list. Then pick any element of the detail block you want to
replace and the dialog opens.
Now you can modify the current detail style or select another style from the list.
Afterwards, you press the UPDATE button, and the detail block will be
automatically replaced.
Further detail blocks to be replaced can be selected directly from the dialog.
Since the last selected block remains connected, you can assign another style
to it if the result didn’t meet your requirements.
When modifying detail style parameters please don’t forget that you change the
detail style from the model. Replacing takes place as follows: The selected block
is detailed anew (this is why the model drawing has to be opened) and then it
replaces the former block in the drawing.
If you assign a new style as well, this modification will be transferred into the
model and the component part will be permanently linked again with the desired
style. Therefore, don’t forget to save the model drawing afterwards.
Page C.1 - 79
DetailCenter
Page C.1 - 80
Detailing Style
The detailing style offers you some decisive influence over the style of the
detailing because it is here that you determine what is to be dimensioned, how
to dimension it, what texts to include, whether to attach position flags, and much
more.
A great number of parameters are available to specify the appearance of your
drawing. You can save and load these styles individually and even import or
export them from third parties. Since it is possible to manage entire parameter
records you can create specific styles for specific detailing tasks (e.g. for
overviews, workshop plans, life-sized displays, etc.) and just select them later.
Your main task consists of defining the suitable styles once. The program offers
the option to immediately check each change using a preview feature (see
Detail Center/Preview) – until details look exactly like you want them to be for
your orders.
This chapter will discuss the setting options first with an example of a detailed
component at the end of the chapter. The chapters describing the detailing
process also describe how to work with styles.
Saving Styles
Normally, the detailing styles are saved together with the drawing. This means
that you always have to save your model if the modifications of detailing styles
are to be kept permanently.
In addition, there is the possibility to write a detailing style as file on the hard
drive and to re-import it. It is also possible to replace only partial sections of a
style.
This permits you to exchange, update or transfer the detailing styles of different
models. Furthermore, you can create a collection of detailing styles and use in
the model only a selection of those styles, which are required for that moment.
As the volume of a detail style considerably increased compared with earlier
versions, from version 17.2 on the file will only be saved as binary file with the
file ending *.stx due to long loading times. All commands for loading a detail
style wait for the style files in this format.
Page C.2 - 1
Detailing Style
When you select the detailing style, a dialog with a tree structure appears on the
left where the different dialog pages are sorted hierarchically in groups
according to different areas.
When you click on an entry in the tree, the assigned dialog page opens on the
right and you can modify the values. If you move to another entry, your previous
entries are saved and the new page will be displayed.
To allow a clear view, some of the tabs have subordinate tabs themselves which
are accessibly via a button and which are used for special settings. These are
usually infrequently used settings and cannot be reached directly via the tree
structure.
The commands of the dialog frame are the ones all dialog tabs have in common.
Only the new specific commands will be described here. The other commands
are found in the general description of ProSteel 3D-dialogs.
Page C.2 - 2
Detailing Style
If you want to combine e.g. the default settings for dimensioning and the default
settings for labelling of two existing styles to a new style, you can do this by
partial loading of pages.
Select the desired page in the selection tree and then call the context menu by
pressing the right mouse button. Now you have the possibility to replace the
parameters of the currently selected page by the equivalent parameters of an
existing style file.
Alternatively, you can however also load all the pages subordinate to this page
to replace a much bigger set of parameters.
Dialog-Commands
SAVE
When you click on this button, the complete detailing style is saved in a
file on the hard drive. This file has the name of the style and the file
ending *.stx.
It is possible to load this file later into this or into another model or to transfer it
to thirds.
SAVE AS
Click on this button to save the detailing style under another name on the
hard drive. Your detailing style copy automatically gets the name of the
style pre-set here as file name. It is possible to load this file later into this
or into another model or to transfer it to thirds.
UPDATE PREVIEW
When you click on this button, preview detailing of a detail is calculated
anew and updated if the window is open.
Within the Detail Center you can look in a preview on the effects of a
detailing style for detailing of a detail. Normally, this preview is automatically
updated at each modification of the detailing style.
However, if you have e.g. a very complex overview which requires a lot of time
or if you want to modify a lot of parameters, you can switch off the automatic
update and release it manually.
Page C.2 - 3
Detailing Style
This is the tab for global default settings ranking higher than all other tabs. If, for
instance, dimensioning is deactivated, no dimensioning will be carried out -
independent of what has been indicated in the individual dimensioning tabs.
Common Tab
Group Display
Projection Method Here, you specify the system according to which the different
part views (front view, plan view, top view, etc.) are aligned
towards each other.
Method 1 (E) – The distribution of the views is effected
according to DIN.
Method 3 (A) – The distribution of the views is effected
according to American standard.
Alignment Here, you specify the alignment of the details at detailing. At
groups, the main part specifies the alignment of the whole
group.
Horizontal – The parts are aligned horizontally when detailed.
Vertical – The parts are aligned vertically when detailed.
Like Model – AutoCAD aligns the parts during detailing
according to their WCS position, which means that a slanted
support remains slanted.
Page C.2 - 4
Detailing Style
Front View Here, you indicate how the front view of a component part has
to be specified. The other views then derivate from this front
view.
From Component – The element coordinate system of the
component part is used for the determination of the front view.
From Global Views – The global views are used for the
determination of the front view.
Outside Model – The view from the outside into the model is
used for the determination of the front view.
Individually per Part – The individually fixed front view of a part
is used for the determination of the part’s front view. If it has
not been defined, the element coordinate system will be used
instead.
Like Group Single parts views are displayed according to the views of the
corresponding groups, if existing. The left view of a stiffener is
e.g. the view onto a plate (normally this would be the plan
view), because the left view of the group would show the
stiffener in this way.
> Only first View Only the first view of the part is displayed corresponding to the
group; all other views are tilted according to standard related
to this modified view.
True 2D Lines The details are transformed into pure AutoCAD line diagrams.
Intelligent properties of the 2D-details of course won’t be
available any more.
ACIS if Plates Poly-plates are always temporarily transformed into ACIS
elements for detailing to allow for better dimensioning of radii.
The plate properties in the model are not affected by this.
Don’t scale parts The parts keep their original size and only the text is scaled for
output on a printer /plotter.
Scale Here, you set the scale of your details. Depending on the
selection under ‘Don’t Scale Parts’ either the part or the text
size is scaled.
Please remember the hints under 'Detail Center/Generalities
Concerning Scale and Dimensioning Styles'.
Page C.2 - 5
Detailing Style
Group Add
Dimensioning Dimensioning texts and lines are scaled according to the
settings entered in the tab.
Position Flags Position flags are attached according to the settings entered in
the POSITION FLAGS tab.
Weld Flags Welding symbols are attached according to the settings
entered in the WELDING SYMBOLS tab.
Labels Additional label texts are attached according to the settings
entered in the ADDITIONAL TEXTS tab.
Page C.2 - 6
Detailing Style
Cut A cut is made in this view frame for any model views you like.
Position, cut depth and displayed parts are determined by
means of this frame.
Default You can choose the views to be generated from the six
existing basic views. In addition, you can add one or more
global isometric views and the unwinding (only in case of
edged plates).
Here, you also pre-set the desired views for the overviews of
detailed points; for standard overviews, however these
settings haven’t any meaning,
> Selection Here, you pre-select which views have to be created during
the detailing process. In the Detail Center, you also have the
possibility to delete views or to add further views.
Group Miscellaneous
Distance Views Here, you specify the distance of the basic views incl.
dimensions and text towards each other if several views are to
be generated within one detail block.
Distance Isometries Here, you specify the distance of the isometric views towards
the basic views and towards each other.
Distance Unwinding Here, you specify the distance of the unwinding of an edged
plate towards the basic views.
Page C.2 - 7
Detailing Style
Detail Style Isometry If need be, you specify another detailing style here with which
an isometric view has to be depicted. If you indicate ‘This
Style’, no separate detailing style will be used.
Isometry Position Here, you specify the position where the isometric views have
to be depicted with reference to the basic views. They can be
positioned above, below, on the left or on the right side of the
basic views.
Detail Style Unwinding If need be, you specify another detailing style here with
which an unwinding has to be depicted. If you indicate ‘This
Style’, no separate detailing style will be used.
Unwinding Position Here, you specify the position where the unwinding has to be
depicted with reference to the basic views. They can be
positioned above, below, on the left or on the right side of the
basic views.
Insertion Position Here, you specify the grip point for the later insertion of detail
blocks. Select where to position the detail block from the 9
striking insertion points below-left up to above-right (also for
2D-Update).
Page C.2 - 8
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 9
Detailing Style
Group Views
All Views The detailing style is visible everywhere where it is a matter of
views on the model. Otherwise, it will not be displayed. If this
option is deactivated, the visibility can be limited even further
to certain types.
> Plan Views The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of the plan
views from the working areas or of the global plan view
respectively of the global ground-plan.
> Views The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of the
model views from the working areas.
> Anchor Plans The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of the
anchor plan of the model.
> Others The detailing style is only visible when the view is a model
view which is not seized by the above filters
Page C.2 - 10
Detailing Style
> Connecting Gusset The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of the
gusset details from the model.
> Manual Details The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of manual
details from the model.
Of course, these details cannot appear in the component parts
list of the DetailCenter. However, you can decide whick
detailing styles shall have to be displayed for selection in the
function for the manual details.
Others
Style selectable The detailing style is not submitted to a certain filtering and is
visible everywhere.
Page C.2 - 11
Detailing Style
C.2.4 2D-Display
These dialog tabs offer the opportunity to specify the display type of the
component parts (centerlines, drill holes, hidden edges, etc.), which line types
have to be used and which special default settings have to be valid for the
different detailing types.
Common Tab
Group Add
Visible Edges All visible lines are displayed. This field should always be
checked.
Invisible Edges The invisible lines are displayed according to their line type.
2D-Bolts The put in bolts are depicted by a bolt symbol.
> Real Bolts The bolts are depicted as real view with nut and bolt head.
2D-Weldmint The welding joints imported to the model are depicted as weld
symbol.
2D-Elevation symbols The height indicators imported to the model are depicted.
Page C.2 - 12
Detailing Style
Special Parts Special parts inserted into the model are depicted. These may
be any parts (such as e.g. blocks) containing ProSteel 3D
component part caracteristics.
Real Cross-Sections The shape cross-sections are depicted with their exact radii –
otherwise, the simplified depiction in the form of straight lines
is selected.
> At Dimensioning At dimensioning, all edges and radii of cross-section display
are used. Otherwise, only the outside dimensions are
depicted.
Bearing Bar Direction A symbol for the bearing bar direction is attached (which
corresponds to the lengthwise direction of the grid) if it is a
matter of plates having a grid.
> Symbol Size Here, you enter the size of the symbol, which is used for the
direction of the plate grid.
Page C.2 - 13
Detailing Style
Shortening Symbol Here, you select the symbol, which has to be inserted into the
shape at shortening position.
Single Line – The symbol is a simple straight line.
ZigZag Single – The symbol is a serrated, wave-like line.
Double Line – The symbol is a double straight line with the
gap set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field.
ZigZag Double - The symbol is a serrated, wave-like double
line with the gap set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field.
Only Gap – There is no symbol depicted, but only a gap with
the distance set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field.
Break Symbol Here, you select the symbol, which has to be inserted at the
break edge of the cut-off shape end. Please also refer to
‘Shortening Symbol’.
Group Others
Hatching Size Here, you specify the hatching scale. This is the line distance
for line hatching.
Hatching Angle Here, you enter the angle of hatching.
Hatching Pattern Here, you enter an AutoCAD hatching pattern to be used for
cross-section hatching.
Page C.2 - 14
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 15
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 16
Detailing Style
Group Others
Display Origin The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the
single part is displayed as reference point or at American
dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running
dimensions”.
> Symbol Size Here, you enter the size of the symbol.
Page C.2 - 17
Detailing Style
Group Cuts
Display Sections 2D-cuts (manual or automatic at e.g. stiffeners) inserted into
the main part are added as additional view to the group.
Here you have to differentiate between 2D-cuts in the model
and 2D-cuts in the details: 2D-cuts inserted in the model only
define whether and how a detail has to be cut at detailing
process.
Only manual Only manually added cuts are displayed. Cuts automatically
determined by the program are not depicted.
Show Identical 1x Cuts having an identical display are only depicted once.
Arrange Below The cuts are not depicted on the left and/or on the right of the
main view (mostly the front view), but beneath the last views,
one beside the other.
Symbol Outside Cut arrows are displayed outside of the last dimensioning
chains. Otherwise, they are fixed directly at the part even in
front of the dimensioning chains.
Symbol Template Here, you can select a template describing the display of cut
labeling. These templates can be defined within the command
“Insert 2D cut”.
Page C.2 - 18
Detailing Style
Labeling Here, you indicate the cut designation (without the code letter
for cut) that has to be used for labeling the cut views
Cut Code Here, you enter the code letter (or number) that has to be
used to describe the first cut of a group. All other cuts of this
group will be counted accordingly in increasing order.
Page C.2 - 19
Detailing Style
Group Others
Display Origin The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the
group is displayed as reference point or at American
dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running
dimensions (RD)”.
> Symbol Size Here, you can enter the size of the reference point. The RD
symbol characteristics at American dimensioning option are
specified in dimensioning parameters.
Show Northern Direction A mark is displayed at the group showing the alignment
with regard to a global northern direction.
In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to
be activated.
With Part Number The US-part number or position number as well as the
quantity of pieces is shown together with the longitudinal
dimension chain.
However, the US-part number has to exist already, i.e. the
option is not activated unless an update has been made.
In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to
be activated.
Indicate Mounting Position In the case of stiffeners and web angles, it is specified
whether these are situated on the front or back side of the web
or on both sides of the web (in case of identical parts).
To recognize identical parts, the parts have already to be
equipped with a position number. Only a simple comparison is
made here by means of position number and position of the
part’s center.
Page C.2 - 20
Detailing Style
Group Part-Filter
Shapes Shapes are displayed in the view unless it is a matter of the
types that are set separately in the filter. Normally, this option
should be activated.
Distinguishing between the different component parts is of
course possible only if these have been generated with the
associated functions as well. Otherwise, a web angle created
as manually drilled angle steel would be interpreted as a
normal shape.
Poly-Plates Poly-plates are displayed in the view unless it is a matter of
stiffeners or bracing plates.
Stiffeners Stiffeners are displayed in the view.
Bracing Plates Bracing plates (gusset plates) are displayed in the view.
Web Angle Web angles are displayed in the view.
End Plates End plates are displayed in the view.
Base Plates Base Plates are displayed in the view.
Special Parts Special parts are displayed in the view (e.g. ACIS-3D solids).
Concrete Parts Component parts having been created with the application
‘ProConcrete 3D’are displayed in the view.
Page C.2 - 21
Detailing Style
Only Within Only those parts are taken into consideration which are
situated completely or at least up to their half within the work
frame.
Thus you can make a special selection out of the area –
otherwise, all parts are shown which are situated on the level
of the work frame (i.e. in the way you would see them in
reality.
Base Plate at Sketch Head and base plates are displayed if the option ‘Sketch’ or
‘System Lines’ has been selected under display variant.
Otherwise, they are always displayed.
Use XRef The parts added to the model via XREF’s are displayed and
dimensioned as well. The above mentioned display filters are
also valid for these component parts. Please refer to your
AutoCAD documentation where you will find a description how
to work with XREF’s.
Min. Part Size Here, you can exclude small parts from selection by specifying
the distance of the most distant and farthest removed,
opposing corners. If the corner distance is smaller than the
indicated value, the part will not be recorded. This setting is
unimportant if the value 0 has been entered here. None of the
parts are then filtered with this function.
Page C.2 - 22
Detailing Style
Max. Distance Enter the maximum distance another work frame is allowed to
be removed from the current view to be interpreted there as
construction axis for axis display and dimensioning.
Page C.2 - 23
Detailing Style
Displacement Enter a displacement the plane used for the view has to have
from the actual work frame (in view direction).
If the view plane doesn’t have to be exactly in the work frame
plane, this will save you an additional view.
Dialog-Commands
FILTER
By clicking on this button, you can define a filter of your own from other parts
properties apart from the previously defined filters of the group Part Filter. Then,
a dialog opens for entering the filter condition.
Description File The shape description can be used as filter criterion. The
terms available for selection are displayed in the list.
Part Family The part family can be used as filter criterion. The part families
available for selection are displayed in the list.
Include The part is displayed if it corresponds to another type in the
second list (logical OR).
Exclude The part is not displayed if it corresponds to another type in
the second list (neg. OR).
Page C.2 - 24
Detailing Style
When you click on this button, the selected entry of the first list
will be adopted in the second list.
When you click on this button, the selected entry in the second
list will be removed again from this list.
Page C.2 - 25
Detailing Style
If a depth has been indicated for the work area, it is a matter of detail point
overview allowing you to display several views on this area simultaneously (front
view, plan view, etc.). Detailing is effected like that of a standard overview, i.e.
all parts are exported as AutoCAD lines and dimensioned according to the
settings for overviews.
If a cranked cut has been inserted, you can display a cut though the model
which is situated in different levels. You can hide undesired sections or refrain
from an additional view. Depending on the position of the cutting line, the parts
are cut or displayed as view.
Page C.2 - 26
Detailing Style
The detail point overview shows the construction 5 in the selected views (here
front view and view from the right), the cutting depth results from the
corresponding 3rd dimension of the cube.
The result of detailing process is displayed in the following figure. The display of
dimensions, position flags, etc. depends on the selected detailing style:
Page C.2 - 27
Detailing Style
For more detailed information about the creation of gusset details, please refer
to chapter ‚DetailCenter/Gusset Details’ of this manual.
Page C.2 - 28
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 29
Detailing Style
Dialog-Commands
CHOOSE COLOUR
When you click on this button, the AutoCAD standard dialog for colour
selection opens where you can choose the colour number graphically.
Page C.2 - 30
Detailing Style
Group Generalities:
With Center Lines The center lines are displayed for the parts selected on this
dialog tab.
Offset Here, you set the extension value by which the center line is
extended beyond both shape ends.
Group Others
Shape List By checking in the list you choose for which one of the
different types of standard shapes the centerlines have to be
displayed.
Page C.2 - 31
Detailing Style
C.2.5 Dimensioning
Here, you can indicate all of the settings for the dimensioning of the
components. Since this is a rather complex area, the settings are distributed
among several subordinate dialogs within this main group.
In addition, you will find completing dialog boxes which can be opened from the
different pages.
New Conception
It is for the first time that a new conception for automatic dimensioning was
introduced with version 17.1. The distribution of ProSteel 3D all over the world
led to considerably increasing demands on a flexibly adaptable dimensioning.
The idea of previous versions was to cover a wide range of variants with a few
fixed default settings by intelligent automatic mechanisms. An increasing
number of “exception-buttons”, however, meant increasing confusion. This is the
reason why the new conception now permits precise default settings for the
different sections so that you can better adapt your detailing style to the
construction and to desired drawing standards.
At first glance, the great number of parameters will perhaps frighten you.
However, when you take a closer look, you will fast find out that the default
settings for dimensioning follow a standardized logic and that therefore things
are logically repeated.
Page C.2 - 32
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 33
Detailing Style
Dimensioning Structure
ProSteel 3D dimensioning is divided into three main groups for single parts,
component part groups and model-views, which can be set independently of
each other. Within each main group, there are still other subordinate groups the
parameters of which are also independent of each other – except for
dimensioning of the main parts of component part groups which is controlled via
single parts setting.
Page C.2 - 34
Detailing Style
Here, you see the inner structure of a subordinate group as it exists for
dimensioning of add-on pieces in component part groups.This is the structure
with the most variants as the dimensioning of a component part group has to
take into consideration a lot of different conditions.
In the following, we will therefore describe the essential matters with the help of
the settings for dimensioning of a component part group.
As you can see it is possible to preset a different dimensioning point for shapes
in bent component part groups (radial) compared with the standard component
part groups (linear). For stiffeners things may again be different.
Page C.2 - 35
Detailing Style
Dimensioning Areas
ProSteel differentiates different dimensioning areas which you can imagine as
independent local areas.
The respective alignment is determined by the involved component parts and
influences the indications of place and direction in the dialogs. As an option,
there is also a forced horizontal or vertical alignment independent of the position
for each part dimensioning in a dimensioning area.
Within a view – that means e.g. the front view – these areas can exist several
times except for the global area.
Page C.2 - 36
Detailing Style
If the main part of a component part group or the local reference parts are bent
shapes, the dimensioning direction or the surrounding rectangular will follow this
bend.
Page C.2 - 37
Detailing Style
Assignment
When you cut however for example two shapes by means of a cutting line so
that they match with each other, no logical link will be created there. In this case,
you can force a relation of the component parts by the manual link
(PS_MANUAL_LINK).
The manual link should also be used when the automatically created link of a
connection can - for whatever reasons - not be evaluated for determining the
relations.
When the assignment cannot be determined and you selected a local reference
of the component part, the component parts in question will be assigned to the
global area.
Page C.2 - 38
Detailing Style
Different local dimensioning areas can be determined for overviews, too. They
are however not realized via component part relations but via a geometrical
analysis of shape dimensions.
The shapes are classified according to length and position and then possible
segments are built after an evaluation. Finally, these segments are brought
together to local areas within certain tolerance ranges.
You can preset the parameters for area analysis in detail; we have, however, to
admit that this requires a high degree of experience.
Page C.2 - 39
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 40
Detailing Style
at 2/3 of the long side. If there is, however, a further subdivision of the area in
segments, direction change will not be effected any more.
Page C.2 - 41
Detailing Style
The example on the previous page shows a component part group with the main
part (1) and several add-on shapes (2) and (3), which for their part are
containing stiffeners (4).
A local dimensioning reference with ‘Component Part Start’ as refererence point
was selected for dimensioning the stiffeners.
As you can see, dimensioning is done along the component parts containing the
stiffeners and each dimensioning chain starts near the reference part. In this
example, the component part (2) is situated above the main part (1) and the
component part (3) is situated below component part (2).
You can either by force preset the position of the dimensioning chains within an
area or you make select them automatically.
Component parts can be dimensioned on the side on which – with regard to
their reference part – they are situated. In addition, a favourable side is defined,
depending on the position, as it is displayed in the following figure:
Page C.2 - 42
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 43
Detailing Style
Please don’t forget that the differentiation is made via the coordinate system of
the component parts. If it differs – for whatever a reason – from standard, you
will get different results with regard to quality.
Page C.2 - 44
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 45
Detailing Style
In most of the cases, the starting point of a dimensioning chain is the beginning
of the component part; at groups, this often is the beginning of the main part
(resp. of the local reference part in case of local references).
The example on the following page shows some important reference points of
dimensioning chains. Web angle dimensioning could be made on the starting
point of the group (1) or on the starting point of the main part (2).
Dimensioning on the edge of the reference part would dimension the two web
angles on the left on point (2) and the web angles on the right on point (3) – in
case of edge group, this would be the points (1) and (4).
Page C.2 - 46
Detailing Style
In the present example, however, the variant connecting shape was selected
and thus you obtain the two dimensioning chains (A) as result. Dimensioning
chain (B) results from the fact that, in addition, the reference points are
dimensioned, too.
Here, too the center of the reference part in question is the dividing line for the
options ‘inner edge’ and ‘outer edge’.
Page C.2 - 47
Detailing Style
Additional Dimensions
You can add different additional dimensions to each dimensioning chain. These
are added later to obtain „closed“ dimensioning chains.
The additional dimensions permit uniform dimensioning running; on the other
hand the dimensioning reference can be made clearer, you can eliminate
insignificant remaining dimensions and thus reduce the number, when you don’t
use them.
Page C.2 - 48
Detailing Style
American Dimensioning
When you selected American Style as general default setting for dimensioning,
you obtain additional labels and dimensions as they are common in the USA.
At the moment, only a limited configuration of these additions is possible. They
depend on the importance of the component parts in the model. Together with
the generally available settings, you have thus the possibility to create drawings
according to these standards, too.
Rebound (5)
The distance between the main part and the overall measure of the component
part group is indicated as individual dimension.
Page C.2 - 49
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 50
Detailing Style
The dialog tab consists of two essential areas: On the left, you select the
desired dimensioning chains the settings of which you want to modify. On the
right, you can make separate settings for horizontal and vertical dimensioning
direction.
Each possible combination can be set independently of the other so that the
content on the right changes depending on selection. However, not all
combinations are available in all dialog tabs. .
Page C.2 - 51
Detailing Style
Selection Range
Area Selection
Global In principle, the component parts are dimensioned in the
global area, i.e. outside of the component part group and with
the alignment of the main part.
Local In principle, the component parts are dimensioned in the local
area, i.e. with the alignment of the corresponding reference
part.
Global+Local If the component part in question is directly connected to the
main part of the group, it will be dimensioned in global area.
On the other hand, if it is connected to another subpart, it will
be dimensioned in the local area of this part.
Global+Ignore The component part in question is dimensioned in global area,
if it is directly connected to the main part of the group.
Otherwise, it will not be dimensioned.
Alignment
According to Ref. The component part is dimensioned according to the
reference direction of the area selection.
Horizontal The component part is always dimensioned in horizontal
and/or in vertical direction, independent of its reference part.
However, this option is not available for all cases.
Page C.2 - 52
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 53
Detailing Style
Adjustment Range
The offered possibilities of the different selection lists depend very much on the
dialog subgroup and on the selected dimensioning chain.
Settings
Reference Part (I) Target point of dimensioning; in most cases, this is a special
point, but it can also be a “rule” such as e.g. drill holes.
Reference Part (II) If need be, you can give further information about the selected
part reference.
Reference Connection Reference point of dimensioning; dimensioning chains start
here.
Additional Dimensions These dimension points are added to the dimensioning
chain later and/or occasionally completed as separate
dimensioning chain.
Pos. Dim. Chain (I) Position of the dimensioning chain with regard to the
component part or to the reference part.
Pos. Dim. Chain (II) Here you can limit the display of the dimensioning chains to
certain main views of the component part (front view, plan
view, etc.) or to a certain position.
Coordinate Meas. Execution of coordinate measures resp. certain dimensioning
chains are excluded from coordinate dimensioning.
Page C.2 - 54
Detailing Style
On the following two pages, you will find a table with the most frequent options
which are available in the selection lists. In addition, there is a short explanation
of the meaning.
The selected example refers to inputs for subpart dimensioning of shapes, you
can, however, transfer the information to the other component parts or
detailings. For an explanation of other special options, please refer to the
description of the corresponding dialog tabs.
Page C.2 - 55
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 56
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 57
Detailing Style
When you want to use the same default settings as selection for primary and
secondary view, you can select in the secondary settings the option ‘like
primary’ as component part reference. Any modifications in the primary settings
then will be valid for the secondary view, too.
Since you can define up to 6 different dimensioning variants for a single list
entry, some auxiliary functions are available which can facilitate the setting task.
You have access to these functions by calling the context menu of the right
mouse key in the selection list of the selection range.
Deactivate Selection
The component part reference of the currently selected entry is set to ‘No
dimensioning’ for longitudinal and transversal direction. However, this is only
valid for the currently selected dimensioning area and for the currently selected
view.
Page C.2 - 58
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 59
Detailing Style
Kind of Dimensioning Here, you select the kind of distance measuring between
the different dimensioning points.
Relative – customary relative dimension chains are attached.
Coordinates – dimensioning chains are attached with
continuous dimensioning to a fixed reference point.
Mixed – relative dimension chains and – at the same time
here included – the corresponding coordinate dimensions are
attached.
However, you have the option to exclude certain freely
selectable dimensioning chains from coordinate dimensioning.
Coordinates Here, you select the kind of coordinates.
Rotated Dimensioning Chain – The coordinates are attached
beside the second construction line as a measure which is
rotated by 90°. Some parameters of dimensioning style are
modified at this occation.
Like Dimensioning Style – The coordinates are attached in the
indicated dimensioning style without any modifications.
AutoCAD-Coordinates – The coordinates are attached in the
indicated dimensioning style without any modifications as real
AutoCAD coordinates.
Associative Dim. The dimensioning is created as really associative
dimensioning without text overwriting as far as possible. In
case of manual manipulations dimensioning is automatically
adapted to the measured values.
With Optimization The program will position the dimensioning texts in a better
way according to the settings on the page ‘Optimization’.
Optimization can be switched off later if you want to displace
the dimensions manually according to another method or if
you do not expect overlaps. You will then obtain the
dimensions on the position where AutoCAD would place them
automatically.
Divide Hole Rows At hole dimensioning each individual hole diameter gets its
own dimension chain. The dimensioned hole diameter then is
indicated on the dimension line.
Weld Cracks Extra Small welding cracks will be assigned their own dimensioning
line. This is a minor option if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been
selected because here a distinction is made between
diameters anyway.
Diameter on Line At hole dimensioning the hole diameter is indicated on the
dimension construction line if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been
selected.
Label Dim. Lines The things located by dimension chain (stiffeners, holes, etc.)
are written as text to the dimension line.
Page C.2 - 60
Detailing Style
Fixed Const. Line Length The construction lines have exactly the length specified
in the input field 'Distance Construction Line'. If this field has
not been checked, the dimension chains are cut at each other
with the distance specified in the input field 'Length
Construction Line'.
Group Distances
1st. Dim. Chain Outside Here, you enter the distances from the outer limit of the
component up to the 1st dimension line for global
dimensioning. This is possible for main direction and
transversal direction of component part view separately.
1st. Dim. Chain Inside Here, you enter the distances from the outer limit of the
component up to the 1st dimension line for inner dimension
chains and for the individual dimensioning of subparts. This is
possible for main direction and transversal direction of the
area separately.
1st Dim. Chain Local Here, you enter the distances from the outer limit of the
reference part up to the 1st dimension line for local
dimensioning areas. This is possible for main direction and
transversal direction of the area separately
Between Dim. Chains Here, you enter the distance between the individual
dimension lines of an area.
Page C.2 - 61
Detailing Style
To Dim. Construction Line In the first input field, you enter the distance from the
start of construction lines up to the outer limit of the
component or of the dimensioning area.
Entering the value 0 will not cut the construction lines at the
edges but they are extended to the corresponding points to be
dimensioned.
In the second input field, you enter the distance of the
construction lines up to the previous dimension chain.
Entering the value 0 will not cut the construction lines at the
previous dimension chains but they are extended to the outer
limit of the component or of the dimensioning area.
Page C.2 - 62
Detailing Style
Style Variants
This subordinate dialog can also be accessed via the dimension settings for
single parts, groups or views. Here, you can assign a style variant to (almost)
any dimension chain, separately for standard relative dimensioning as well as
the coordinate dimensioning.
List In the list, you click on the desired dimension chain to which
you want to assign a style variant.
Variant 1/ 2: Here, you assign a style variant to the selected dimension
chain. If you click e.g. on ‘Variant 1’, the dimension chain
receives the style defined by you in the basic dialog for the
variant 1.
Standard The allocation of a style variant is cancelled and the
dimension chain is displayed with the basic dimensioning
style.
The allocation of style variants permits you to design a more clearly structured
dimensioning. Outer dimensions can be emphasized with larger texts or different
dimension ranges can be colored. You could also use dimension chains with
tolerance specifications for hole dimensions or, in case you anticipate many
“tight” dimensions, you could also work with smaller text. There are many ways
to use this option to your advantage.
If you want to vary only the text sizes, you can also use the setting “Auto”
bcause this will automatically adjust the necessary text sizes (factor 0.7 or 1.4).
If you would also like to change colors or select other text sizes, you have to
select a different AutoCAD dimensioning style.
Page C.2 - 63
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 64
Detailing Style
New Dimensions to Here, you enter the distance from one hole group resp. drill
hole dimensioning to the other at which a new (redundant)
dimensioning has to be carried out. This permits a clearer
dimensioning of far away positioned identical hole screen
dimensions as the dimension chains resp. the indications of
diameters are repeated.
Group Miscellaneous
Hole Group Reference Here, you select how to dimension drill holes in main parts
or in subparts (only length direction) if the option ‘hole group
reference’ has been selected there.
None – hole group reference is completely deactivated.
Connecting shape – The hole groups are refered to the
intersection point with the axis resp. reference line (depending
on the default setting) of the corresponding connecting shape.
First hole – The hole groups are refered to the first hole of the
hole group in dimension direction.
Last hole – The hole groups are refered to the last hole of the
hole group in dimension direction.
For more detailed information, please refer to the general
explanations with regard to hole group reference.
Page C.2 - 65
Detailing Style
Of Reference Point The reference points of the shapes are used for determining
the reference points of connected shapes. Otherwise, their
center axis is used.
Connecting Shapes The reference points of the connected shapes are
dimensioned in a separate dimensioning chain if in groups
subparts dimensioning is refered to it.
> Coordinate Dim. Here, you select how to dimension the reference points of the
connected shapes with coordinate measures.
None – No coordinate measures are attached.
Origin Detail – Coordinate measures are attached and
measured from the origin of the group (main part).
Origin Model – Coordinate measures are attached and
measured from the origin of the model
Thus, it is possible to get e.g. at supports the absolute height
in the model as coordinate value.
Gusset-Plate Holes in gusset-plates are dimensioned with reference to the
system axes of the connected shapes. You can make
separate settings afterwards for gusset-plate dimensioning.
For more detailed information, please refer to the general
explanations with regard to gusset-plate dimensioning.
> Gradient The gradients of the shapes connected via gusset-plate are
displayed.
> System Axis The system axes of the shapes connected via gusset-plate
are displayed.
> Offset System The extension of the displayed system axis beyond the
system point.
> Offset Plate The extension of the displayed system axis beyond the edge
of the plate.
Search Area Here, you can specify the maximum distance up to which a
hole in the subpart or main part is assigned to the
corresponding reference point of the connected shape or hole
group.
Page C.2 - 66
Detailing Style
Hole group is in component parts, here mainly in component part groups, get
further reference dimensions in addition to the standard add-on dimensions of
subparts. In this example, a connecting butt strap is dimensioned with reference
to the holes.
Add-on Dimension in Component Part
Group (1)
The butt strap is dimensioned with
reference to the connecting shape, here
to its insertion reference point.
The drill holes are always dimensioned with relative measures at hole group
reference, selection of coordinate measures, however, influences the dimension
of hole group reference (2).
Gusset-Plate Dimensioning
The defaults are displayed as additional entry in the selection list for reference
points of group dimensioning and therefore can be attached in addition to
standard dimensioning of poly-plates.
Page C.2 - 67
Detailing Style
Group Generalities
Reference Point The dimensioning is related to the reference point of the
component part unless no other defaults were made at the
corresponding places. Otherwise, it is related to the outside
edges.
US-Cope At dimensioning according to American standard, copes at the
ends of the component part are indicated with length and
depth.
You can give additional information on a separate page of this
parameter group.
Angle as Gradient Linear measures of angle are indicated as triangle with length
and reference height instead of with usual angle measures.
> Reference Value The reference value for gradient calculation
Style Variants In the list, you can see to which dimension chains the style
‘Variant 1’ or ‘Variant 2’ has been assigned by means of the
variants. LIN-2 signifies e.g. that variant 2 has been selected
for normal dimensioning.
Page C.2 - 68
Detailing Style
Distances System The distances of the ends of the component parts are
dimensioned related to the system points of the construction
(these are the theoretical intersection points between the
center axes of connected shape and the corresponding
support shapes).
Radius Circle radii of component contours are dimensioned. If
defined, the subordinate radius style of the selected AutoCAD
dimensioning style is used.
Dialog-Commands
STYLE VARIANTS
Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants. You can then assign
a different style variant to the individual dimension chains.
You will find a description of this dialog and working with style variants under the
general dimensioning settings (see also: Dimensioning/Generalities).
Page C.2 - 69
Detailing Style
Settings
Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach single part
dimensions in the detail and determine the dimension points as well as the
position of dimension chains.
For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general
descriptions of defaults for dimensioning chains.
Apart from the usual dimensioning of outer contour and drill holes over length
and width of the component part, you can select different other forms of
dimensioning for single parts, too.
Page C.2 - 70
Detailing Style
Drill Holes
Common Normal dimensioning over the drill holes in dimensioning direction
Reference to Edge The holes are dimensioned to the next edge of the component part
Hole Groups Groups of identical holes are dimensioned once in transversal direction
Common + Edges Combination of standard dimensioning and reference to edge
Hole Groups + Edges Combination of hole group dimensioning and reference to edge
The following examples show you the results of the different extended forms of
dimensioning for single parts:
Min/Max (1)
At a hollow shape, the maximum
extension of the interior wall (A) is
dimensioned with the dimension chain
(C) and the minimum extension is
dimensioned with the dimension chains
B. Possible cut-outs haven’t any
influence.
Min/Max (2)
At a standard shape the longest
exterior area on the upper and lower
side is dimensioned with a single
measure at a time despite the cut-outs.
Page C.2 - 71
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 72
Detailing Style
Group Generalities
Equal Cope 1x Copes with the same dimensions are dimensioned only once.
Remarks Generally added annotation (if need be, it is replaced by
automatically created annotations).
Create Remarks An annotation is automatically added to the dimensioning to
indicate identical copes.
> Up/Below Annotation which is added above and below in case of
identical copes.
> Start/End Annotation which is added at the beginning and at the end in
case of identical copes.
> Type Annotation which is added for more than two identical copes.
Page C.2 - 73
Detailing Style
Dimensioning of cut-outs according to this scheme is often used in the USA and
replaces a detailed dimensioning of outer contour for standard-shapes with
copes at the end.
Page C.2 - 74
Detailing Style
Group Generalities
Flats as Plate Flats (e.g. fishplates) are included in the dimension chains of
the poly-plates and not dimensioned as shape.
Reference Point The dimensioning of subparts is related to the reference point
of the main part unless no other defaults were made at the
corresponding places. Otherwise, it is related to the outside
edges of the main part.
Folded Plate The additional tilt endplate details are dimensioned like a
single part as well.
Cuts The additional automatic 2D-cuts are dimensioned like a
group as well.
Short Shape up to Enter the maximum length up to which a shape is regarded as
short shape. Separate settings can be made afterwards for
these shapes.
Long Shape from Enter the minimum length from which on a shape is regarded
as long shape. Separate settings can be made afterwards for
these shapes.
Style Variants In the list, you can see to which dimension chains the style
‘Variant 1’ or ‘Variant 2’ has been assigned by means of the
variants.
LIN-2 signifies e.g. that variant 2 has been selected for normal
(linear) dimensioning.
Page C.2 - 75
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 76
Detailing Style
Dialog-Commands
STYLE VARIANTS
Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants. You can then assign
a different style variant to the individual dimension chains.
You will find a description of this dialog and working with style variants under the
general dimensioning settings (see also: Dimensioning/Generalities).
In the following examples, you see favourable selections for arranging main and
subpart dimensioning in a component part group:
The standard setting, i.e. to dimension everything outside the group, is the
optimal setting for this component part group. Main part dimensioning (1) is
made first, followed then by subpart dimensioning (2). The flange of the haunch
(3) however is dimensioned with local part reference.
Here, on the contrary, individual subpart dimensioning has been selected for the
subparts (2) and for the main part (1) the dimensioning direct to part has been
activated. Standard subpart dimensioning, however, has been deactivated.
Page C.2 - 77
Detailing Style
Settings
Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach add-on
dimensions in the main views of the detail (front viw, plan view, etc.) and
determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains.
For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general
description of defaults for dimensioning chains.
Page C.2 - 78
Detailing Style
Settings
Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach single part
dimensions in the tilt endplates of the detail and determine the dimension points
as well as the position of dimension chains.
For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general
description of defaults for dimensioning chains.
Settings
Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach add-on
dimensions in the cuts of the detail and determine the dimension points as well
as the position of dimension chains.
For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general
description of defaults for dimensioning chains.
Page C.2 - 79
Detailing Style
Settings
Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach individual
single parts dimensions in the main views of the detail. You also determine
which fundamental dimensions have to appear in which views.
The fundamental settings with regard to dimensioning (position etc.) are globally
valid for all individual dimensionings together; however, you can individually
exclude certain component parts and dimension chains here.
For some settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of
the default settings for dimension chains.
Page C.2 - 80
Detailing Style
Settings
Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach individual single
part dimensions in the main views of the detail and determine the dimension
points as well as the position of dimension chains.
For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general
description of defaults for dimensioning chains.
Page C.2 - 81
Detailing Style
Group Generalities
Connect Dimensions Similar inner dimension chains which are situated close
together are connected to one common dimension chain each.
At System Axis Only the distances of the axes of the outer shapes or of the
constructional axes are considered as overall dimensions.
Outer Edge Steel The meaning of the option ‘At System Axis’ also refers to the
reference point ‘View’ of dimensioning.
Display Areas The determined dimension areas (if local areas have been
activated) are displayed in colour for control purposes.
This option is only an auxiliary for the configuration of the local
areas and should normally be deactivated.
Min. Shape Length Here, you enter the minimum length of the component part
from which the parts are dimensioned, if these are visible in
one of the complete views. Parts, which are smaller than the
indicated value, are not taken into account.
Min. Cross-section Here, you enter the minimum dimensions of the component
part from which on the parts are dimensioned, if these are
visible as cross-section. Parts, which are smaller than the
indicated value, are not taken into account.
Style Variants In the list, you can see to which dimension chains the style
‘Variant 1’ or ‘Variant 2’ has been assigned by means of the
variants.
LIN-2 signifies e.g. that variant 2 has been selected for normal
(linear) dimensioning.
Page C.2 - 82
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 83
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 84
Detailing Style
Dialog-Commands
STYLE VARIANTS
Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants. You can then assign
a different style variant to the individual dimension chains.
You will find a description of this dialog and working with style variants under the
general dimensioning settings (see also: Dimensioning/Generalities).
Normaly, ProSteel 3D uses all shapes to determine the outer dimensions. For
practice-oriented dimensioning of overviews, however, it is often reasonable to
exclude certain shapes from the determination of overall dimensions.
The example shows a typical form of dimensioning, when e.g. the outer
dimensions are taken from drawings which are part of a quotation or which have
been realized by an architect and these shall be found in the approved plans.
Page C.2 - 85
Detailing Style
Settings
Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach overview
dimensions in the view and determine the dimension points as well as the
position of dimension chains.
For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general
description of defaults for dimensioning chains.
Reference Points
Page C.2 - 86
Detailing Style
Additional Dimensions
View Outer edges of the overall view in dimensioning direction
Construction Axes Utmost visible construction axes in dimensioning direction
View + Construction Axes Outer edges and utmost visible construction axes in dimensioning direction
Area Outer edgesof the corresponding local area in dimensioning direction
Position Dimension Chains (Only Inner Area)
Middle Geometrical center of the area
Middle Top / Left A little bit above resp. left of the geometrical center of the area
Middle Bottom / Right A little bit below resp. right of the geometrical center of the area
Half Top / Left In the middle of the upper resp. left half of the area
Half Bottom / Right In the middle of the lower resp. right half of the area
Top / Left Above resp. left of the area
Bottom / Right Below resp. right of the area
To Inside Near area edge seen from the center of the overall view
To Outside Far away area edge seen from the center of the overall view
Area Assignment (Only Inner Area)
According to Belonging Position of dimension chains in the belonging outer or inner area
Always Outer Area Position of dimension chains always in the outer area
In the following figure, you see a simple example for dimensioning a view
including construction axes display.
Page C.2 - 87
Detailing Style
Settings
Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach individual single
part dimensions in the anchor details and determine the dimension points as
well as the position of dimension chains.
For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general
description of defaults for dimensioning chains.
Coordinate Dimensions
The coordinate dimensions refer to the absolute position
in the plan view (origin of axes dimensioning).
Page C.2 - 88
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 89
Detailing Style
Max. Offset The maximum offset of the center axes of two parallel shapes
to be connected to an imaginary continuous shape.
Method of Analysis
The analysis of the local areas is made by cutting the whole view in thought in
several disks. These are limited by those shapes which visually appear as
continuous shapes.
The resulting imaginary shape lengths are classified according to their length
and – starting with the longest class – the number of direction-determining
shapes is compared until a clear majority is found. This determines the cutting
direction and thus (perpendicular to it) the main direction of dimensioning.
Page C.2 - 90
Detailing Style
Now the possible sections are collected in analysis direction via pre-defined
minimum widths. The final area size is limited by the shapes which are running
transversally to the cutting direction. Finally, possibly existing bordering edges
are brought into line.
An overlaying permits to build new areas out of the intersection of main and
transversal direction. Here, too a collection and bringing into line can be made
(however only in cutting direction). Thus, empty areas (e.g. notches) are better
taken into consideration.
Page C.2 - 91
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 92
Detailing Style
Colour Diameter Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which the
text of the hole diameter has to be displayed.
Colour Gage Dimension Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which
the text of the gage dimension has to be displayed
Colour Mounting Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which the
text of the mounting of subparts has to be displayed
Page C.2 - 93
Detailing Style
Move Outer Dimensions Outside The two outer dimensions are moved beside the
dimension line in horizontal direction.
Move Inner Dimension Horizontal The inner dimension texts are moved horizontally
across the construction help lines into a neighboring
dimension if there is enough place.
Group Distances
Smallest Distance Here, you enter the smallest length to be dimensioned. If the
distance to be dimensioned is smaller than this value, it will be
added to the next dimension.
Min. Text Distance Here, you enter a value indicating how close together
dimension texts within a dimension chain may be without
triggering the collision alarm.
Min. Dist. Between... Here, you enter a value indicating how close together
dimension texts of different dimension chains may be without
triggering the collision alarm.
Min. Edge Distance Here, you enter a minimum distance between the
dimensioning of the hole group or subpart and the end of the
component part which is admissible before it is moved
outside.
Max. Dist.for Collect Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which subpart
dimension chains in transversal direction at groups are
combined to one single dimension chain.
Page C.2 - 94
Detailing Style
Maximum Capture Area Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which a
component part is still assigned to the border area of a group.
This has effects on the arrangement of dimension chains at
local dimensioning.
Group Diagonals
Angle for Recognition Here you enter the minimum and maximum angle the shape
must resp. is allowed to have towards main dimensioning
direction to be recognized as diagonal.
This option permits you to prevent that e.g. a roof girder is
dimensioned as diagonal.
Min. Length Here, you enter the minimum length the shape must have to
be recognized as diagonal.
Flat Steel not as... Shapes of flat steel are not recognized as diagonal and
excluded from diagonal dimensioning.
You can thus prevent that e.g. a top chord of a haunch is
dimensioned as diagonal.
The picture below shows the different optimization settings for texts in
dimension chains:
Page C.2 - 95
Detailing Style
Use this dialog tab to specify if and what type of position flag or welding symbol
to attach to the construction parts. In addition, you indicate how the details and
views have to be labeled.
Group Generalities
Pos. Flags First The position flags are attached before part dimensioning so
that they are near the part.
Only 1st Part View In case of several partial views of a detail, the position flags
are only attached to the first view (except for possible 2D cuts
and folded end plates).
In Sections Position flags are also attached to all 2D-cuts.
No Cross-Sections Position flags are not attached to component parts, which are
visible as cross-sections in the view
Plates in Views A position flag is also attached to polyplates and stiffeners in
model-views (overviews).
Alignment Here, you select the aligment of the position flags in the detail
drawing.
Horizontal – all position flags are aligned horizontally.
Vertical – all position flags are aligned vertically.
According to style – all position flags are aligned as indicated
in the distribution style.
Page C.2 - 96
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 97
Detailing Style
Group Generalities
At End Plates The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are
displayed in single parts views for base and endplates, if the
connection shape is shown, too.
At Groups The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are
displayed in group views.
Folded Plate The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are
displayed in group views for folded end plates.
One Symbol until Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which identical
welding joints are combined with a common welding symbol.
Only one leader line Combined welding symbols are displayed with only one leader
line.
Otherwise, there is a common welding symbol, but leader
lines for each single welding joint.
Page C.2 - 98
Detailing Style
Page C.2 - 99
Detailing Style
Group Language
Standard The drawing is exclusively labeled in the original language of
the program installation.
One Language The drawing is labeled in the language chosen as ‘First
Language’ in the selection list.
Two Languages The drawing is labeled in the two languages chosen as ‘First
Language’ and ‘Second Language’ in the selection list. The
two terms are displayed separately, divided by oblique stroke,
e.g. "Ansicht A / view A". The selection 'Standard' as language
corrsponds to the original language of the program installation.
The translation of the terms is based on a translation database with a translation
1:1. If the corresponding term is not defined there, the original language of the
program installation is used instead. If there are identical terms at bi-lingual
labeling, only one term will be displayed.
Group Text Sizes
Normal Text Here you enter the text size for the label.
Text Scale Here, you enter the text sizes for the position number, view
and scale text.
Text at Shape Here, you enter the text size for the text label at shapes in
overviews.
AutoCAD-Text Style Select the text style (script) which has to be used for
displaying the text entries in the selection list.
Dialog-Commands
FILTER
By clicking on this button, you can define a filter of your own from other parts
properties apart from the previously defined filters of the group Shape Labeling.
Then, a dialog opens for entering the filter condition.
The filter settings are identical with the filter for selection of parts to be displayed
in overviews. Please refer to this chapter for description (see also: 2D-
Display/Views).
Shape labels can only be attached if the variant ‘Sketch’ or ‘System Lines’ has
been selected as display mode of the overview. The determined text is then
entered in the shape properties ’Note 2’ of the displayed component part, unless
the corresponding part in the model has a separate entry there.
Otherwise, the entry is taken from the component part in the model and the
variable $(E) possibly existing there will be replaced. You can define the label
for each component part individually. If a text was neither indicated in the shape
nor in the detailing style, only the measured value will be added.
In these dialog tabs, you specify the display of concrete elements which possibly
exist in the drawing and which have been created by means of the application
‘ProConcrete 3D’.
For more detailed information about the display parameters, please refer to the
ProConcrete 3D documentation, if need be.
The picture below displays the example of detailing a single part with optimized
settings. The example is based on the following main settings:
The effects of the settings can be seen in this detail; no further revisions were
required:
As you perhaps know already from the installation assistants of this and other
programs, the DetailCenter Express! will guide you through the necessary
settings for the detailing pattern. You only can start detailing after having made
all necessary settings.
For this purpose, the dialog offers you different pages one after the other which
can vary depending on your default settings. In this manual, we can therefore
only describe any possible pages in the order of their being displayed. It can,
also be that one or more pages don’t exist due to your default settings.
Page C.3 - 1
DetailCenter Express
The model has to be saved under a valid drawing name first to be able to work
with the DetailCenter Express!
Now click on the EXPRESS button in the component parts list of the
DetailCenter or select the context menu. Here, you click on the entry
DetailCenter Express! And the following dialog opens:
It is true that you can work with AutoCAD or other applications during detailing
process, depending on the computing capacity of your hardware. We
recommend, refraining from this!
After the DetailCenter Express! has completed its work, you are informed about
it in an info box.
Page C.3 - 2
DetailCenter Express
In the following, you will find a description of the different possible selection
pages. The pages are displayed in the main dialog box after having been
selected with the buttons MORE and BACK.
Each following page depends on your previous settings. If the previous settings
are modified, you can ignore already filled in pages again. Nevertheless, the
program will remember the specifications for later activation.
Click on the PROCEED button with the mouse and you can start the process at
any time you like, if your specifications are complete.
Starting Page
This page is always displayed first. Here, you will set which tasks have to be
done for you by the DetailCenter Express!
Page C.3 - 3
DetailCenter Express
Detailing here, you can have the parts detailed as detail blocks.
Single Sheet Here, you can insert detailed detail blocks into workshop plans
or activate the single sheet drawing output of details.
If single sheet drawing has been selected, the parts will be
detailed in any case. Detailing therefore has not to be
activated extra.
Clean Up Here, you can set which corrections still have to be made after
end of detailing.
To give you an example: If you want to put out all stiffeners and plates as well
as the groups as DIN A-4 single sheet drawings, independent of already existing
style assignments, select the following entries on the starting page: Prepare
Detailing (to delete former assignments), Connect Single Parts with Detail Style,
Connect Groups with Detail Style and Insert Detail Blocks/Single Sheet
Drawings. There you will make the further settings.
Please note that the DetailCenter Express! always works off the complete
component parts list. The list is worked on as if you had transferred the
complete model for detailing.
Prepare Detailing
On this page, you will set which tasks have to be done before starting all further
steps.
Page C.3 - 4
DetailCenter Express
Cancel Write Protection Any existing markings are cancelled. Thus you can be
sure that all component parts will be seized by the following
actions, if desired.
Delete All detail styles, which have already been assigned before, will
be separated from the parts. Thus you can be sure that a
detail style will be assigned only to the component parts
selected in the DetailCenter Express!.
Reset All modify flags set by the program will be reset to initialize the
model.
Delete links all pointers referring to detailed or inserted detail blocks
entered in the model drawing will be deleted.
Delete Blocks Former detail blocks in the detail library of the model will be
deleted.
If all fields on this page have been checked, your model drawing will be
completely initialized. It is the same as if a detailing never took place before.
Depending on the time of application of the DetailCenter Express! it is, however,
also reasonable to exclude some points.
Page C.3 - 5
DetailCenter Express
Upper List Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the
corresponding component part type. The parts can of course
only be recognized as such if they were created, with the
corresponding ProSteel 3D functions.
Left List Here, you select the component part type you want to assign a
detail style to.
Right List Here, you see the current assignments. These can be
removed again or modified.
Click on this button to assign the detail style displayed in the
selection list to the component part selected in the left or right
list.
Click on this button to cancel the assignment of the
component part type checked in the right list.
At style selection, you can differentiate between the detail styles currently
existing in the model drawing and the detail styles saved on the hard drive. If
you select a detail style from the hard drive (marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g.
[HD:] plates), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style possibly
existing in the drawing.
Page C.3 - 6
DetailCenter Express
Upper List Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the
corresponding group type. The type depends on the main part
of the group.
As the assignment of detail styles corresponds to that for single parts, please
refer to “Detail Style for Single Parts” for more detailed information.
Page C.3 - 7
DetailCenter Express
Upper List Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the
corresponding view.
As the assignment of detail styles corresponds to that for single parts, please
refer to “Detail Style for Single Parts” for more detailed information.
Page C.3 - 8
DetailCenter Express
Part Family Single Part At the connection of single parts, the program first
uses the style of a part family assigned to this part. If there
isn’t any part family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a
detail style of its own, the standard assignment will be used.
Part Family Group At the connection of groups, the program first uses the style
of a part family assigned to this group. If there isn’t any part
family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a detail style of its
own, the standard assignment will be used.
Assignment An already existing style assignment of the part will not be
overwritten. A detail style is only assigned to parts without any
detail style.
Page C.3 - 9
DetailCenter Express
Detailing
On this page, you make the default settings, how the component parts have to
be detailed. If you choose the automatic single sheet output, you don’t have to
make any additional settings here.
Position once Only one detail block is created of each position number,
divided into single parts and groups.
Overwrite Detail blocks of the same part existing in the detail library are
overwritten.
Overviews Overviews are detailed if a detail style has been assigned to
them.
Groups Groups are detailed as group drawing if a detail style has
been assigned to them.
Main Parts The main parts of groups are detailed as single parts.
Sub Parts The subordinate parts of groups are detailed as single parts.
Single Parts All single parts not belonging to a group are detailed.
Page C.3 - 10
DetailCenter Express
Insert Details
On this page, you make the default settings, how the worked out detail blocks
have to be inserted into the drawing.
In addition to the actual insertion task, the DetailCenter Express! also permits to
fill in the frame field of the drawing frame as well as to create a parts list. You
can select the drawing frame etc. on the following pages.
Single Sheet A drawing will be created for each single detail block.
> Scale At single sheet output, the existing detail scale is adopted to
the drawing sheet (the default setting of the detail style is
ignored).
> Sheet Size At single sheet output, a suitable drawing frame is searched
for the existing detail block.
Arrange several details are automatically arranged on a drawing sheet
according to your default settings.
Title Block The title block of the drawing frame is filled with the
corresponding specifications.
Belonging to on the drawing frame, a list is created displaying the
information about belonging of the parts (e.g. in which groups
a certain single part is contained).
Parts List A parts list of the displayed details is created on the drawing
frame (parts list related to the drawing).
Page C.3 - 11
DetailCenter Express
When you have selected the automatic single sheet output, the following dialog
will be displayed where you indicate which kinds of component parts have to be
detailed and stored as single sheet drawing.
For more detailed information about the drawing frames and how to prepare
them for output of frame field and parts lists, please refer to the chapter
'Automatic Single Sheet Output'.
Page C.3 - 12
DetailCenter Express
Don’t scale The parts are displayed without scale. The detail style settings
are ignored.
Different... Different drawing frames can be set for groups and poly
plates.
Vertical Format Details in vertical format can be equipped with another frame.
Scale File The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing scales if
the option ‘Optimized Scale’ has been selected.
Frame File The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing frame
definitions.
Mark Number File The file is displayed which is the base for the definitions of
US-mark number if the ‘Use US-mark numbering’ option has
been selected.
Output Path The folder is displayed where the completed workshop
drawings will be saved.
If you click on the small button on the right beside the corresponding display,
you can modify the files and paths of the defaults.
Page C.3 - 13
DetailCenter Express
Selection Lists Here, you choose the desired frame type for the output. Only
the borders defined in the sheet pattern file will be displayed.
It is always the standard frame which will be used unless there
is an exception for the corresponding detail.
Page C.3 - 14
DetailCenter Express
Model Data The order data for the frame field are transferred from the
drawing information table of the models. Otherwise, another
page will be displayed where you can specify the most
important order data.
Store Drawing Number The file name of the workshop drawing is identical with
the drawing number in the frame field. Otherwise, the current
position number is used at single sheet output or a describing
name at compilations.
Drawing Count Here, you enter the page number for the drawing which has to
be created next.
User Variable Here, you can enter any text you like which will be entered into
your drawing number, depending on whether you make use of
the corresponding variable or not.
Drawing Number Here, you can indicate another definition of the number if you
temporarily want to modify the default of your sheet pattern
file.
Drawing Name Here, you can indicate another definition of the drawing name,
if you temporarily want to modify the default of your sheet
pattern file.
Template Here, the current definition of the drawing number of the sheet
pattern file is displayed for your information.
Sheet Number Here, you see the current continuous number for your
information.
Page C.3 - 15
DetailCenter Express
The variables at drawing number and drawing name permit you a mixed
structure of fixed and current values.
Please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output' for a description of
the templates for drawing number and drawing name and the used variables.
Fill Header...Entries
On this page, you enter the order data for the fill header. 'Adopt Model Data’
option has to be deactivated.
When some data have been entered in a field, the corresponding input in the
drawing information – if existing – will be overwritten. If it is a blank field, the
specification of the drawing information will be used.
Input Fields Here, you can enter the desired data. Then, they are inserted
into the frame field.
Page C.3 - 16
DetailCenter Express
Page C.3 - 17
DetailCenter Express
Insertion Options
The detail blocks to be inserted can be arranged in different ways.
For more detailed information, please refer to chapter InsertExpress.
Page C.3 - 18
DetailCenter Express
Optimize Dispatch
The following parameters control the dispatch of the detail blocks on the multi
sheet. For more detailed information, please refer to chapter InsertExpress.
Arrangement The detail blocks are inserted in lines or in columns into the
drawing.
Failed Insertion Maximum number of failed insertions before the output is
continued on the next page. 0 means that, if a detail block
doesn’t fit on the sheet, the detail block is immediately
inserted on a new sheet.
Increment X Grating for the insertion algorithm in X-direction; the bigger the
selected value, the faster the dispatch is carried out.
Increment Y Grating for the insertion algorithm in Y-direction
Distance Detail Blocks
Minimum distance of one detail block to the other
Page C.3 - 19
DetailCenter Express
Here, you make the default settings for the creation of detail blocks, for the
allocation of US-mark number etc. The different notions are explained above.
Output Format
In the following dialog, you define, on which sheet template the detail blocks
have to be inserted.
Page C.3 - 20
DetailCenter Express
Clean Up Detailing
On this page, you make the default settings, which tasks have to be done after
end of detailing or style assignment.
Remove All detail styles, which are not connected with a detail, will be
removed from the model drawing. Copies on the hard drive
are saved.
Delete views Entries existing of manual assignments in the view list of
Detail Center will be deleted.
Detail Blocks All inserted detail blocks existing in the detail library will be
deleted. If this field is not activated, the detail blocks e.g. of
the single sheet output can still be used for other purposes.
Save The model drawing is saved after completion of the
DetailCenter Express! Otherwise, you have to save it manually
to avoid that the information about the worked out and
inserted details will be lost.
Page C.3 - 21
DetailCenter Express
The automatic single sheet output permits to create an individual drawing for
each detail to obtain e.g. a handy compilation of all bracing plates on DIN A-4
sheets or a compilation of documents. Two variants are offered which have only
one difference in procedure.
The first variant is the optimized scale. Here, the program decreases scale until
the detail is completely displayed in the selected drawing border. Scale setting
of detail style is ignored and a file with the available scales is used instead. This
avoids use of scales which are not based on practical work or which are not
customary in the corresponding workshop.
The second variant is the optimized size. Here, the component part is worked
out as usual with the scale of the corresponding detail style. Then, the smallest
drawing frame will be specified where this part can be completely displayed.
Scale File
If you selected the Optimized Scale option, the scale selection of the program is
based on the entries in the scale file.
You can thus create specific files for different customers and be sure that no
other scales will be used at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can
create specific defaults with different files for your customers.
The file is a text file having the extension .scl, which can also contain some
comments marked with a semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default file
is in the subordinate folder of your ProSteel 3D installation.
Page C.3 - 22
DetailCenter Express
The desired scales are entered per line one after the other, a special order is not
required.
; ProSteel 3D for AutoCAD - Scale Definition File
; --------------------------------------------------------
; Customer: Messrs. XYZ, Hamburg
1:2.5
1:5
1:10
1:20
1:50
1:100
The file is divided into the areas header, frame field attributes and the actual
frame definitions. All entries consist of a group name in pointed brackets and the
data group of keyword, equals sign and the following data.
[GROUP NAME]
Keyword1=Data1
Keyword2=Data2
...
You needn’t fill in entries, which are not required, or the complete entry can be
omitted.
Page C.3 - 23
DetailCenter Express
You enter a short name under the keyword Name (for later program options)
and a short file description under the keyword Description. The description will
then be displayed in the selection page of the DetailCenter Express!
Here, you specify which current program data will be transferred into which
block attribute of the frame field at running time. You can thus even specify your
own defined frame fields with your own attributes. For more detailed information
about how to assign block attributes to blocks, please refer to your AutoCAD-
documentation.
You can assign block attributes to the following keywords. Depending on the
settings in the DetailCenter Express! these are filled with the current values
(Express) or with the drawing information of the model drawing. In addition, you
can connect some of the properties of the corresponding detail with block
attributes. This allows you e.g. to refrain from a position flag or detail labelling at
single parts and thus to obtain more space for display.
Page C.3 - 24
DetailCenter Express
Here, you define according to which pattern the drawing number and the file
name of the drawing have to be structured. You can mix fixed and variable parts
and build the designations of variables as you like, (in order to avoid e.g.
identical names with used terms).
In the first two Enter Drawing Number Template and Filename Template you
indicate the definition, consisting of fixed values and the variable symbols which
are mentioned in the following. You may use your own template for the file name
if your drawing number has to contain signs, which mustn’t be used in a
Windows-file name. If you don’t fill in the field 'Filename Template', the specified
drawing number will be used instead as file name.
Page C.3 - 25
DetailCenter Express
If you want e.g. to obtain a drawing number containing your company’s name
"ABC", the year, the drawing type "BG" for groups or "ET" for single parts as
well as the position number (each one separated by points, such as e.g.
ABC.2002.BG1000), you have to define the following fields. All other fields
don’t have to be filled in.
DrawingNumberTemplate=ABC.#J#.#DWG##POS#
FileNameTemplate=ABC.#J#-#DWG##POS# ...(additionally because of the points)
PositionNumberSymbol=#POS#
YearSymbol=#J#
DrawingTypeSymbol=#DWG#
MainPartDrawingType=ET
SubPartDrawingType=ET
GroupDrawingType=BG
SinglePartDrawingType=ET
As already mentioned before, you can define the designations of the variables,
as you like. Of course it is recommended to use special symbols there, too for
better identification or in order to avoid a wrong replacing of text. (#POS# instead
of only POS).
Here, you enter which drawing frames are used and specify the insertion areas
of details and parts lists. Each available frame obtains an own group. The group
names then will be displayed in the selection lists of the DetailCenter Express! .
Please note: The keywords ‘Path’, ‘SizeX’, ‘SizeY’, ‘Area1’ and Area2 have to be
assigned with current values; otherwise the frame will not be accepted for
selection.
Page C.3 - 26
DetailCenter Express
ListStyle the name of parts list definition for the drawing parts list
ListScale scale of the drawing parts list
ListInsertPoint insertion point for the drawing parts list as 2D-point;
enter this point in the format (x, y).
ListHorizontalStart description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in horizontal direction;
Enter left for left or right for right.
ListVerticalStart description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in vertical direction;
Enter top for top or down for down.
The two entries describe the position of the point related to the list (on the left at
the top, etc.). The list is extended according to this default.
ListType type of drawing parts list (allowed values: group, single, released)
ListGroupCount the number of groups is used in the parts list
ListGroupMultiplayCount the number of pieces is multiplied with the number of groups
If you define your own frames, please note that the lower left point of the
drawing frame has the world coordinates (0, 0) and that you store the
drawing in top view on the frame. The positive X-axis is showing to the right,
the positive Y-axis to the top.
Enter the frame field as a block with the name of the drawing file (i.e. as block
'dina4', if the drawing frame has to be saved as 'dina4.dwg'.
Page C.3 - 27
DetailCenter Express
The following example once again shows you the most important specifications
of a frame definition:
The parameters used for multi sheet output are described in chapter
InsertExpress.
Page C.3 - 28
DetailCenter Express
Drawing List
At single sheet output, a drawing list is automatically created as text file (*.txt)
and as DBASE-file (*.dbf). The file is saved in the ProSteel 3D detail folder
under the drawing name of the model.
You can see the position of the corresponding part and the file name of the
created drawing in this file. The drawing number, scale (and whether it is
suitable) and drawing frame are displayed as well. The data depend on the
selected type of single sheet output.
Page C.3 - 29
DetailCenter Express
Page C.3 - 30
InsertExpress
C.4 InsertExpress
In DetailCenter Express you can carry out a complete detailing starting with
definition and assignment of a detail style up to single part drawing, whereas
InsertExpress helps you with the insertion of already created detail blocks. You
can save the created insertion patterns as templates and use them again later in
individual or batch insertion mode.
With the help of the templates, you can define the patterns for different tasks
and then carry out detailing with a single mouse click.
Page C.4 - 1
InsertExpress
To be able to work with InsertExpress, you must already have created some
detail blocks from a model in ProSteel 3D. Move to the insertion page in the
DetailCenter and select an existing detail block library there to start
InsertExpress. It is not before a detail block library has been selected that the
button calling InsertExpress will be released.
Page C.4 - 2
InsertExpress
On this starting page, you select in the selection list whether you want to use
InsertExpress in manual or batch insertion mode.
In Manual Insertion Mode, you can define a specific insertion process that will
then be carried out. You can save the settings of this manual insertion as
template and use it again later in manual or batch insertion mode.
In Batch Insertion Mode, you can select one or more templates that will then be
carried out one after the other in InsertExpress. You will find a more detailed
description of the different operation modes in the following chapters.
Below, you can see a typical batch page with several automatically inserted
details:
Save Templates
You can save all settings for insertion – like in most ProSteel 3D functions –
under a file name in the templates management of InsertExpress so that you
can use them again later.
Page C.4 - 3
InsertExpress
Library All detail blocks saved under the selected library are inserted.
Selection All detail blocks checked in the browser have to be inserted.
Browser All detail blocks displayed in the browser are inserted.
Filter In the following field, you can define a list of search filters that
are used for searching in the selected detail library. The found
detail blocks are inserted later.
Note: To be able to use the option “Takeover Selection from Browser“, you have
to select the detail blocks to be inserted before starting the InsertExpress. You
should pay attention to the status of the “Recursive” button on the insertion page
in the DetailCenter.
Page C.4 - 4
InsertExpress
Right Arrow Click on this button to transfer the selected entry in the left list
to the right filter list.
Left Arrow Click on this button to remove the selected entry in the right
list.
Click Twice Click on a list entry to process the selected filter condition.
Page C.4 - 5
InsertExpress
Define Filter
You can define the filters and store them as template on the insertion sheet in
the display options of the DetailCenter.
A possible filter selection may look as follows to filter out all straight shapes type
HE.
Then the filter can be saved under a certain name (e.g. HE-shapes) using the
template management. This name will be found later in the above-displayed
filter selection.
Page C.4 - 6
InsertExpress
Insertion Options
After having defined which detail blocks have to be inserted, the next step is to
specify what has to be done in the drawing when the blocks are inserted.
Title Block The title block on each drawing sheet has to be filled out
according to the specifications which still have to be made in
the following.
US Mark Number An US mark number is generated for each detail block which
later will be entered automatically as shipping number in the
model drawing.
Page C.4 - 7
InsertExpress
When you have selected the option “Insert Separated by Single, Group, View”,
the following options are available in addition as well.
Single Parts The single parts are inserted separated from each other and
ascending by their position number in the following order:
- Shapes
- Poly-plates
- End and Base Plates
- Stiffeners
- Bent Shapes
- Other Component Parts
Page C.4 - 8
InsertExpress
At first, all above-mentioned part types are collected per type and then inserted
one after the other in ascending order each on a separate drawing sheet (or
more, if necessary).
Page C.4 - 9
InsertExpress
Failed Insertion If this number of detail blocks couldn’t be inserted into the
current drawing, a new drawing will be started.
Increment X Grating distance for the insertion grating in X-direction
Increment Y Grating distance for the insertion grating in Y-direction
Distance Minimum distance of the detail blocks after insertion
Arrangement The detail blocks are inserted in columns or in lines.
Note: The parameters specified here control the output accuracy; they can
however also have a considerable influence on the time needed for the insertion
process.
Failed Insertion
At a failed insertion, the detail block is inserted outside the drawing on the
coordinate (–5000, -5000). The rest of the drawing remains empty.
Page C.4 - 10
InsertExpress
Output Specifications
Certain parameter files control the following selection parameters for drawing
insertion.
The description of the files can to a large extent be found in the chapter
“DetailCenter Express”. In the following, we will only describe the parameters
necessary for InsertExpress in the chapter “Technical Details”.
Scale File Here, you see the file which gives rise to the drawing scales.
Border Frame File Here you see the file which gives rise to the drawing frame
definitions.
Mark Number File Here, you see the file which gives rise to the definitions for
the US mark number, if you have selected the option ‘Use US
mark number’.
Detail Output Here, you see the directory where the finished workshop
drawings will be stored.
You can modify the files and the paths of the specifications by clicking on the
small button on the right side of the corresponding display.
Page C.4 - 11
InsertExpress
Drawing Frame The drawing sheet into which the detail blocks have to be
inserted.
Scale The scale that has to be the base for the output drawing file.
Do not Scale Indicates whether the loaded drawing has to be enlarged. In
this case, the scale text is only entered into the title block.
Note: If you want to work with scaled (bigger or smaller) drawing frames or true
to life sizes, please take care that all detail blocks to be inserted here have the
same scale like the drawing. Otherwise, type sizes and symbol scaling (position
flags, labelling...) will not match together.
The best is to detail all detail blocks in a smaller size (1:xx) and to use the option
“Do not Scale Frame“. Then, everything will be ok.
Page C.4 - 12
InsertExpress
Start DWG Counter at Here; you enter the sheet number of the
next drawing to be created.
User Variable Here, you can enter any text that will be inserted into your
drawing number, depending on whether the corresponding
variable is used.
Drawing Number Here, you can indicate another definition of the number if you
temporarily want to modify the specifications of the sheet
template file.
Drawing Name Here, you can indicate another definition of the drawing name
if you temporarily want to modify the specifications of the
sheet template file.
Template Here, you see the current definition of the drawing number of
the sheet template file for your information.
Next Page Here, you see the current continuous number for your
information.
Page C.4 - 13
InsertExpress
Header Entries
Due to the fact that model data are not available any more at automatic insertion
of detail blocks, it is possible to enter additional project-related data for the
insertion process here.
Then, the indicated values are entered into the header of the drawing
corresponding to the sheet template file.
Page C.4 - 14
InsertExpress
Finalising Works
Finally, you can specify whether you want to delete the detail blocks after
insertion.
Note: When the detail blocks are deleted here, the insertion information cannot
be transferred into the model and an automatic update of the 2D-drawing would
not be possible any more.
Page C.4 - 15
InsertExpress
When you combine several insertion processes, you can have run a complete
detail library according to your specifications.
To do so, change over to batch insertion mode and use the existing templates.
Page C.4 - 16
InsertExpress
Edit Templates
You can also edit the existing templates in batch insertion mode by double
clicking.
Page C.4 - 17
InsertExpress
Apart from the dialog settings, at the output of collected sheets by means of
InsertExpress there are various other parameters, too, which are important for a
correct output of the program.
These can be found in a format file (*.frm), which can be specified in the
settings. For more detailed information about the format file, please also refer to
the chapter “DetailCenter Express“.
Important Parameters
Area1 Drawing area where detail blocks may be inserted (have to
have a valid value).
Area2 Area of the header (has to have a valid value). In this part of
the drawing, no detail blocks are inserted.
ExcludeArea 1-4 Drawing areas where detail blocks mustn’t be inserted. Later,
these areas may e.g. contain parts lists, company stamps or
other information about the company.
The example shows the most important areas. In addition, the meaning of the
detail distance (dialog specification) is displayed as well.
Page C.4 - 18
InsertExpress
Drawing Directory
At the output of collected sheets, a drawing directory is automatically created as
text file (*.txt) and as DBASE-file (*.dbf). The files are stored under the name of
the model or under InsertExpress.txt (resp. dbf) in the detail directory. At the
next output with InsertExpress both files are overwritten.
----------------------------------
========|=========|=====================|==============|=========|==========
01 |01 |IPE 400 |IPE 400 |1.000000 |C:\Program
02 |02 |RRK 250x150x8 |RRK 250x150x8 |1.000000 |C:\Program
03 |03 |RRK 250x150x8 |RRK 250x150x8 |1.000000 |C:\Program
….
….
Pos |Info
========|=====
In this file, you can see position, group position, name and group name of the
corresponding component part as well as the file name of the created drawing
and the scale. If an error occurs during insertion, this will be indicated, too.
Page C.4 - 19
InsertExpress
Page C.4 - 20
Cranked 2D-View
You can insert cranked views into the model if you require cuts and views
through your models that are not situated on one plane. During detailing, they
are treated like standard plane views; they show, different depths of the model
simultaneously in one view and allow hiding of unwanted or less interesting
areas.
Add Cut
After starting this function, you first have to click on the start of polyline
(intersection line) and then add the other points of the intersection line. Please
pay attention that the line doesn't intersect nor that it is “running backwards”. In
addition, the segments have to be perpendicular to each other. Otherwise, you
don't obtain a satisfactory result.
Terminate the entry by pressing the right mouse key if you do not want to add
any further points. Now, you are prompted to specify the direction and depth of
projection by clicking on another point (in relation to the start). All areas of the
component parts, which are intersected by the polyline, are later displayed as
cut – all areas which are situated within the intersection depth, are displayed as
standard projection.
Then, the following dialog appears which is also opened in case of modification
of a cranked view via ProSteel 3D properties.
Page C.5 - 1
Cranked 2D-View
Page C.5 - 2
North symbol
This function allows you to add a benchmark to your model, which may be
evaluated later in different ways.
At the moment, US-benchmark-symbols are available to help with the assembly
of girders by indicating their alignment during installation. The point of the
compass, which indicates north, is situated at the left side of the symbol or
above if it is aligned horizontally (or at the upper end if it is aligned vertically).
Page C.6 - 1
North symbol
Options: In the input field Elevation above, you can enter a reference
height corresponding to the model coordinates, z=0.
Select the layer on which the benchmark has to be displayed
in the Layer selection list.
In the input field Block path, you may indicate a path to
previously defined benchmarks if you don't want to apply the
built-in symbols.
Click on the File Select button and a Windows file selection
dialog will be displayed where you can select the block folder.
Alternatively to the built-in symbols, you can also use any
block as a symbol. The Y-axis of this block then corresponds
to northern direction; it will be inserted with the corresponding
rotation.
Symbol: If the field Symbol is checked, the built-in symbols will be used
for displaying the north arrow.
You can select the desired symbol in the selection list. In the
input field size, the scaling of the symbol can be defined.
Block: If the field Block is checked, an external block will be used for
displaying the north arrow.
The scale factor of the block is entered in the input field Scale.
Normally, the blocks of the folder entered in the input field
Block path will be used. Then, you may select the existing
drawings as blocks which have to be used.
If the field "Display only DWG Blocks" is checked, you can
select the blocks already contained in the drawing as blocks
which have to be used.
Select the block which has to be used as north symbol in the
selection list block.
Page C.6 - 2
North symbol
Horizontal Alignment
Here, it is possible to select either the built-in symbols or external blocks. As the
proceeding is the same as already mentioned concerning the actual benchmark,
we don't repeat these settings here, but only describe the additional options.
Settings The display for the alignment symbol for the points of the
compass is set here.
In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between
the insertion point of the symbol and the left resp. lower end of
the shape.
In the input field Center distance, you enter the distance
between the insertion point of the symbol and the center of the
shape.
In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as
AutoCAD-colour number.
Horizontal is valid for horizontal girders and vertical is valid for vertical girders.
Page C.6 - 3
North symbol
Vertical Alignment
Settings The display for the alignment symbol for the upper edge of the
component is set here.
In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between
the insertion point of the symbol and the left lower edge of the
shape.
In the input field Offset, you enter the distance between the
insertion point of the symbol and the upper edge of the shape.
In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as
AutoCAD-colour number.
User-defined Symbols
You have to define an AutoCAD-block in your model drawing or as external
drawing (wblock) containing the block attribute “LABEL” to apply user-defined
symbols. This attribute is filled with the current text for alignment.
Page C.6 - 4
North symbol
Shape Labelling
Page C.6 - 5
North symbol
Page C.6 - 6
Manual Dimensioning Points
Some steel constructions are very complex so that the system is not always
able to determine the suitable dimensioning automatically. Often it is even not
possible to find all suitable points because important reference measures such
as, weld check measures, or similar values have to be defined individually and
are not automatically known to the system.
For this purpose, you can define dimensioning points directly in the model for
the derivation of group drawings or overviews; the system has to be forced to
dimension them. In contrast to the subsequent manual dimensioning of 2D
workshop drawings, the advantage of this function is that they can be updated at
an automatic 2D-update.
Page C.7 - 1
Manual Dimensioning Points
Only Points Here, you specify the size to be used for depiction of the two
measured points.
Layer: Here you specify on which layer the object has to be inserted.
Loop: The command is carried out as a loop. You can insert several
manual-dimensioning objects one after the other without
having to call the function again each time.
Group Options
Horizontal A measure is created in dimensioning direction of the group or
of the overview that runs from the first to the second point.
Vertical A measure is created perpendicular to dimensioning direction
of the group or of the overview that runs from the first to the
second point. When there is more than one target point, the
dimensioning direction is determined by the first added target
point.
Direct A direct (e.g. diagonal) measure is created in the group or
overview, running from the first to the second point.
Baseline Dimensioning When you have seized a reference point with several
target points, each target point will get its own dimension
(starting from the reference point). Otherwise, reference point
and target points are created as continuous dimension chain.
In Groups The dimensioning object is evaluated in the group to which it
has been assigned.
In Views The dimensioning object is evaluated in the overview drawing
where it is included.
By highlighting both entries an identical dimensioning object can appear both in
a group drawing and in an overview.
Page C.7 - 2
Manual Dimensioning Points
Dialog Commands
SINGLE
SEVERAL
Click on this button to add a dimensioning object with a reference
point and several target points.
You first have to click on the group this dimensioning object is to be
assigned to. You then click on the base point of dimensioning and
afterwards the other dimension points. Pressing ESC key ends adding further
dimension points.
Selection of Views
In principle, dimensioning objects have to be assigned to a group, even if the
dimensions only appear in an overview drawing.
At the later detailing, they are only displayed in the view that corresponds to a
view at insertion (or to the opposite direction). Therefore, you should insert a
dimensioning object on a component part in the view in which later you want to
see the length to be dimensioned.
If you want to see the length in two views that are not opposite to each other,
from view direction, you have to add the dimensioning object for a second time.
Page C.7 - 3
Manual Dimensioning Points
In the figure below, you see an example of the variants at several dimension
points: The dimensioning objects which seem to be similar first in the 3D-model
(above) create different results in the 2D-drawing below. For both objects only
the dimensioning direction ‘horizontal’ is activated.
The dimensioning object on the left here has been created using the option
‘baseline dimensioning’ so that all dimension points refer to the left reference
point (1). The dimensioning object on the right, on the other hand, has been
created without this option and a continuous dimension chain (2) is created with
the right reference point.
Page C.7 - 4
Manual Component Part Link
The logical links are required for dimensioning and recognition of neighbouring
parts. These are created during most ProSteel 3D processing functions.
However, if there isn’t any link between two component parts, a so-called
“manual link” can be placed between the parts. The only task of this link is to
create a dependency; it hasn’t got any additional function.
To create a manual link, first select the attached part of the connection (this
should be the adjacent part, e.g. the latch-bolt) and then the part that it has to
be connected to (e.g. the support). A logical dependency between the
component parts is created which is important for dimensioning.
Page C.8 - 1
Manual Component Part Link
Page C.8 - 2
Global Scale
Like AutoCAD, ProSteel 3D works in drawing units according to the scale less
method, a natural scale of 1:1 being assumed (i.e. a drawing unit corresponds to
one millimetre natural size).
Any detailing with respect to the 2D shop plans, however, is prepared in a scale
you entered beforehand. However, if you want to attach e.g. position flags later
– that have been entered in the original size (mm) in the pre-settings – you must
set a scale in order to ensure uniform sizes of these elements and a uniform
aspect of your drawings. This so-called Global Scale basically corresponds to
the later plot scale of your drawing.
When the program needs a scale and no special scale is entered, the global
scale will be adopted.
When using the command, the following prompt is displayed in the command
line
The current scale is displayed. Now enter the new scaling factor to be used for
your work. When you enter e.g. the value 10, the default scale 1:10 will apply.
Do not confuse the global scale with the length scaling. The global scale refers
to the later printout of the drawings and scales text sizes, symbol sizes, etc.
However, if you would like to use scale subsequently and if you have reduced
the shapes according to scale, you usually plot using a scale of 1:1 (global scale
= 1) and work with a length scaling. Enter both values when dimensioning
manually.
Page C.9 - 1
Global Scale
Page C.9 - 2
Drawing Border
ProSteel 3D allows you to easily insert drawing frames in different formats and
scales. The program package comes loaded with several sample frames and
borders. You can also add your own frames and borders.
A drawing border is inserted as a scaled block corresponding to the drawing
scale. The matching original blocks are filed in scale 1:1. After having defined a
title block with block attributes within a border, you can fill it in using the
command ’Drawing Info’.
A dialog box gives you access to several well-sorted border variations. The data
are filed in a tree structure. The standard version already includes the main
entries A0-A4. You can either delete them or add further entries. The actual
entries can only be entered as subordinate item under a main item.
Page C.10 - 1
Drawing Border
Here, you load the selected entry and the drawing block into
the paper area.
Creation of Entries
Select the main point and either press the right mouse button for the
subordinate menu or the Create button. Then, the following dialog opens:
Page C.10 - 2
Drawing Border
After these data have been inserted, a new subordinate entry is displayed in the
tree, which still has to be named. Then, the entry is created and can be used
immediately.
Page C.10 - 3
Drawing Border
Page C.10 - 4
Manual Cut
This command is used to insert a cut into 2D details. The prerequisite is that the
details are still intelligent details.
From object selection, the program independently recognizes which objects can
be cut and which objects only represent the borders of the cutting arrows (e.g.
dimensioning). This means that the cutting arrows are in any case attached
outside of dimensioning if you select e.g. a completely dimensioned group
including the measures.
The following dialog opens after selection of the command. There, you can
make the settings for label and depiction of cutting symbols:
Label Here, you enter the text without the cutting code that has to
be used as designation. Enter e.g. Cut.
Sign Enter the desired cutting code such as e.g. the letter A.
Text Style Select an AutoCAD-text style for the labels.
Layer Select the AutoCAD-layer the text and the cutting symbols
have to be created on.
Line Type Select the line type to be used for the depiction of the cutting
line.
Page C.11 - 1
Manual Cut
Detailing Style Select the detailing style to be used for the depiction of the
component parts (e.g. shadings etc.)
Colour... In the input fields for Symbol and Text you enter the colour of
the cutting arrow and of the text. You can either specify the
colour directly by entering the AutoCAD colour number, or you
click on the desired input field and then on the SELECT
button. Then, the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection is
displayed where you can select the colour directly.
Text Size Here, you enter the size of the label text.
Hatch Scale Here, you can specify a scaling factor for the hatch to modify
the density of the hatching.
Create Block A common block is formed consisting of the cutting arrows
and the codes. Otherwise, they are still single lines and text.
Keep Resolution If this option is activated, the resolution depiction of possible
shapes is not modified. Inner edges remain e.g. If this option
is deactivated, all shapes are set on with Radii.
Dialog-Commands
LINE
Click on this button to create a cut through component parts along a line
to be selected.
Select the parts to be depicted, then the cutting line. Then, you have to
indicate the depth of the cut. If you press ESC here, only a cut at the
corresponding position will be made. Otherwise, the parts will be cut at the
position and the projection of the rest will be displayed.
After having created the cut and after having attached the cutting code, you can
place the result anywhere you like.
OBJECT
Click on this button to create a cut on the base of a cut object. This may
be a view frame or an offset cut.
You only have to select the object; selection of the parts is carried out
automatically.
Page C.11 - 2
Manual Cut
UCS
Click on this button to create a cut of 3D component parts at the current
UCS.
After selection of the parts, the cut is created at the XY-plane of the
current UCS.
Position Flags
Apart from the actual cut display, it is also possible to attach position flags in
manual cuts. In addition, you can add component part information to 2D-lines to
enable the attachment of position flags at a later moment.
Page C.11 - 3
Manual Cut
Group Symbol
Symbol The cutting code is created as a symbol consisting of cutting
arrow and code.
Continued The two partial lines are connected through the cut part.
By Side The cutting code is written beside the cutting arrow; otherwise
it is written above the cutting arrow.
Arrow Size Specify the size of the arrow.
Distance/Length Here, you specify the distance of the cutting lines, from their
beginning to the utmost bordering edge (e.g. the
dimensioning), and what has to be the length.
Block
Page C.11 - 4
Manual Cut
Block A freely selectable block is used for the cutting code instead of
a cutting arrow. In the input fields Top Block and Down Block
you see the selected block path; you can assign a block
drawing by clicking on the SELECT button.
The edge of the cut is located in front of the left stiffener and the depth of the cut
extends beyond the head plate – you see all of these parts from the right; the
shape is cut and the drill holes are invisible.
Page C.11 - 5
Manual Cut
Page C.11 - 6
Manual Dimensioning
For example, the overall views of the model may be dimensioned for an
overview. However, it is also possible to dimension individual component parts
or groups and then create details manually in cases where automatic detailing is
not suitable for your application. In addition, all major standard functions of
regular AutoCAD dimensioning are available for revision or modification of 2D
workshop drawings.
The dimensioning functions are principally based on the settings for detailing
style (dimensioning), therefore general settings like AutoCAD dimensioning
style, optimization, etc. have to be executed in the respective dialog box. The
detailing style dialog can also be accessed using the dialog box described below
and then the style can be modified or a new detailing style can be created.
HINT: Please take care that the settings of scale and scaling of the component
part are correct. Please refer to the chapter “Detailing” and carefully read
through the chapter “Dimensioning Style”.
Page C.12 - 1
Manual Dimensioning
Group Settings
Alignment Here, you set the general direction of dimensioning.
Horizontal – The dimension chain is always running in X-
direction.
Vertical – The dimension chain is always running in Y-
direction.
Line – The dimension chain is running in the same direction
like a pre-set line. To carry out the function, click on the line
determining the direction. You can use this method to
dimension e.g. along a cut edge.
As picked – The dimension chain is running in the direction
specified by the two points first picked. This is e.g. reasonable
if you want to dimension diagonal holes in a gusset plate.
Like Part – The dimension chain is running in the same
direction like the length direction of a component part. This is
the optimal method to dimension along a diagonal shape by
clicking on the shape.
Arc Dimension – You can dimension the length of an arc.
Angle Dimension – You can dimension an angle.
Page C.12 - 2
Manual Dimensioning
Page C.12 - 3
Manual Dimensioning
New Scale The scale used for converting the measured lengths and text
sizes depending on the settings for part scaling under ‘Parts
Not…’
Here, you enter e.g. the value 10 if you have selected the
‘scale 1: 10 with object scaling’ at detailing. The details now
have been decreased by factor 10.
Outside Dimensions The outside edges of the seized component parts are
evaluated as fence points and dimensioned in a dimension
chain.
Shape Center Starting and end points of the shapes are created as fence
points and dimensioned in a dimension chain.
Shape Edges The corner points of the coating are evaluated as fence points
and dimensioned in a dimension chain.
Overall Dim. An additional dimension chain is created stretching over the
overall dimensions of the fence chains.
Page C.12 - 4
Manual Dimensioning
Display Last If this option has been checked, the last coordinate measure is
displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is only possible if
you have a dimension chain of normal measures and
simultaneously existing coordinate measures.
Others
Info Window Depending on the selection, you are informed about the type
of dimension chains, global scale of the drawing, pre-selected
origin of coordinate dimensioning and pre-selected component
part for part reference.
Detailing Style Here, you select the detailing style controlling the settings for
dimensioning style, optimization, etc.
At automatic part dimensioning, you also specify the points of
a part or of a group to be dimensioned in the detailing style.
Therefore, at identical detailing style the result of automatic
detailing and automatic part dimensioning are in no way
different.
Dialog-Commands
SINGLE PART
Click on this button to dimension a shape or any plate automatically. The
relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings
in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.
You have to click on the part to be dimensioned. If the ‘Choose Position’ option
has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position
you like.
For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended
for most cases, you can, however, specify other directions as well.
GROUP
Click on this button to dimension a group automatically. The relevant
points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in
detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.
You have to click on any part of the group you like. If the ‘Choose Position’
option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any
position you like.
For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended
for most cases, you can, however, specify other directions as well.
Page C.12 - 5
Manual Dimensioning
END PLATE
Click on this button to dimension an end plate automatically. The relevant
points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in
detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.
You have to click on the end plate first and then the connecting shape (this is
the shape to which the end plate belongs). If the ‘Choose Position’ option has
been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you
like.
For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended
for most cases, you can specify other directions as well.
INSERT DIMENSION
Click on this button to insert new dimensions in an existing dimension
chain. The other dimensions will be adapted.
Select all dimensions belonging to this chain. Then you have to pick a
dimension as reference dimension for the position of the dimension chain. If this
demand is only confirmed with RETURN, the first dimension of your previous
selection will be used.
Page C.12 - 6
Manual Dimensioning
Now the program filters the dimensions, which are not situated in a line with this
reference dimension. Dimensions of other dimension chains may also belong to
your selection (e.g. due to “Crossing” the selection).
Now, the dimension chain will be reconstructed and you can then insert the new
dimensions.
DELETE DIMENSION
Click on this button to delete a dimension from an existing dimension
chain. The other dimensions will be adapted.
Selection of the dimension chain and of dimensions is identical with the
dialog command INSERT DIMENSION it has not to be described once again.
SINGLE DIMENSION
Click on this button to attach a single dimension.
Linear Dim: Click on the first and second dimension point as well as the
position of the dimension line. The dimension is aligned
according to the direction. Depending on the settings for
direction and part reference, you still have to click on a
reference line and/or a reference part.
Arc Dimensions: Click on the centre of the arc first and then the starting point
and end of the arc (the end will be corrected correspondingly).
Afterwards, you pick the dimension line position.
An arc is principally looked on counter-clockwise from
beginning to end.
Angle Dim.: Click on the vertex of the angle first and then the end of the
first and second side. After you pick the dimension line
position.
An angle is principally looked on counter-clockwise from
beginning to end.
Page C.12 - 7
Manual Dimensioning
DIMENSION CHAIN
Click on this button to attach a dimension chain out of several dimensions.
Click on the position of the dimension line first and then the points to be
dimensioned.
The dimensions are aligned according to the direction. Depending on the
settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference
line and/or a reference part. If you selected the option ‘As Picked’ for the
direction, the first two dimension points determine the direction of the dimension
chain.
If you selected the option ’Continuing Dimension Chain’, you are dimensioning
according to the AutoCAD-dimensioning function ‘Continue’. If this option has
not been activated, you continue indicating pairs of points for all dimensions
following the first one. You can obtain an interrupted dimension chain with
several dimensions.
FENCE CHAIN
Click on this button to create a fence chain dimensioning. The dimensions
are aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for
direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line
and/or a reference part.
SPECIFY ORIGIN
Click on this button to define the origin (reference point) of coordinate
dimensioning for the time of a ProSteel 3D session. Click on the
corresponding point in your drawing.
This is reasonable if dimensioning has to be made e.g. within an overview or a
more complex group. Select the setting Default under ‘Default Origin’ if all
following coordinate measures have to be calculated related to this reference
point.
Page C.12 - 8
Manual Dimensioning
Dimension Chains
During the acquisition of the measurement points the dimension chains are able
to capture the points correctly even if the dimensions have been indicated in a
different sequence or if the dimensions overlap.
Example (2) shows the result if the first dimensioning is like (1) and the next
input is the dimensioning of the distance from the dotted line to point B. The
‘Combine Identical Dimensions from 3 on’ option in the detail style is active as
well (since A/B, B/C and C/D were created!)
Example (3) shows a dimension chain without the ‘Continuing Dimension Chain’
option. The following was dimensioned: the distance A/C and then D/E. A new
measurement of the distance B/F would now divide the distance of 400 and
create a second measurement from point E to F.
Page C.12 - 9
Manual Dimensioning
Page C.12 - 10
Manual Dimensioning
Depending on the selection, the dimension chains for shape centers (a), shape
edges (b), outer edges (c) and overall dimension (d) are then inserted and,
depending on the combination of dimension chains, extended to the outer edge
of the overall dimension resp. of the outer shapes.
Page C.12 - 11
Manual Dimensioning
Page C.12 - 12
Elevation Flags
Using this command, you can insert elevations for component parts in the
display windows. This command may also be used to insert length and width
distances as elevation symbols. The parameters length, width, and height
correspond to the related parameters of the work frames.
Page C.13 - 1
Elevation Flags
Click on the button representing the desired measurement and the elevation can
be inserted.
First click on the definition point (measuring point), then you can position the
elevation symbol (ORTHO is activated automatically) and finally, you position
the dimension text (ORTHO is deactivated again when it was in the OFF-
position before the function was selected).
Page C.13 - 2
Elevation Flags
X, Y, Z-Coordinate Enter the coordinates of origin for Length (Y), Width (X) and
Height (Z) measurements. The picked points will then be
referenced to these coordinates.
Usually you enter the origin of the corresponding work frame.
The coordinates can also be defined in the drawing using the
mouse.
Page C.13 - 3
Elevation Flags
Elevation Depiction
Style Selection Use this box to select the style to be applied for the depiction.
Background Enter the AutoCAD-colour number for the background colour
of the preview monitor.
SAVE Click on this button to save the current settings.
LOAD Click on this button to load a template out of the template
management and thus use it again.
Create Geo... The depiction of elevations is specified by preset parameters
in this dialog.
Block Geometry An AutoCAD block specifies the depiction of elevations. Any
block can be selected.
Block Path In this field, you specify from which directory the blocks for
selecting the geometry of the elevations have to be read.
Bitmap You can set an own bitmap for a style for easy recognition.
This bitmap then is displayed in the selection box as well.
Page C.13 - 4
Elevation Flags
Geometry Definition
Line Type Lines means that the elevation symbol is represented as a line
triangle.
Filled Triangle means that the elevation symbol is represented
as a partly filled triangle.
Default Format You can indicate a certain text format with a variable $(V) for
the measurement to the elevation. The variable then is
replaced by the current value.
Text Style Presets the text style to be used for depiction of the texts in
the elevation.
Note The indicated notes are output as text together with the
elevation.
Group Options
Guide Line The elevation has a guideline to the definition point.
Dynamic The elevation is visibly displayed during insertion process.
Page C.13 - 5
Elevation Flags
Bottom Side The elevation symbol is turned upside down (point to the top,
e.g. for the indication of lower edges).
Thousand sep The thousand position is separated from the other digits by a
point, i.e. 2.500 instead of 2500. If you require the digits after
the decimal point, this option should be deactivated.
Group Sizes
Symbol Size the size of the elevation symbol.
Text Size size of text of elevation data
After Decimal The number of digits after the decimal point of the calculated
value
Pre-Decimal The number of digits in front of the decimal point of the
calculated value, if the value is smaller than the number of
pre-decimal digits, the rest is filled up with noughts.
Group Colours
Colours Use the fields Line and Text to set the corresponding colour
for the height object. -1 as value means that the presetting is
used.
Page C.13 - 6
Elevation Flags
Style Management
Your elevation styles are maintained in this part of the dialog. New styles can be
created; existing styles can be loaded, updated or even deleted.
If you don’t require a style any more in the drawing, use this
function to remove it.
Page C.13 - 7
Elevation Flags
Page C.13 - 8
Weld Symbols
Using this command, weld seams or weld symbols may be inserted in the model
or in any 2D-drawing.
To conserve memory, a weld seam in a 3D model is represented by a line only.
But it contains all necessary data, so that a weld symbol can be added later.
After inserting the weld symbol, you can still change data in the dialog and
check the result immediately in the drawing.
A symbol can be composed of an upper and/or a lower part. Since the settings
are identical, only one variation is described here. Weld seams are objects, and
allow any kind of alteration at a later date by using the context menu “Change
PS Properties”.
Define the required seams by using the dialog and store them by using the
function ‘Templates’. This allows fast access to the different symbols.
Page C.14 - 1
Weld Symbols
Weld Style The style used for displaying the weld seams.
Layer The weld seam is inserted on the selected layer.
Thickness Top Side Here, you can overwrite the value of the welding
thickness of the style to create different thicknesses with
identical default settings.
Thickness Bottom Side Here, you can overwrite the value of the welding
thickness of the style to create different thicknesses with
identical default settings.
Scale Indicates the scale used for displaying the inserted weld
symbol in the drawing.
Click this button to insert weld symbols. For this purpose,
select the start point of the guideline and the insertion point of
the flag.
Click this button to insert a weld seam. For this purpose,
select the start and the end point of the weld seam and the
weld seam will be created with the specified style.
Click this button to attach a weld flag at an existing weld
seam. Select an existing weld seam and then specify the
insertion position of the weld flag.
Click this button to attach another guideline at a weld flag.
First select an existing weld flag and then draw the new
reference arrow to its target point.
Page C.14 - 2
Weld Symbols
Create Group A new group is formed out of the two component parts, unless
it already exists
Treat as one If this option has been activated in the CAD system the group
is set on this selection mode.
With Welds The weld seams are integrated into the group as well.
Min. Length A weld seam created using this command may not be shorter
than the indicated length.
Gap The minimum gap between these parts is specified. If the gap
is bigger than the specified value, the parts will not be welded.
The value should not be equal 0 to avoid problems with
tolerances.
Page C.14 - 3
Weld Symbols
Weld Style Use this box to select the style that has to be applied for the
display.
Page C.14 - 4
Weld Symbols
Click this button to specify the special settings for the lower
side of the weld symbol (lower weld seam).
Page C.14 - 5
Weld Symbols
Page C.14 - 6
Weld Symbols
Page C.14 - 7
Weld Symbols
Style Management
In this part of the dialog, your weld styles are maintained. You can create new
styles, load styles, update or delete styles.
Press the above symbol to create a new weld style. The style
then will be stored as *.sty file with the default settings in the
directory for weld styles. Now you can work with this style on
all other pages of this dialog.
Page C.14 - 8
Weld Symbols
Page C.14 - 9
Weld Symbols
Page C.14 - 10
Short 2D manually
Since shapes are shown in full scale during detailing, they may sometimes be
very long and not fit in the drawing.
Under certain circumstances, you might deliberately want to have some “out-of-
scale” shapes (lengthwise) in your drawing, e.g., if large areas of the
components do not have any drill holes or similar features.
This command allows you to shorten finished shapes in a way that areas with
many details remain unchanged and a break is inserted in an insignificant area.
The figure below shows the original shape and then the shortened display
(slightly enlarged).
Select this command and you will be first prompted for the shape to be
shortened which you have to click. Then you are prompted for the starting and
end point of the shortening, which you can either enter or pick. If you press the
ESC-key instead, the shortening is automatically determined and carried out, as
it is the case for detailing.
If you want to dimension the shape manually later, you can then consider the
shortening as well.
Note: In some cases it may be that the command doesn’t work as it should. In
this case, check whether the drawing elements you want to treat are blocks
(which cannot be dissolved). You first have to dissolve these blocks before you
can go on.
Page C.15 - 1
Short 2D manually
Page C.15 - 2
2D-Cutout
C.16 2D-Cutout
Using this command, you can cut any 2D lines at a polyline at the same time.
After selecting the command, you have to pick the points of the polyline. The
same command functions are available as when drawing a polyline.
Then, all of the lines extending past the polyline are cut off at this line.
When you want to use this function to cut out “intelligent” ProSteel 3D-2D-
objects (such as shapes after detailing), you first have to explode them into
AutoCAD-lines. However, don’t forget that after that the objects have lost their
properties.
Page C.16 - 1
2D-Cutout
Page C.16 - 2
Hole Display
Page C.17 - 1
Hole Display
Permits loading the current style definition from a style file; all
current definitions of the current style will be overwritten.
Click on this button to add a new entry at the end of the list
that can be processed.
Click on this button to remove the selected entry from the list.
Page C.17 - 2
Hole Display
Min. Dm The minimum diameter from which on the selected display will
be used.
Max. Dm The maximum diameter up to which the selected display will
be used.
Visible Here, you select the block to be used for displaying the
different hole types Normal, Countersunk, Step and Threaded
Hole if the hole is a visible hole in the drawing.
Hidden You select the block to be used for displaying the different
hole types Normal, Countersunk, Step and Threaded Hole if
the hole is a hidden hole in the drawing.
Page C.17 - 3
Hole Display
Style Management
In this part of the dialog, your hole styles are maintained. You can create new
styles, load, update and delete styles.
Page C.17 - 4
Hole Display
Page C.17 - 5
Hole Display
Page C.17 - 6
Automatic 2D-Cut
This function helps you to define 2D-cuts in components of the model. When
detailing, these cuts can be displayed and dimensioned automatically as
separate details. You may exactly define where cuts are required unless they
had been inserted automatically during modelling (see ->'Stiffener' command).
This function doesn't create the cut itself. You only define where, which direction
and how deep a cut has to be displayed later. In contrast to the manual cuts
which are inserted in a finished detail by means of the command->'Insert 2D-
cut', here you have the advantage of automatic positioning and dimensioning of
the cuts. They will be up-dated together with a drawing-update.
Add Cut
After having loaded the function, you first have to select the shape, where a cut
is to be inserted. Then, you have to click a point on the cutting plane. The
cutting plane will always run through this point perpendicular to the center line.
Finally, you are asked for depth and direction of cut, which will be defined by
clicking on another point. On one hand, you indicate the view direction of the cut
and on the other hand, you determine its depth (this point will also be
perpendicular to the center line). The resulting cutting planes will be displayed
dynamically during selection for control reasons.
The depth of the cut decides how much of the components situated behind the
cutting plane is to be displayed.
Page C.18 - 1
Automatic 2D-Cut
Modification of Cut
Cuts can be modified or deleted from Shape Properties.
Actual ... From Here, you see the number of cuts existing in the shape as well
as the number of the current cut.
Active If this field is checked, the cut will be taken into account during
detailing. It is possible to exclude a cut without having to
delete it.
Cut Depth Here, the depth of the cut can be modified. Alternatively, this
can be done by using the AutoCAD-grips on the cut-symbol
which are displayed when the cut is selected.
Page C.18 - 2
Automatic 2D-Cut
Zone/Create Cut These options haven’t any meaning here. They are provided
for ProConcrete 3D.
Click on this button to delete the selected cut from the shape.
If you defined more than one cut, you can change to the
previous cut by using this button.
Page C.18 - 3
Automatic 2D-Cut
Page C.18 - 4
D Verschiedenes
Miscellanous
Miscellanous
Page D - 2
User-Defined Component Parts
It may be that you don’t want to display detailed component parts, but you need
the parts list information nevertheless. Or, you want to display certain elements,
which have not been created with ProSteel 3D, as a block and you want their
parts list data in your model as well.
By using the special shape command, you can add parts list information to any
existing component parts. You only have to select the parts in question.
After having selected the command, you can select the component parts directly
or you can create a block from these parts by pressing ESC. Then, you select
the parts and define the insertion point of the block.
Here, you can enter your parts list data and then, this part will be recognized as
ProSteel 3D component part.
You can modify this property using the properties command. You can use it at
positioning and in the parts list as well. However, a 2D-depiction cannot be
generated when no volume parts are contained.
Page D.1 - 1
User-Defined Component Parts
By using the special shape management of ProSteel 3D, you can add your own
custom shapes to the program which will then be processed like pre-defined
standard shapes.
These special shapes can be saved in any number of catalogues containing any
number of shapes, i.e., you can establish same sorting as with standard shapes.
The selection menu then shows catalogue names as a shape type and the
shapes contained in each catalogue appear as shape size, making it easy to
choose between different system shapes.
You can create special shapes as combination of existing shapes or by using a
drawn cross-section or a variant (qualitative generation instruction) with
corresponding data base.
These are two examples of possible special shapes. The left shape was drawn
as a cross-section and then stored as a special shape, the right one is a
combination of two U-shapes.
Page D.1 - 2
User-Defined Component Parts
In addition, you can store each shape in three different display modes (low,
normal and high – which must be created individually). You thereby avoid
having to deal with a confusing number of lines when working with rather
complex shapes like in the left example, but you can show the complete shape if
needed.
Nonetheless, you can always select the ProSteel 3D standard display modes
(only center line, envelope, etc.) without having to change any parameters.
Here, you see the dialog for special shape management. It is organized in a tree
structure and consists of 4 main tabs for the different types of special shapes.
Creation of a Catalogue
Select one of the tabs to layout a catalogue and use the right mouse button. A
subordinate menu is displayed offering you the option to layout a catalogue. A
subordinate directory is created and you can edit the name.
Page D.1 - 3
User-Defined Component Parts
Please note that until now you only created a blank cover that has to be filled
with creating a resolution. It is not before then that the special shape has been
filed. If you don’t do that, the blank shape cover will be removed at next
selection.
After the layout of a blank special shape definition has been affected, you have
to define a resolution. Select the shape and use the right mouse button again.
Here, you select the desired resolution. If resolutions have already been defined
for the special shape, you can modify the defined resolution using this method.
Definition of Cross-Section
Defining the closed and the not crossing contour of the cross-section normally
creates a special shape. Depending on the setting, this can be done using poly-
lines or individual lines and arc segments.
Alternatively, you can define special shapes of regular wall thickness (e.g. cold
rolling shapes) by means of an open poly-line and by specifying the thickness.
See ‘Settings’.
Page D.1 - 4
User-Defined Component Parts
After selection, choose your outer contour and the possibly existing inner
contours. You can utilise any number of inner contours that must not cross the
outer contour and must not have any intersection points between each other.
Now, the program automatically calculates the possible standard insertion points
of this shape (center line, envelope). Finally, you can still define a center line
which can be used alternatively and further insertion points.
After end of the geometrical definitions, now the properties dialog for specifying
the parts list data will be displayed.
Page D.1 - 5
User-Defined Component Parts
Settings
Selection Mode Here, you specify whether the contour selection has to be
effected via an existing poly-line or via selection of individual
segments.
Shape Thickness When you have selected an open poly-line, the contour will
be created along the poly-line with the indicated thickness.
The poly-line is the neutral fibre.
Shape System Here, you select whether the following created shapes have to
be available only for steel (ProSteel 3D), only for concrete
(ProConcrete 3D) or for both applications.
Page D.1 - 6
User-Defined Component Parts
Roof-Wall-Shapes
Combination Shapes
Combination shapes are not created using poly-lines or line elements. You have
to arrange the shapes in the WCS in the way they have to be built later for
definition. The best is to apply short shape pieces (e.g. with a length of 100 mm)
in the cross-section. Please note, however, that they mustn’t be mirrored.
Page D.1 - 7
User-Defined Component Parts
Create Variant
Please also read through the section about the standard method via a drawn
poly-line, because basic information about special shapes is not described once
again here.
To create a variant, you have to create a new file tab in the special shapes
directory (...\sopro) first. The name of this file tab simultaneously defines the
“shape type”, which will be displayed later in the selection lists for shape
selection.
Now, this file tab has to contain an ASCII-file with the name rules.dat. This
file contains the variant description and the corresponding DBASE-file (*.dbf),
the name of which can be freely determined. In the variant file you enter this
name explicitly.
Hint: Please note that there mustn’t be a common special shape file (*.psp) in
this tab. You can create a shape of the same type designation only via the
standard method or via a variant.
All commands in this file have to be entered in capital letters, and the order
specified here has to be kept. The values for x and y can either be pre-defined
or be values from the database.
If you want to apply a value from the database, you define continuous variables
$1,$2,$3 etc. for this purpose, which will then be replaced by the values of the
data records. You can indicate all three-resolution variants in one file.
Page D.1 - 8
User-Defined Component Parts
For the description of the polygon segments, commands for lines and arcs are
at your disposal which can be described with relative or absolute coordinates.
Page D.1 - 9
User-Defined Component Parts
Normally, the special shape is described using one or more closed poly-lines.
However, an easier description can be selected for thin-wall-shapes (cold-rolled
shapes in most cases).
You can specify the wall thickness d by indicating the command THICKNESS=d
and only have to describe the neutral fibre (open polygon) of the cross-section.
The program then automatically calculates the required closed polygon.
In the database, a common DBASE-file, you only have to file the data records of
the different variables and some information about the parts list.
Page D.1 - 10
User-Defined Component Parts
Standard weld shapes can have any plates at any positions. You can create box
shapes, U-shapes or others using these shapes. The shapes have a constant
cross-section and can be adapted via the slope.
I-form weld shapes consist of three plates that are organized like an I-shape.
These plates can b e individually adjusted. However, the greatest advantage of
this kind of weld shapes is that the web plate can be individually adjusted. Even
very complex weld constructions can thus be depicted via a shape.
Page D.1 - 11
User-Defined Component Parts
Here, you can specify and change the shape contour. In addition, you can add
plates and determine their position either relative to the origin or relative to other
plates.
When you leave the dialog with the OK-button and enter the parts list data, the
weld shape will be created.
Page D.1 - 12
User-Defined Component Parts
Page D.1 - 13
User-Defined Component Parts
Here, you can specify the dimensions, item number and the material of the three
plates. You cannot configure as you like but you don’t have to place the shapes
in their position.
Page D.1 - 14
BlockCenter
D.2 BlockCenter
Here, you see the two BlockCenter dialogs (navigation dialog on the left,
selection dialog on the right) together with a ProSteel 3D-drawing:
Page D.2 - 1
BlockCenter
Very similar to the DetailCenter, the BlockCenter, too, consists of dialogs which
may either be docked on the left or on the right of AutoCAD or which may be
positioned anywhere on the screen.
When the function is loaded, two dialogs are displayed. The dialog on the left
only serves for navigation, whereas the dialog on the right serves for selection of
the blocks. Then, all functions are loaded via context menus of the right mouse
button, except for the basic settings of the BlockCenter. These are reached via
the tool button on the upper left of navigation dialog.
If one of the two dialogs isn't needed for current work, it can be hidden
temporarily. It can be activated again by means of the remaining dialog.
BlockCenter function isn't finished unless both dialogs are closed or navigation
dialog is closed by means of the "Close"-button (x) on the upper right of the
dialog.
Navigation Dialog
In a tree structure, all existing block directories or groups are listed in navigation
dialog. You can either choose a display reflecting the directory structure of your
hard disk or a user-defined display. Sorting of the user-defined display can be
designed freely to a large extent and then saved as a template (see function -
>'Template'). In addition, you may set different display filters.
If a block group (e.g. system construction XYZ) has been selected, you also
could hide this dialog to gain more space for construction on your screen.
Page D.2 - 2
BlockCenter
Selection Dialog
In selection dialog, all blocks existing in the selected directory (or in the selected
block group) are listed. They are displayed together with the drawing name and
a preview. Of course it depends on the settings of sorting and filters in
navigation dialog which block drawings are finally offered for selection.
The figures of preview are created by AutoCAD during saving of a drawing and
show this drawing including current zoom setting at the moment of saving. Apart
from scaling of size, you don't have any further influence on the display within
the BlockCenter.
Database
In contrast to other ProSteel 3D-functions, where all required data are stored in
the drawing, BlockCenter is working with an additional database. The advantage
of this database is that the blocks, especially if there are a great number of
blocks, available at once after the function has been loaded. Neither a
prolonged search in the directories nor a query of drawing data is necessary any
more. In addition, user has a greater influence which drawings are integrated
into the BlockCenter and which ones are not integrated.
The database format was developed for the BlockCenter and permits fast
access to all data required for sorting and selection. The additional content of
the database (user-defined database fields) can be designed as you like. You
may decide yourself which data fields are used to classify your blocks for
selection and search and how they have to be named.
Different properties of the block drawing are already taken from the drawing
when a block is created (or even at a later time) and entered in previously
defined database fields. Some search criteria will be available at once. If these
fields are not required, they can of course be removed from the database.
Page D.2 - 3
BlockCenter
There must be blocks contained in the BlockCenter to be able to work with it.
Blocks are individual drawings existing on the hard disk, which then may be
inserted into other drawings. It is possible to insert existing drawings or to create
new blocks by means of the BlockCenter.
Creation
Select the option directory structure as display for the creation of a block. Now
check the directory where the block has to be stored in navigation dialog and
select the entry create block via context menu.
Select all components of the model which have to be adopted in the block and
pick the main insertion point of the block. Finally, you are asked for the
alignment of the block to allow insertion with correct alignment afterwards: When
you select ESC, the correct UCS will be used. Alternatively, it is possible to pick
a point on the later x-axis as well as a point on the x/y-plane.
Please note, however, that at later insertion the block will automatically always
be aligned in a way that the coordinate system pre-defined here is
corresponding with the current drawing UCS. It is however possible to define
alternative insertion points and alignments.
Now, a new drawing will be created and displayed containing the selected
component parts. This drawing can be modified further as you like: you can e.g.
add other ProSteel- and AutoCAD-elements or additional insertion points.
Hint: As long as this drawing has not been saved, it cannot be adopted into the
database. It is possible to cancel block creation.
It is not before the block drawing has been stored once – which can also be
done when you quit this function – that the block will be finally adopted into the
database and be displayed as preview in selection dialog.
Selection
Select an appropriate sorting in the settings and then check the desired block
group in navigation dialog by clicking on it. Depending on the setting, this may
either be a directory or any user-defined sorting criteria.
Within navigation dialog, you may scroll up and down the tree structure, as you
are accustomed to doing in Windows-Explorer.
Page D.2 - 4
BlockCenter
If you click on a new entry, selection dialog will be filled with small preview
figures as well as with the file names of available blocks. Only those blocks are
displayed, which have been adopted into the database and which meet the
possibly activated filter condition. There may be other drawings included in the
directory.
Select the desired block by clicking the preview figure in selection dialog. Above
the selection list, additional information on the selected block will be displayed
which can also be defined freely.
Modification
When you want to open an existing block for working or looking on it, select the
entry Edit block in the context menu after block selection.
The block drawing now is opened as new drawing that can be modified. If you
want to keep the modification, the drawing has of course to be stored.
Delete
Select the entry delete block in the context menu after block selection to remove
a block from the database. Now, you can determine whether you only want to
delete the entry in the database or also the complete drawing on your hard disk.
If you don't delete the drawing, it is possible to adopt it again into the database
at a later time.
Any additionally entered data of this block are of course lost because they have
been stored in the database and not in the drawing. Additional insertion points,
are kept, because they are stored in the drawing as visible objects.
Page D.2 - 5
BlockCenter
At first, select the desired block in selection dialog and then, click on the entry
insert block in the context menu. Now, you can see a preview of the block,
„hanging on the cross-hairs“, and you have to click on the insertion point of the
block.
This insertion point is the main insertion point of the block determined during
block creation. Alignment is effected in a way that the block coordinate system,
which was also determined during block creation is corresponding with the
current UCS of the target drawing. Press ESC-key instead, if you want to cancel
the insertion.
Page D.2 - 6
BlockCenter
Page D.2 - 7
BlockCenter
The basic settings of the BlockCenter, and especially the kind of sorting, can be
pre-defined in the pre-settings. An appropriate sorting avoids losing track if there
is a greateer number of blocks.
When you click on the button on the upper left of navigation dialog, the following
dialog box will be opened:
Page D.2 - 8
BlockCenter
Group Display
Preview Here, you can set the height of preview windows in the display
dialog.
Directory... In navigation dialog, the block groups are displayed depending
on the directory structure on the hard disk. You always have to
use this sorting for the creation of new blocks, because
otherwise you won't be able to determine a target directory for
the block file.
User... It is possible to create an individual sorting for the navigation
dialog depending on the contents of the user-defined
database fields. Sorting then will be made in an hierarchic
structure in the order which is displayed in the list on the right.
ARROW RIGHT Click on this button to add a property field to the list. Then, a
dialog box will be opened where the existing database fields
are displayed. Select the desired field out of this list.
ARROW LEFT Click on this button to remove the checked field from the list.
Display All At user-defined sorting, the blocks, which cannot be clearly
assigned, will be displayed as well. This is the case when the
corresponding field doesn't exist in the database or when it is
empty. Then, the block will be assigned to a standard field of
the sorting level in question.
Incomplete At all sorting, only those blocks will be displayed the database
fields of which have not been completely filled in. Thus, it is
easy for you to find out whether all database fields which are
used for a possible search exist with valid entries.
Page D.2 - 9
BlockCenter
User-defined Sorting
One important strength of the BlockCenter is the user-defined sorting according
to any user-defined criteria. Fur this purpose, you can define your own database
fields and fill them later with data of the corresponding block.
In the settings, you may now specify a hierarchy according to which the blocks
have to be displayed at a user-defined sorting. Here an example to make things
clear:
To avoid slightly differing entries for the same thing, all data existing for this field
will be displayed in a list at data input. Assignments can be made, too. This
helps you to avoid that once you enter e.g. HEA140 and once you enter
HE140A.
Page D.2 - 10
BlockCenter
Working with the database is divided into four essential parts: definition of data
fields, input of actual block data, maintenance of the database and use of the
data for display and filter.
Page D.2 - 11
BlockCenter
Field Name Here, you enter the field name of the new database field. Field
names always consist of capital letters (small letters will be
automatically transformed) and already existing names are
ignored.
It is useful to enter reasonable field names as these are
displayed in the selection dialogs for sorting and search. For
each field a description may be added as auxiliary text for the
other dialogs.
Dialog Text Here, you specify the labelling of the input field for field data in
the input dialog for block data.
Description Here, you may specify a describing auxiliary text for the
database field, which will be displayed in the other dialogs at
selection of this field.
As you should use concise and easy field names, you can add
more information to the field by this way.
Display: The data of the database field will be displayed in selection
dialog after selection of a block. This helps limiting the display
to some essential fields in the case that there is a great
number of data fields.
Group Data
Text Field Data are evaluated as mere text. Sorting is made in
alphabetical order so that the entry "11" would be sorted in
front of the entry "2".
Integer Data are evaluated as integer. Here, the entry "B2" would be
sorted in front of the entry "A11" because the numerical part
has priority.
Floating Point Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is used,
the units inch and foot will be displayed correctly.
Floating Point (fix) Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is
used, the units will not be displayed in inch and foot (e.g. for
angles).
INSERT
Click on this button to add the defined database field to the database or
to modify an existing one.
Page D.2 - 12
BlockCenter
Please note that it is not possible to modify a field name. If you select an
existing field and you modify the field name, the program assumes that a new
field has to be created.
DELETE
Click on this button to remove the selected database field from the
database. Please note, however, that all existing block data referring to
this field will be deleted as well.
MODIFY
Click on this button to take over your entries or to modify already existing
data.
Page D.2 - 13
BlockCenter
Page D.2 - 14
BlockCenter
Update of Database
Click on the entry Update database in the context menu of navigation dialog to
update an existing database. In this case, the program searches for drawing
files, which don’t exist any more in the block directory, and removes them from
the database. At the same time, new drawing files and sub-directories will be
adopted into the database.
At update of the database, the entered data and modifications of data fields are
kept. You may define via pre-settings what has to be done with the standard
fields during update.
When the option 'Don't replace standard fields' was selected, no entries in the
standard fields will be modified, i.e. new drawings won't be examined either.
When the option 'Always replace standard fields' was selected, all drawings will
be searched for standard data and any possible modifications will be lost.
When the option 'Only replace blank standard fields' was selected, newly added
drawings will be examined, as their standard fields are still blank. All others
won't be taken into consideration.
When some standard fields were removed from the database, they won't be
restored during update. By means of update, it is, however, possible to make
sure that modifications in the block files will cause an update of the remaining
standard fields. The program assumes that deleted standard fields won't be
required any more.
Please note that each drawing in question has to be opened for update in order
to determine the drawing data. This process may require some time until it is
finished.
Page D.2 - 15
BlockCenter
Display Filter
Another strength of the BlockCenter is the display filter according to certain
search criteria. Before the blocks are displayed in the selected sorting, the
program first checks whether each single block meets the filter conditions on the
basis of its database entries.
For this purpose, logical links may be created between the existing data fields
and their contents. There is no limit concerning the complexity of the query.
Different filter combinations can be stored as templates and then defined as
activated filter in the settings for the sorting.
Boolean operators
Simple queries only consist of one comparing condition such as e.g. whole
pattern = 4. It is, however, the logical link between several comparing
conditions, which is really interesting.
Therefore, you may specify a logical operator by means of which the next
inserted comparing condition shall be linked with the existing condition. To
facilitate input, previous pairs are automatically put into brackets, in case of a
change of the operator. It is possible to create search queries such as (A AND
B) OR (A AND C) in an easy way. A, B and C here are variables of simple
comparing conditions of data field, operator and content.
An existing term can be manually put into brackets, too, if the condition is not in
pairs. The following condition serves as example: ((A AND B) OR C) AND D.
Page D.2 - 16
BlockCenter
Define Filter
To define a filter term click on the entry Edit display filter in the context menu of
navigation dialog. The following dialog box will be opened:
Page D.2 - 17
BlockCenter
> Right Possible block data (contents of the field) of the selected data
field in a dropdown-list. Impossible comparing conditions will
be avoided.
After all three components of a comparing condition were preset; you can add
this condition to the complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT button.
Depending on the existing conditions and selected logical links, appropriate
brackets are set by the program.
OPERATOR AND
Click on this button to select the logical operator AND as logical link for
the following comparing condition.
OPERATOR OR
Click on this button to select the logical operator OR as logical link for the
following comparing condition.
BRACKET
Click on this button to force the program to put the existing filter
conditions into brackets manually.
Brackets are always necessary when the complete result of a (partial)
condition has to be linked with another, as the combination of (A AND B) OR C
is different to A AND (B OR C).
INSERT
Click on this button to add the current comparing condition to the
complete filter condition.
Page D.2 - 18
BlockCenter
DELETE
Click on this button to delete the comparing condition, which was added
last.
DELETE ALL
Click on this button to delete the complete filter condition.
Page D.2 - 19
BlockCenter
Page D.2 - 20
Roof/Wall Panels
This command allows you to divide any surface with roof-wall shapes and
display them in colour. You choose orientation and grid spacing. The program
then determines necessary cut-outs in the shapes.
You can work with all shapes, including special shapes and plates. Layout is
done on the active UCS plane. It is recommended to use a top view of the UCS
plane.
Surface Layout
To divide a wall surface by means of front shapes, outer bordering of the
surface as well as possible inner cuts have to exist as poly-lines first.
After having loaded the function, click the Outer Poly-Line of the Surface first
and then the direction determining line for alignment. Now, pick the Origin of
Division and the following dialog appears for further specifications:
Page D.3 - 1
Roof/Wall Panels
Max. Length Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid length (i.e. the
lengths of the shapes to be installed).
Grid Width Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid width. If the grid
width exceeds the shape width, the layout will show gaps - if
the grid width is smaller, you will have overlaps. In the
neighbouring input field, the shape width of the currently
selected shape is displayed (see ‘Shapes’ tab).
Depth Here, you enter the distance between layout and active UCS
plane. By entering positive values, you move the surface
along the positive Z-axis of UCS.
Offset Top Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length
at the upper end. If you enter a positive value, the shape is
shortened and a gap is shown. If you enter a negative value,
the shape is extended and overlaps with he next grid element.
Offset Bottom Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length
at the lower end. If you enter a positive value, the shape is
shortened and a gap is shown. If you enter a negative value,
the shape is extended and overlaps with the previous grid
element.
Offset Side Here, you enter the dimension by which the shape insertion
points to be moved horizontally from the center of the grid.
Dynamic The command automatically reacts to a modification of the
polygon.
Cut If this field is checked, the shapes, which are longer or wider
than the outer poly-line, are cut at this poly-line.
Offset Here you enter how grid lines are moved against each other in
longitudinal direction. No offset means that they are not
moved.
Centered offset means that they are moved in a way that a
new line begins in the middle of the previous line (“laid brick
pattern”).
Dimensions mean that the lines are offset against each other
by a value you entered in the neighbouring input field.
Page D.3 - 2
Roof/Wall Panels
Colour Normal Select a colour for all shapes not being cut by entering the
AutoCAD colour code. The colour can also be selected by
clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the right.
Colour Cut Select a colour for all shapes being cut by entering the
AutoCAD colour code. The colour can also be selected by
clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the right.
Original Colour Using this option resets the colours to their original values
after the dialog function has been finished.
Shape Selection
Choose the component parts to be used for installation on the second page.
Shapes Unless having checked ‚Use Poly-Plates’ field, you select here
the shape to be used for installation. You can select the shape
according to the shape categories in the lists.
Page D.3 - 3
Roof/Wall Panels
Poly-Cuts
You can enter additional cut outs into a surface at which the shapes have to be
cut as well. In order to do this, the poly-lines of the cut outs are required which
can, however, still be drawn when the function is activated.
Poly-Cuts Here, you can see the number of additional cut outs existing at
the moment.
Page D.3 - 4
Roof/Wall Panels
By clicking this button, you can insert a cut out into the
division. Click the poly-line of the cut out in order to do so.
If the poly-line doesn’t yet exist, you can draw it directly before
loading this option.
By clicking this button, you can delete the currently selected
cut out and close the surface at this position.
If you have several cut outs in the division, you can select the
required cut out by pressing ‘<<’ and ’>>‘.
Here the example of a gable wall automatically lined with wall facing elements.
The dark surfaces show the elements that do not have to be cut out; the light
surfaces have to be cut out. In addition, 2 openings have been inserted.
Page D.3 - 5
Roof/Wall Panels
Page D.3 - 6
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
Page D.4 - 1
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
Apart from manual input, you can save the definitions of thread bolts in a data
base (*.dbf) as well. This database has to be indicated in your configuration file
of ProSteel 3D. The entries then are displayed there and are available for
selection.
Group Distances
Spacing Here you enter the distance between the individual insertion
points.
Front Offset Here you enter the distance from shape start to the first
insertion point.
End Offset Here you enter the distance from last insertion point to the end
of the shape.
Page D.4 - 2
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
Insertion Rules Since in most cases the length of a shape does not coincide
with the settings, you can define the rules for distribution here.
End Dimensions – The margin dimensions are exactly
adhered to and the internal distance is averaged.
Inner Values – The inner values are adhered to and the
margin dimensions are averaged.
Centre Inner Values - The inner values are adhered to and the
rest is evenly distributed at the front and at the back.
At Plate Drilling – This option is especially meant for
distribution of anchor bolts or similar things at base plates.
The parts are aligned at the existing drillings and fixed below a
plate.
Hole Dia. You enter the diameter of marking or nipple hole.
Slot Length You enter the depth of marking or nipple hole.
Group Options
Shape Center The markings are attached to the center of the selected
shapes.
Create Marks.. The marking or nipple holes are attached.
Lower The component parts are attached below the plate.
No Detailing The component parts inserted here are not detailed in the
DetailCenter.
Insert Blocks The selected weld bolts are attached.
Create Group The shapes and bolts form a group.
In Part List The component parts attached with this function are added to
the parts list.
In Bolt List The component parts attached with this function are added to
the bolt list.
Group Dimensions
Dia Bolt diameter
Length Bolt length
Bottom Dia Diameter of the bolt’s base
Bottom Length of the bolt’s base
Page D.4 - 3
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
Group Others
Name Bolt name in the parts list
List List of available entries in the selected bolt database
Here you see two examples for the distribution of welded bolts on shapes:
Page D.4 - 4
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
The proceeding is identical as well. The only difference consists in the fact that
no generated parts are inserted but the individually specified block. Therefore
this is a very flexible command.
The options concerning the distribution are identical with the distribution of
thread bolts. So you can refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Hole Dia Sign You can specify a code for the drill holes to be created. This
code serves for selection of special NC-programs being able
to recognize this code.
Block path This is the path to the block to be inserted.
List List of saved blocks from the database
Page D.4 - 5
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
As it is the case with many other ProSteel 3D functions, here too it is possible to
make some standard default settings directly under ‘Assignments’ for the
component parts to be inserted.
Page D.4 - 6
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
Page D.4 - 7
Dispatch Bolts / Blocks
Page D.4 - 8
Auxiliary Tools
Min. Volume Minimal collision volume, from which on the collision is seized
as such. The display is made in drawing units (such as e.g.
mm^3). This avoids that your attention is distracted from
important things by collisions, which are due to minimal
tolerances.
Display Scaling Factor by which the zoom window is increased when you
zoom on the found parts to get a survey on the whole
situation.
Actual/Max. Display of the current collision solid and the total amount of
solids found.
Page D.5 - 1
Auxiliary Tools
Use this button to select the previous found collision solid for
examination.
Page D.5 - 2
Auxiliary Tools
Options
During collision check, you can specify which component parts have to be
checked against each other. A filter is available for the selection of the parts to
be checked.
Shapes can be checked for collisions with shapes, plates, bolts and
bodies. The collision volume is only displayed for the selected
pairings.
Plates can be checked for collisions with plates, bolts and bodies.
The collision volume is only displayed for the selected
pairings.
Bolts can be checked for collisions with bolts and bodies. The
mounting space of the bolts which can be specified in bolt
style can be used as well. The collision volume is only
displayed for the selected pairings.
Bodies Bodies can be checked against other bodies. The collision
volume is only displayed for the selected pairings.
Page D.5 - 3
Auxiliary Tools
Use this function to calculate the center of gravity of any parts. Select the parts
in question and the calculation is started. A ball in the model and numerically in
the dialog line visually displays the result.
There, you obtain information about the defined volume, the exact coordinates
of the center of gravity (in world coordinates) as well as the total weight of the
parts.
Please note that different specific weights are not taken into consideration. The
program assumes that all parts are made of steel.
Page D.5 - 4
Auxiliary Tools
Using this command you can unfold any kind of cutout shape and insert its
development immediately into the active UCS plane.
When you select this command, the following dialog box opens.
Resolution Max. Indicate the resolution of the unfolding. The higher the
indicated value, the more detailed is the scan of the
component searching for any possible outlets or notches. The
greatest acceptable value is 360.
Use ACIS Switches the component part from unfolding to ACIS. The
result may be an increase of accuracy.
Inner Contour The inner contour of tube shapes is unfolded as well.
Page D.5 - 5
Auxiliary Tools
Creating Development
After you have exited the dialog, you have to click the shape that is to be
unwound or developed. The desired operation is then supplied “sticking to the
crosshairs”. Position it freely anywhere in the model and process it further if
desired.
If you have selected ‘Inner Contour’, both developments are sticking to the
crosshairs in the form of two properly positioned blocks. Position them anywhere
in the model and then process them individually.
Page D.5 - 6
Auxiliary Tools
Use this function to simulate moving of any parts along a line, poly-line or spline.
This can be applied for visualizations or to check whether parts can be
assembled. The objects are moved along a guideline in a set speed. In addition,
you can choose whether you only want to move the parts or whether they have
to be rotated as well.
Resolution Enter here into how many parts the guide lines have to be
divided regularly. The higher the value, the more regular and
the more fluent the simulated movement will be.
Delay Wait in milliseconds after each single movement. This value
controls the speed of the simulated movement.
Move and.. The objects are not only moved along the guide line, but also
rotated around this line. This means, if you have a “sharp
bend” in the line, the parts will be rotated along this bend.
After pressing the OK button, seize the guide line first. This may be a line, poly-
line, spline or an arc. Then seize the parts and the simulation starts.
Page D.5 - 7
Auxiliary Tools
Batch Processing
To avoid having to process each drawing individually, batch processing is
available if you have many drawings. All drawings of a directory are processed
automatically and the converted drawings are saved in another directory.
Source Directory Enter the directory containing the drawings you want to have
converted automatically.
Target Directory Enter the directory where you want to save all converted
drawings.
Purge Drawing Each drawing is purged before it is saved.
Page D.5 - 8
Auxiliary Tools
Page D.5 - 9
Auxiliary Tools
Batch Processing
To avoid having to process each drawing individually, batch processing is
available if you have many drawings. All drawings of a directory are processed
automatically and the converted drawings are saved in another directory.
Source Directory Enter the directory containing the drawings you want to have
converted automatically.
Target Directory Enter the directory where you want to save all converted
drawings.
Purge Drawing Each drawing is purged before it is saved.
Recursive Drawings in sub directories of the selected directories are
processed as well.
Page D.5 - 10
Auxiliary Tools
With a call to this function you can convert the ADT shapes into ProSteel 3D
shapes for further use of the ProSteel3D manipulation functionality for steel
construction.
After a call to the function you should choose all the ADT shapes that should be
converted. If ProSteel 3D finds a corresponding shape in its database then the
ADT shape is deleted and is replaced with the suitable ProSteel 3D shape.
Page D.5 - 11
Auxiliary Tools
Page D.5 - 12
Add Effective Static Analysis Lines
Analysis display allows you to control and to work on the effective static analysis
lines of the shapes to get an optimum output for translation to static analysis
programs. From the individual interfaces, you can force the output of analysis
display. The effective lines defined by you will be output instead of the center
lines of the shapes.
If no modifications were made here, the effective lines correspond to center
lines. This function offers you, the possibility to modify the effective lines
independently of the insertion of a shape to balance e.g. eccentricities, if these
have no importance for calculation or to close open nodes.
Effective Lines
After loading the function, you first have to select the objects that are to be
switched to analysis display. Having made this selection, you only see an
individual line of each shape, representing the effective static analysis line. The
different colours within the line help you to recognize whether the end is
connected with another shape (representing a node) or whether it is open (e.g. a
cantilever).
If the end is open and not a cantilever, then you are dealing with eccentric
shapes in most cases and you could create a closed system by means of this
function.
It is possible to modify the effective lines manually by using the offered options
of this function or by modifying them via AutoCAD grips.
Page D.6 - 1
Add Effective Static Analysis Lines
Check colours...: If this field is checked, the colours of the represented shape
ends will be verified automatically, every time the function is
loaded. See button ->'Update colours'
Check connect...: If this field is checked, the different parts will be verified
automatically whether they are connected with each other or
not, every time the function is loaded. Display is adapted
accordingly.
Hide ... If these fields are checked, the selected objects will be hidden
to provide a clearer view.
You can hide work frames, structural elements (auxiliary lines
of structural elements), polyplates, bolts and connecting parts
such as web angles, etc.
Shorten offsets: If this field is checked, the “cantilevered” ends at a node will
be shortened, so that there will be no offsets.
You can specify the maximum possible offset in the
corresponding input field Max. Offset. All values larger than
the actual value e.g. a cantilever and will not be taken into
account.
Page D.6 - 2
Add Effective Static Analysis Lines
Page D.6 - 3
Data Exchange
It is possible to send and receive data to and from other programs via the import
and export interfaces of ProSteel 3D. In most cases, these are 3D-constructions
of other CAD-programs or the static analysis systems of programs for static
analysis calculations.
The exchange takes place via a special file format defined by independent
standard committees like e.g. Deutscher Stahlbauverband DSTV (German
Association of Steel Construction) or even by the program manufacturers
themselves. The data to be exchanged are mostly saved as ASCII-text file;
therefore they are independent of the used operating systems. In case of
possible transfer problems they can be adapted with any text editor you like.
Additionally to the "acknowledged" formats, ProSteel 3D also has its own
exchange format based on a clear text file. This format exactly describes the
positioning and detailing of component parts, group structure and parts list or
part information.
Page D.7 - 1
Data Exchange
Page D.7 - 2
Data Exchange
Exchange lists can solve many problems occurring in the data exchange
between ProSteel 3D and other programs. Different designations are often used
for the same shape or material – especially when the files in question are
foreign formats, which are not subject to a common standard.
While it isn’t a problem for the human mind to recognize that the designation
HEA100 and HE-100A probably describe the same shape, this is a much bigger
problem for the computer.
Page D.7 - 3
Data Exchange
Page D.7 - 4
Data Exchange
Replace as Enter a new designation and insert it into the list. The program
doesn’t differentiate capitalization or the use of small initial
letters.
Since exchange designations can only be inserted, you have
to insert the new entry first and then delete the old one, if you
only want to modify an entry.
> Selection List Here, you will find the exchange designations of the ProSteel
3D designation selected on the left.
The first name in the list is the designation used during export
of a ProSteel 3D model.
INSERT By clicking this button, the new exchange designation
specified in the input field 'Replace' is assigned to the selected
ProSteel 3D designation.
DELETE By clicking this button, the selected exchange designation is
removed from the selected ProSteel 3D designation.
DELIVERY By clicking this button, the selected exchange designation is
selected for export and moved to the first position in the list.
Shapes Here, you can make the above-mentioned assignments for
shape designations.
Material Here, you can make the above-mentioned assignments for
material designations.
All all-internal names are displayed – no matter whether
exchange designations have been assigned or not.
Ready Only those internal names are displayed to which exchange
designations have already been assigned.
Open Only those internal names are displayed to which exchange
designations have not been assigned.
Group Others
File the file path of the current exchange list.
Content A short description of the content of the new exchange list or
of the list, which has been loaded at the very moment.
Add Names The exchange designations of the shape data base are
entered when an exchange list is created or completed.
Page D.7 - 5
Data Exchange
Dialog-Commands
LOAD
By clicking this button, you can load an exchange list. It is also possible to
import an exchange list in DBASE-format by selecting the file type in the
file selection dialog, which opens then.
DBASE-import is not available when you select the dialog via the interface
dialogs.
STORE
By clicking this button, you can store the current exchange list. It is
possible to export an exchange list in DBASE-format by selecting the file
type in the file selection dialog, which opens then.
DBASE-export is not available when you select the dialog via the interface
dialog.
NEW
By clicking this button, a new exchange list is created based on the shape
and material database of ProSteel 3D.
Thus, you obtain all available internal names and you can add the desired
exchange designations to them.
If the field 'Add Exchange Designation at New/Update' has been checked, the
exchange designations of the shape database are entered, too.
UPDATE
By clicking this button, new entries based on the shape or material
database of ProSteel 3D are added to the current exchange list.
Page D.7 - 6
Data Exchange
Page D.7 - 7
Data Exchange
The DBASE-file has to contain the following fields, which in general are chains
of signs. The fields 0-5 are absolutely necessary, the fields 6,7,... etc. can be
used as an option.
Since the DBASE-file only has a sequential structure of data records, whereas
the exchange lists are organized in a tree structure, this tree structure has to be
simulated by means of group-lines. Group lines only contain the fields 0-2,
shape or material lines contain only the fields 0 and 3,4,...
0 TYPE line type, (F) group line (S) shape entry (M) material entry
1 FAMILY shape type when shape group or "Material" when material group
2 FILE ProSteel 3D shape file (when material group: no entry necessary)
3 METRIC Internal ProSteel 3D designation metric
4 IMPERIAL Internal ProSteel 3D designation imperial (for material like field 3)
5 EXCHANGE exchange designation (1st list entry, is also export name)
6 IMPORT1 if need be, further exchange designation (2nd list entry)
7... n IMPORT2 ... n if need be, further exchange designations (next list entries)
(shape file) The DBASE-file with the shape data of the data directory of
ProSteel 3D. Here specified without path with name and extension.
(shape type) Type designation (e.g. DIN_HEA); the different sizes are the shape
entries up to the next group line.
Page D.7 - 8
Data Exchange
Import and export of the new ProSteel 3D interfaces like PXF or Product
Interface Steel Construction is affected via a common dialog box for all
interfaces, which will be described in this chapter.
In addition, the commands of formats like DSTV-NC or DSTV-PPS, which have
already existed for quite some time, are still available. These are described in a
separate chapter and cannot (yet) be loaded via the common dialog.
When the import or export command is loaded, a file selection dialog opens first,
where you can select the required interface format under File Type.
If an interface dialog is planned for the interface, this dialog appears in form of
individual pages in a dialog box that is identical for all formats. In addition, a
page for ’General Settings’ and/or ‘Conversion’ can be displayed where you can
enter data, which are independent of the corresponding interface.
The following figure shows the dialog box. In this example, 2 property pages for
”Product Interface Steel Construction“ of the DSTV (’Control Field’ and
‘Options’) have been inserted; in addition there is the common page ’General
Settings’ and/or ‘Conversion’.
Page D.7 - 9
Data Exchange
In the following chapters, you will find a description of the different interfaces
and of their property pages. In most cases, the corresponding manufacturers or
standard committees can obtain a description of the interface formats.
Dialog Commands
CONTINUE (OK)
By clicking this button, import or export will be continued, if the selected
interface command is waiting for further specifications or if the process has
been stopped for your information.
LIST
By clicking this button, you can select an existing exchange list for import
or export.
PROCESS
By clicking this button, you can process an existing exchange list for
import or export or select another list.
FILE
If you click this button, the read or created interface file will be displayed if
it is an ASCII-text file.
ERROR REPORT
By clicking this button, you can view an error report, if it is created by the
selected interface command. In this error report, you are e.g. informed
whether errors occurred in a read file or whether certain data cannot be
evaluated by ProSteel 3D.
Page D.7 - 10
Data Exchange
This command allows for importing data of other programs in ProSteel 3D via an
exchange file. In most cases, these data are 3D-models of other CAD-programs
or the static systems of programs for static calculations.
At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated
in the new arranged import dialog:
It is, however, possible that you will find already further formats in your ProSteel
3D version. The performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree)
can have been extended, too. Please refer to the up-dated hints on your
installation-CD.
Import Data
When this function is loaded, a file selection dialog opens where you can select
the required interface under File Type. Then, you select the file to be imported.
Depending on the interface, an interface dialog opens where you can make
further specifications concerning the data to be imported.
After file selection resp. after confirmation of import process in the dialog, the
data are evaluated and the ProSteel 3D model is created. Depending on the
complexity of the interface and on the volume of the data, this process may take
some time. You are, however, informed about the current state in the AutoCAD-
command line or in the interface dialog. After the creation of the model has been
finished, a note box will be displayed.
Working Areas
A working area can be created automatically to allow you to work with the basic
views of the imported model immediately. A rectangular working area will be
created approximately describing the outer dimensions of the model (only the
end points of the shape axes are considered at the calculation).
This is an ideal starting point for the control of the imported model resp. for the
creation of further views.
Page D.7 - 11
Data Exchange
Unknown Designations
As the data in the exchange formats mostly are the used shapes and plates, it is
recommended to provide all existing shape databases correctly. You should do
this above all if you import constructions containing foreign shape series. In
most cases, the interface formats only transfer one shape name as reference;
the actual information on the geometry of the cross-section comes from the
importing program.
ProSteel 3D supports so-called exchange lists to cope with the different
designations. The imported name is translated into a valid ProSteel 3D shape
and the selection of substitute cross-sections is made possible.
If the name does not exist, the shape is considered to be unknown. A dialog
appears where you can assign a ProSteel 3D shape to the unknown shape.
Page D.7 - 12
Data Exchange
General Settings
If the interface dialog is available in the selected import format, it can also
contain a page for “General Settings” apart from the specific pages. This page is
identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the import process. Depending
on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields
are not activated.
Error Report An error report is created during import and model generation.
You can see here which data are defective or which cannot be
evaluated by ProSteel 3D.
If such an error report was created, you can display it by
clicking the ERROR REPORT button in the dialog box.
Working Area A working area of 6 basic views is created with the help of the
outer dimensions of the imported model.
> Name Here, you can indicate the name of the working area. If it still
exists, the new views obtain the index "2".
Connect Continuous shape parts (bars) are connected to a common
shape.
Only those shapes are connected which have the same size
and position, which are situated on a common axis and which
don’t exceed a preset distance of the end points.
> Max. Distance Here, you enter the maximum distance, which is allowed for
the end points to be connected to be recognized as
continuous shape.
Page D.7 - 13
Data Exchange
> Tolerance Value Here, you enter a tolerance for possible deviations of the
gusset coordinates.
This is reasonable when you import data of static analysis programs as these
are generating a system of bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connection)
although in reality it is a continuous shape.
Connecting Shapes
The static program transfers this system as 4 bars of 1-2, 2-3, 4-2 and 5-2. Four
shapes are created first which are connected in the way that there will be one
remaining shape of 1-3 and one of 4-5.
Supposed the fact that bars of 1-2, 2-3, 4-4a and 5-5a were transferred, the bars
4-4a and 5-5a would only be connected to a shape if the distance of 4a to 5a
was smaller than indicated in ‘Max. Distance’ input field.
Page D.7 - 14
Data Exchange
Conversion
If the interface dialog is available in the selected import format, it can also
contain a page for “Conversion” apart from the specific pages. This page is
identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the import process. Depending
on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields
are not activated.
Query At import process, you are prompted for each unknown shape
or material in a dialog so that you can select a replacing
shape.
If this field has not been checked, the unknown shape cannot
be created. However, it might be that certain parts are not
required for very big models. Therefore, a replacement is not
necessary.
Import-Table Here, you see the file name of the currently used exchange
list.
Page D.7 - 15
Data Exchange
This command allows for exporting data of ProSteel 3D into other programs via
an exchange file. In most cases, this data is 3D-models as static analysis
systems or the position and detailing of single shapes.
At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated
in the newly arranged export dialog:
It is, possible that you will already find further formats in your ProSteel 3D
version. The performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree) can
be extended, too. Please refer to the up-dated hints on your installation-CD.
Export Data
When this function is loaded, a file selection dialog opens where you can select
the required interface under File Type. Then, you select the file to be exported.
Depending on the interface, an interface dialog opens where you can make
further specifications concerning the format.
After file selection resp. after confirmation of export process in the dialog, the
model data are evaluated and the data record is created. Depending on the
complexity of the interface and on the volume of the data, this process may take
some time. You are, however, informed about the current state in the AutoCAD-
command line or in the interface dialog. After the creation of the file has been
finished, a note box will be displayed.
Page D.7 - 16
Data Exchange
General Settings
If the interface dialog is available in the selected export format, it can also
contain a page for “General Settings” apart from the specific pages. This page is
identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the export process. Depending
on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields
are not activated.
Error Report An error report is created during exports and file generation.
You can see here which model data cannot be evaluated by
ProSteel 3D for the interface.
If such an error report was created, you can display it by
clicking the ERROR REPORT button in the dialog box.
Nodes Continuous shapes at connections or theoretical points of
intersection with other shapes are divided.
> Protection A possibly existing protection against division at possible
nodes is ignored at export of analysis display.
Since the division is mostly desired, you should deactivate this
option only in exceptional cases.
> Max. Distance Here, you enter the maximum distance, which is allowed for
the end point of a shape towards the continuous shape to be
recognized as shape to be divided.
> Min. Length Here, you enter the minimum length of the bar, which has to
be created by the division. If this length is smaller, a division
will not be made and eccentricities will be determined instead.
Page D.7 - 17
Data Exchange
This is reasonable when you export data to static analysis programs as these
are expecting a system of bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connections)
although in reality it is a continuous shape. As ProSteel 3D of course cannot be
as specialized as a static program, you can switch off this option by this way, if
the static program offers better functions for this purpose.
Analysis Instead of the CAD-position of the actual shape an alternative
static effective line is exported.
This line can be individually adapted for each shape to your
requirements for the transfer of static systems by means of the
‘Analysis Display’ command. You can avoid e.g. open nodes
or eccentricities (due to different insertion levels).
Dividing Shapes
The ProSteel 3D model has the shapes of 1-2, 3-4 and 5-6. The shape of 1-2 is
divided first into two parts of 1-6a and 6a-2.
Another division of the new created shape 1-6a and two other parts 1-4a and
4a-6a is made, if the resulting two bars have at least the same length as
indicated in ‘Min. Bar Length’ input field.
Page D.7 - 18
Data Exchange
Conversion
If the interface dialog is available in the selected export format, it can also
contain a page for “Conversion” apart from the specific pages. This page is
identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the export process. Depending
on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields
are not activated.
Always Flat Steel It is always a flat steel shape, which is exported even if the
type has not been defined as flat steel in the database.
If Unknown A flat steel shape is exported as poly-plate (metal sheet) if the
type has not been defined as flat steel in the data base.
Always Poly-Plate Each flat steel shape is exported as poly-plate (metal sheet).
Query At import process, you are prompted for each unknown shape
or material in a dialog so that you can select a replacing
shape.
If this field has not been checked, the unknown shape cannot
be created. However, it might be that certain parts are not
required for very big models. Therefore, a replacement is not
necessary.
Export-Table Here, you see the file name of the currently used exchange
list.
Page D.7 - 19
Data Exchange
There is a direct data interface to the analysis program for static analysis
calculations RSTAB of Messrs. Ing.-Software Dlubal GmbH which works without
explicit exchange file. The prerequisite is that ProSteel 3D and RSTAB have
been installed and started on the same machine.
Apart from the transfer of the system and of the cross-sections, this exchange
supports a better adaptation of the system to the requirements of static
calculation with RSTAB as well as an intelligent modification mechanism. Only
the corrected cross-sections or insertion points of existing bars/shapes are
transferred so that already assigned data in the other software are kept.
After having selected the command, you obtain a list of the interfaces supporting
the direct exchange. Select the entry 'Dlubal RSTAB' and the dialog for data
export with an RSTAB-extension will be displayed. Since the data exchange is
based on an extension of the ’Product Interface Steel Construction’, please refer
to the corresponding chapters there for further information.
After the transfer was started, RSTAB will automatically report data import. For
more detailed information, please refer to your RSTAB-documentation.
If you want to work with the modification mechanism, don’t forget to save your
model after data export because information is stored in the drawing database.
Import in ProSteel 3D
When you receive RSTAB data, ProSteel 3D will automatically report the data
import.
If you want to work with the modification mechanism, the corresponding
ProSteel 3D model has of course to be open before. On an additional dialog
page for RSTAB data import you can select which modifications have to be
transferred to your ProSteel 3D model.
Page D.7 - 20
Data Exchange
In this chapter, you will find a description of the interface dialogs and
implementation degrees of the different interfaces. Please note, however, that
this is the state at printing of the manual and that your current ProSteel 3D
version can have been extended in the meantime. Please refer to the up-dated
hints o n your installation-CD.
As the implementation degree of import and export can differ from each other,
these areas are treated separately at each interface description. These are data
which can be interpreted or written by ProSteel 3D at the very moment – the
import exchange file might however contain further data which could be read at
a later moment.
Due to their data structure, most of the interfaces support this selective reading
of data. Load data of static programs can e.g. be assigned to an element, the
position in the space as well. If the load data cannot be evaluated, this doesn’t
have any influence on the interpretation of position.
Page D.7 - 21
Data Exchange
The interface format was revised several times in the past. ProSteel 3D is only
supporting the latest valid version.
Data Import
ProSteel 3D is able to evaluate the CAD-system data for standard shapes and
plates, i.e. the position of the parts in the space without detailing processes and
connection elements. Plates, the contours which are transferred as polygons if
displayed correctly. If the shape was, however, created by cuts or similar things,
this information would be lost and only the mostly rectangular basic solid would
be displayed.
In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be read, i.e. the position
of the parts in the space including eccentricities.
After file selection, it is verified whether this is a valid file of this interface. Then
the header area is read and displayed in the appearing interface dialog. The
import can still be interrupted here, if you recognize that the wrong file was
selected.
Click on the OK button of the dialog box to continue the import. The data record
is analysed and the function recognizes itself whether it is a matter of CAD or
static data or whether both data types are together in a common file.
Before the actual model generation will take place, you once again have the
possibility to make individual import settings. You start model generation by
once again clicking the OK button. You could e.g. select which data type has to
be preferred at a common file or whether a working area has to be created, etc.
Page D.7 - 22
Data Exchange
This page shows the entries of the exchange file header and doesn’t accept any
further settings. You can only interrupt the import process if it isn’t the required
file.
Group Others
Ignore Unknown interface commands of the current implementation
degree are ignored and cannot be re-exported. This means
that only those entries remain in the file, which can be
processed by ProSteel 3D.
Page D.7 - 23
Data Exchange
Group Format-Selection
CAD At mixed data, the CAD elements (component parts) are
preferred and any possible static analysis data are only
evaluated as additional information.
Static Analysis At mixed data, the static elements (bars) are preferred and
any possible CAD data are only evaluated as additional
information. This is an option for a later implementation
degree.
Data Export
ProSteel 3D is able to export the CAD-system data for standard shapes and
plates, however without detailing processes and connection elements. A plate
made out of a number of polygons is exported correctly. If different detailing
processes created it, only the basic polygon will be output.
In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be written. Depending on
the settings on the “General Settings” page, it is tried to determine intermediate
gussets for connections and eccentricities.
After file selection, you can enter the header area specifications in the appearing
interface dialog.
Click on the OK button of the dialog box to continue the export. The model is
analysed and the export data record is prepared according to your settings on
the ‘Option’ page. The data then are written in the selected file by once again
clicking the OK button.
Page D.7 - 24
Data Exchange
Output File: You can see the selected output file as this name is entered in
the exchange file.
Input Field Here, you enter the variable header area data or the part code
(authorization).
The authorization is entered in the header area and builds –
together with a time mark – the code for the origin resp. the
modification of a component part.
CAD / Static the model data are exported as CAD system data (component
parts) or as static system (bars).
Mixed A file of CAD and static data is written. The CAD data are
preferred and the static data describe the static system of
these CAD data.
This is an option for a later implementation degree.
Page D.7 - 25
Data Exchange
The file structure follows the example of Windows *.ini files and is mainly self-
explaining. The complete data records are always output serially for each single
component part. References don’t have to be resolved during evaluation. In
addition, references are created by indication to permit this kind of evaluation,
too.
You can obtain a detailed description of the data structure for the development
of your own import routines in your programs at any time you like.
Data Export
Page D.7 - 26
Data Exchange
Group Others
Bolts All bolts existing in the model and being assigned to a group
are output.
Processing the processing of component parts is output.
Apart from that the output is only limited to the position of
shapes and plates as well as to their parts list data to keep the
file small e.g. for mere parts list programs.
Sum up Groups and single parts having the same position number are
summed up to one entry and the corresponding number of
pieces is indicated.
In this case, the exported geometry and drawing data can only
partly be used because they only refer to the first part
acquired by chance. This option is, however, reasonable for
the evaluation of parts list data because it can help to
minimize the data record considerably.
Page D.7 - 27
Data Exchange
The PSB-interface serves for the exchange of models within ProSteel 3D on the
different 3D CAD systems supporting the operation of ProSteel 3D.
Data exchange is based on CAL technology (CAD Abstraction Layer) by
keeping the complete 3D model intelligence (such as e.g. the logical links of
connections).
Data Import
All model data including detailing processes, structures and component part
references (logical links) are entered which are necessary for the assembly of a
complete ProSteel 3D model.
Afterwards, the model can be detailed with the same functionality as if it was
created in the importing system.
Data Export
ProSteel 3D can export the 3D-model data including any detailing processes,
structures and component part references (logical links).
This means that all data necessary for the assembly of a complete ProSteel 3D
model in another ProSteel 3D target system will be sent.
Afterwards, this can be detailed with the same functionality as if it had been
created there.
Page D.7 - 28
Data Exchange
STAAD III-Interface
The STAAD III interface serves for the exchange of static systems between the
programs of STAAD program family and ProSteel 3D. Data can also be
exchanged with any kind of software being able to interpret this format.
The exchange format corresponds to the output file of the graphic editor of this
program family.
Data Import
ProSteel 3D is able to evaluate the static system data for standard shapes, i.e.
the position of the parts in the space including eccentricities. Please note that it
is not possible to interpret all shortened display forms like REPEAT etc. in the
data format of the exchange file. The list shortenings of the form n TO m are,
however, understood.
Data Export
ProSteel 3D is able to export the static analysis system for standard shapes.
Depending on the settings on the page ‘General Settings’, it is tried to determine
even intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities.
Page D.7 - 29
Data Exchange
PXF-Interface
The PXF interface serves for the exchange of constructions between the
programs of REBIS program family and ProSteel 3D. Data can also be
exchanged with any kind of software being able to interpret this format.
Data Import
ProSteel 3D can evaluate the data group 4000 for standard shapes, i.e. the
position of the parts in the space. In addition, general data groups and
coordinates that are necessary for transfer are evaluated.
Data Export
ProSteel 3D is able to export the data group 4000 for standard shapes. In
addition, general data groups and coordinates that are necessary for transfer
are exported.
Page D.7 - 30
Data Exchange
SDNF-Interface
The SDNF interface (Steel Detailing Neutral Format) serves for the exchange of
CAD-data between programs being able to interpret this format. A static analysis
system can of course also be transferred via the shape position.
Data Import
ProSteel 3D is able to evaluate the CAD-system data for standard shapes and
plates, i.e. the position of the parts in the space without detailing processes and
connection elements. Plates, the contours of which are transferred as polygons
are displayed correctly. If cuts or similar things created the shape, this
information would be lost and only the mostly rectangular basic solid would be
displayed.
Data Export
ProSteel 3D is able to export the CAD-system data for standard shapes and
plates without detailing processes and connection elements. A plate made out of
a number of polygons is exported correctly. If detailing processes created it, only
the basic polygon will be output.
In addition, the static analysis system for standard shapes can be written.
Depending on the settings on the “General Settings” page, it has tried to
determine intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities.
Page D.7 - 31
Data Exchange
Input Fields Here, you enter the variable header area data of the
SDNF-file.
Units Here, you can choose the units for the output of length and
coordinate values.
In combination with a suitable exchange list it is thus possible
to create a file with imperial units from a metric drawing file or
vice versa.
Degree of Implementation
Page D.7 - 32
Data Exchange
KISS-Interface
The KISS interface (Keep It Simple Steel) provides for the exchange of parts list
data between programs, which are able to interpret this format. Therefore, only
export is possible here.
Data Export
ProSteel 3D is able to export the parts list data of single parts such as shapes
and plates. Since the KISS format only indirectly supports the group structure,
you can determine the belonging to a certain group by means of dispatch
number, but this is lost in case of similar parts in different groups because each
part is only exported once with its total amount.
Group Others
Customer Here, you enter the variable header area data of the KISS-file.
US-mark Number: The US-mark-number of the corresponding group the part is
assigned to is exported as shipping number. Otherwise, the
position number of the group the part is belonging to will be
exported.
When the component part doesn’t belong to a group, no
shipping number will be exported. When it belongs to different
groups, the selected number of the group which was found
first will be exported.
Page D.7 - 33
Data Exchange
Group Annotation
Note Here you specify which part data have to be exported as note
into the file.
No – A note is not exported.
Note 1 – The content of the note field 1 of the parts properties
is exported.
Note 2 - The content of the note field 2 of the parts properties
is exported.
Group Surface
Surface Here you specify which part data have to be exported as
surface into the file.
No – A surface is not exported.
Note 1 – The content of the note field 1 of the parts properties
is exported.
Note 2 - The content of the note field 2 of the parts properties
is exported.
Page D.7 - 34
Data Exchange
Switches If the switch is checked, the program uses the format default
specified by you. Otherwise, the standard export designation
of ProSteel 3D is used instead.
Input Field 1 Here you specify the format description for the name of the
part.
Input Field 2 Here you specify the format description for the length of the
part.
BUTTON (X) The format default is reset to a given standard value.
All format variables are in round brackets and inside of these brackets, they start
with a $-sign which identifies them as variable. Then the format specifications
for the desired dimension, unit system, display and accuracy follow in exactly
this order.
Accuracy 0..8 number of digits after the decimal point or parts of fraction (1/2n)
Thus, the format variable ($Lif3) means that the length of the part is exported
in inches with fraction display and an accuracy of 1/8 inch, e.g. 10-3/8.
If you require e.g. the specification of a plate with the thickness in inches as
fraction (with an exact accuracy of 1/16 inch) as well as with metric dimensions
for width and length having each one digit after the decimal point in the form
PL3/4x200.0 or for the length 300.0, you have to set the default
PL($Tif4)x($Wmd1) in the first input field and the default ($Lmd1) in the
second input field.
Page D.7 - 35
Data Exchange
CIMSteel/2-Interface
The CIMSteel/2 interface is an internationally used exchange format of structural
analysis and production data which is supported by many other programs as an
industrial standard.
Data Import
ProSteel 3D can evaluate the CAD system data of standard shapes and plates,
i.e. the position of the component parts in the space including detailing
processes such as drill holes or cuts.
In addition, the structural analysis system for standard shapes can be read, i.e.
the position of the component parts in the space including the eccentricities.
Data Export
ProSteel 3D can export the CAD system data of standard shapes and plates,
including detailing processes such as drill holes or cuts.
In addition, the structural analysis system for standard shapes can be written. In
the export dialog, you can previously select whether the complete CAD data
have to be exported or only the structural analysis system.
Degree of Implementation
Page D.7 - 36
Data Exchange
In the following chapter, you will find the description of the interfaces, which
have already been integrated, in ProSteel 3D for quite some time. They cannot
or not yet be controlled via the common import and export dialog. You can reach
these interfaces by their own command names and each single interface has its
own user control, which often differs from the others.
This does not mean that the used file format corresponds to an outmoded state.
The content of the data is always on the latest passed version of the standard
committees. All these formats have proved their worth in practice and are
intensively used there.
Page D.7 - 37
Data Exchange
Using this interface, data can be transferred from the parts lists under ProSteel
3D to a PPS (Productions, Planning and Control) program. The data is
transferred as an ASCII-file.
PPS-data generation is made according to the rules of the DSTV interface
description CAD parts lists issued in November 1997 (3rd. edition).
After having created your 3D-model and carried out positioning (basic
requirement), the PPS data can be generated. Use ProSteel 3D menu item
OTHER / GENERATE PPS-DATA.
Title Block Data Here, the title block data of the data records 1 through 5 of the
PPS file are defined.
Work No. Enter the work no. (max. 2 digits). It will appear in data record
No. 1 of the PPS file.
Order No. Enter the order no. (max. 8 digits). It will appear in data record
no. 2 of the PPS file.
Drawing No. Enter the drawing no. (max. 3 digits). It will appear in data
record no. 4 of the PPS file.
Page D.7 - 38
Data Exchange
Page D.7 - 39
Data Exchange
The material designations correspond to the standard names for data transfer of
steel construction issued in August 1993 (2nd. edition).
Page D.7 - 40
Data Exchange
************************************************************
** PPS-DATA FILE created by ProSteel 3D PPS-MODUL V 1.00**
**
** Time 13:49
** Date 25. 7.1996
**
************************************************************
0&@
1&11
2&2222222
4&33&3
5&gggg
9&&&&&&&&&&&
S&M 16 x 70 DIN 6914&70&40&5000&6&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1
H&FL 120x20&315&120&11&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&6&&1
H&BRFL 160x15&239&160&14&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&4&&1
H&BLECH 8x791x864&864&790&8&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 26.187& 0.416&&&&&&1
H&IPE 240&3481&120&4&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 240x15&309&240&12&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 28.314&&&&&2&&1
H&BLECH 8x488x499&499&488&10&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 7.661& 0.122&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 160x10&698&160&9&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 12.584&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&1030&200&6&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x84x95&95&84&18&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1
S&M 16 x 60 DIN 6914&60&30&5001&12&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x95x168&168&94&15&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x65x114&114&65&17&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.247& 0.003&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&985&200&7&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&280&200&13&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&4&&1
H&HE 200 A&3850&200&2&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 42.300&&&&&9&&1
H&IPE 240&4317&120&1&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1
H&HE 140 A&580&140&5&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 24.700&&&&&1&&1
H&FL 140x20&152&140&16&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 22.022&&&&&4&&1
S&M 16 x 45 DIN 7990&45&20&5002&4&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
Page D.7 - 41
Data Exchange
Using this interface, information from a structural analysis program (e.g. Dlubal)
can be directly transferred into your model, provided that the structural analysis
program is in compliance with the DSTV interface convention Structural Analysis
/ CAD issued in February 1992.
This interface can read and process data as described herein. Please note that
the format mentioned previously does not give port definitions. Only the correct
shapes can be entered in the defined position.
Herein, the bi-directional information flow of the static → CAD → static is
described. At the very moment, only the flow static Æ CAD has been
implemented.
Import File Give full description of the path of the data record to be read in
or select a file by clicking the ’File’ button on the right. Data
records of any static data end with *.sc2.
Export File This option has not yet been implemented.
System Lines All system lines being defined by the data are created. They
are filed in the layer PS_RAHMEN.
Insert Shapes All defined shapes are inserted. First, no optimizing is made.
Collinear shapes of identical type and alignment are not
combined. Such shapes are due to the fact that structural
analysis is made from one junction point to the next, whereas
a shape can stretch over several junction points.
Page D.7 - 42
Data Exchange
Connect Elements This option activates optimizing. Shapes of the same type
and of same position are combined in a way that a shape has
maximum length.
Collinear Tolerance This value in mm indicates up to which distance segments
can be considered as collinear and thus suitable for
connection.
Angle Tolerance This value in degrees indicates up to which angle distance
segments can be considered as collinear and thus suitable for
connection.
Shape Table
Since the shape designations used in the different structural analyses are not
always identical to those used by ProSteel 3D, you will be asked when entering
a file with an unknown designation.
After selection of shape table, the following dialog window opens. Here, you can
manage and delete the entered data, or even enter new data.
Page D.7 - 43
Data Exchange
This interface gives you the opportunity to generate your NC data directly from
within your ProSteel 3D model. For this purpose, the program creates a
manufacturer-independent NC file in ASCII format, which you may use for
further processing with the postprocessor of your NC machine. The generated
NC data are production-means-neutral.
General
The interface uses standardized controls to regulate the link between CAD and
graphics system to the NC controls via the CAM level.
The part’s geometry is made available to the interface regardless of the type of
production operation and then forwarded to the NC machine via the NC
machine-specific postprocessor.
Page D.7 - 44
Data Exchange
NC-Data Output
The following dialog box appears after the command has been selected:
Format Choose the output format. You can either create a format
according to DSTV or a DXF-output for plates.
Order No. Here you enter the max.12 digits of the order number, which
will later be the first entry in the parts description header in the
NC file.
Drawing No. Here you enter the max.12 digits of the drawing number,
which will later be the second entry in the parts description
header in the NC file.
Page D.7 - 45
Data Exchange
Overwrite any existing file with the same name will be overwritten
without asking for confirmation first.
Straight End If this option is activated, every shape, if it is a straight one
with an uncut end, will be turned so that this end is viewed as
the shape start.
Sign This enables you to indicate a signature block.
3D Cuts If this option is activated, 3D cut information is created. This
information consists of a SC record with base on the cutting
plane and the cutting plane perpendicular.
3D Holes If this option is activated, three-dimensional holes are
indicated with one originating point and the perpendicular of
the hole.
Metric Output If this field is checked, the NC-data are principally output in the
metric unit system. Otherwise, the unit system of the current
drawing will be used.
Upper Edge Mod.The output is arranged in a way that the parts are situated as
in the model, i.e. the upper edge is at the top, no matter of the
parts ECS position.
Insert ProSteel The ProSteel 3D header is inserted into the file. There you will
find information about date, etc.
Max. Hole Offset Here, you can indicate a maximum distance of the hole center
to the outer edges of the part (reference area) to the inside, up
to which a hole is still assigned to this view. This may be
important for special shapes.
Shapes as Acis Shapes are converted into an ACIS-model before output.
Plates as Acis Plates are converted into an ACIS-model before output.
INSERT
Click on this button to start the NC-output. You are prompted to select the
parts for which the NC-data have to be generated. After all parts have
been selected, the parts structure is analysed and the corresponding data
records of the NC-file are generated.
Page D.7 - 46
Data Exchange
Sign
Position No. The position number is entered into the signature text.
Send No. The dispatch number is entered into the signature text.
Job No. The order number is entered into the signature text.
Drawing No. The drawing number is entered into the signature text.
Label The shape name is entered into the signature text.
Note The comment row 1 is entered into the signature text.
Input The right input is entered into the signature text.
Position Select the position of the signature text.
Page D.7 - 47
Data Exchange
Text Size Select the text size of the signature text in mm.
Input Field Enter here any additional input text.
DXF Options
You can specify the layer names and the colours for the DXF-output of plates.
Page D.7 - 48
Data Exchange
Page D.7 - 49
Data Exchange
Output Path
Page D.7 - 50
Data Exchange
ST
123
125
3
3
RST_37-2
1
HE200B
I
2980.00
200.00
200.00
15.00
9.00
18.00
61.30
1.15
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
BO
o 492.48o 140.00 22.00 0.00
o 492.48o 60.00 22.00 0.00
EN
Page D.7 - 51
Data Exchange
Page D.7 - 52
E Anhang
Appendix
Appendix
Page E - 2
Structural Element Staircase
Here you see a staircase with intermediate stair head and bent running as
created from a template:
Page E.1 - 1
Structural Element Staircase
Dimensions
Page E.1 - 2
Structural Element Staircase
Landings
Lower Landing The length of the lower stair head. to create the stair head,
you have to check the input field in front of it. Otherwise, the
staircase cheeks are cut at the basic plane and the stair head
is omitted.
Upper Landing The length of the upper stair head
Create No Upper Platform
No landing is created at the upper end of the staircase. The
staircase shapes are cut off perpendicularly.
US-Definition The definition of the landing lengths is made according to
American Standard.
Stair Foot Length Enter the dimensions of the staircase foot. If you enter the
value 0, the staircase cheek directly hits the basic plane.
Page E.1 - 3
Structural Element Staircase
Vertical Section Enter a vertical cut from the front edge of the staircase cheek.
This field is only available if no length was specified for the
staircase foot, i.e. if the staircase cheek directly hits the basic
plane.
Ground Distance Here, you can insert a gap between the staircase foot and the
basic plane, e.g. to have enough space for a completing
construction or for foundations. This field is only available if no
length was specified for the staircase foot, i.e. if the staircase
cheek directly hits the basic plane.
Web Grating Height of the attached gridiron
Side Offset The projection of the attached gridirons beyond the outer edge
of the staircase construction. Negative values decrease the
dimension of gridirons.
Upper Edge Equal
The upper edge of the inserted gridirons are mounted equal to
upper edge lateral parts. The side offset is set to 0.
Platforms
Page E.1 - 4
Structural Element Staircase
Inner Distance Enter the measure between two staircases (including cheek
shapes) if the intermediate stair heads are stair heads for
change over.
Platform No. Select the floor you want to process.
Angle to prev. If you enter an angle here, you can create the bent running of
the staircase or stair heads for change over (180°). Negative
values create an opposite sense of rotation.
Length, Height... Please refer to the figure below for exact meaning of the
distances.
Here you see the most important measures of a staircase with intermediate stair
heads and stair heads for change over (standard version):
Page E.1 - 5
Structural Element Staircase
Shapes
Shape Type etc. Here, you select the shapes for the stair and the stair head
cheeks.
Bolts
Drill Stringer If this field is checked, the stair cheeks are drilled to permit
bolting the steps or the handrail.
Page E.1 - 6
Structural Element Staircase
Bolt .../Handrail If this field is checked, the cheeks and the handrail are bolted,
if a handrail exists. Select the required bolt type in the
selection list.
Bolt .../Step If this field is checked, the cheeks and the steps are bolted.
Select the required bolt type in the selection list.
Steps
Create Steps If this field is checked, the staircase steps are generated.
You can choose between standard steps, shape steps and
block steps. When you have selected shape or block steps,
you can select the shape type or the block in the selection lists
as usual.
Increment Enter the depth of the staircase steps.
b,c,d Distances for the mounting holes of the staircase steps.
b is the distance of the holes from the upper edge of the steps,
c is the height of the fastening of staircase steps, d is the hole
spacing of both mounting holes.
Hole Distance The distance of the axes of the steps’ mounting holes
Hole Dia. The hole diameter of the steps’ mounting holes.
Slot Length The distance of the axes of the rear oblong step hole.
Page E.1 - 7
Structural Element Staircase
Offset The offset of the staircase steps from the front edge of the
staircase to the back. Negative values move the steps to the
front.
Handrail
Height Offset Here, you enter an offset value that moves the handrail from
the upper edge of the staircase cheek to the top. This permits
you to attach a grout or an individual fastening.
Page E.1 - 8
Structural Element Staircase
Connection Here, you specify the bolting of handrail and staircase cheek.
Automatic – The program tries to determine the most suitable
fastening.
Vertical - The handrail is always bolted on the staircase cheek
from above, independently of the settings in the used handrail
template.
By Side – The handrail is always bolted laterally on the
staircase cheek, independently of the settings in the used
handrail template.
Individual – The settings in the handrail template are used.
Side Offset If you enter a value bigger than 0 in this input field, a vertical
connecting plate is inserted between plate and staircase
cheek in case of lateral mounting.
Hand. Template Select the template to be used for the handrail in the selection
list. This template describes the exact structure.
Page E.1 - 9
Structural Element Staircase
Work Frame
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page E.1 - 10
Structural Element Handrail
Dimensions
Connection Height The distance between the drawn polyline and the beginning
of the posts including possible fastening plate.
Railing Height The distance of the upper edge of the newel posts or the
center of the railing head (if in place) measured perpendicular
to the polyline.
Upper Rail... The center distance of the upper knee-high rail (if in place)
measured perpendicular to the polyline.
Middle Rail... The center distance of the middle knee-high rail (if in place)
measured perpendicular to the polyline.
Page E.2 - 1
Structural Element Handrail
Lower Rail... The center distance of the lower knee-high rail (if in place)
measured perpendicular to the polyline.
Handrail Radius Radius of the railing head at the corners of the handrail.
If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are
applied; otherwise a mitred joint is cut.
Knee Rail Radius Radius of the knee-high guardrail at the corners of the
handrail.
If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are
applied; otherwise a mitred joint is cut.
Kick Plate Radius Radius of the baseboard at the corners of the handrail.
If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are
applied; otherwise a mitred joint is cut.
Post Distance The approximate spacing of the rail posts within the individual
polyline segments. Depending on the setting, the program
uses this information to space out the newel posts in regular
intervals and rounds the value up or down as needed.
Maximum: If this button is checked, the values of the determined post
distances are never rounded up. The post distance is
regarded as the maximum value. If necessary, additional
posts are inserted.
Edge Offset: The spacing of the corner posts between two handrail
segments starting with the intersection of the polyline
segments.
Min. Segment The minimum length of a handrail segment from which on
posts are created. Thus you avoid e.g. the creation of posts at
the inner edge of intermediate landings at staircases with
changing direction.
... 2nd Post The minimum length of a handrail segment from which on two
posts are created at the beginning and at the end. If the actual
length is smaller (but larger than the ’Minimum Segment
Length’), only one post will be created in the middle of the
segment.
Start Offset Projection of the knee-high guardrails and the railing head
starting from the middle of the first rail post towards the
outside.
End Offset Projection of the knee-high guardrails and the railing head
starting from the middle of the last rail post towards the
outside.
Connect Sphere Enter the radius of thickening at the intersection points
between the posts and e.g. the knee-high guard rails.
Page E.2 - 2
Structural Element Handrail
Dynamic If this field is checked, you can monitor the modification of the
settings immediately on screen.
Draw Diagonal If this field is checked, a diagonal of the actual structural
element is drawn in the different segments to support an
easier selection.
Example of a
Thickening
Segments
Page E.2 - 3
Structural Element Handrail
Segment Length Defines the length of the different segments. The average
length is taken.
Gap between Indicates the distance from 1 segment to the other.
Distribution Indicates the distribution of the segment lengths along the
overall length of the handrail. Equally means that all segments
have the same length. Adapt First or Adapt Last means that
all segments have the indicated length, but the first or the last
segment is shorter.
Group Segments
A group is created for each handrail segment.
Group Name Specifies the group name of the segment. Variables ($(L),
$(W), $(H)) are allowed, too.
End form
You have the possibility to round off the corners. To do so, you have to define
an end offset in the dimensions. There, you can set the details.
Page E.2 - 4
Structural Element Handrail
Round Edges This option switches on the rounding off of the corners.
Posts Inside If this field is checked, the end posts are moved to the inside
to reduce the dimensions by the value specified as ’Start resp.
End Offset’ in the ‘Dimensions’ dialog.
Radius Enter the radius for rounding off. It can be defined either as
absolute value or as many times the amount of the handrail
diameter. Enter e.g. *2.
Link With Define with which knee-high rail the rounding off has to be
carried out. If you select middle knee-high rail or lower knee-
high rail (if in place) the other knee-high rails will be connected
to this arc.
Shapes
Here you can select the shapes for the individual sections of the handrail.
However, the corresponding section is generated only if checked appropriately
in the check box.
For example, if you would like to generate a handrail with only two knee-high
guardrails, then deactivate one of the three options for knee-high guardrails. In
the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are
available for selection.
If you keep the ALT-key pressed while inserting the shape class or the shapes,
the settings of the previous type will be adopted. This considerably simplifies the
input.
Page E.2 - 5
Structural Element Handrail
Shape Class The settings are valid for the selected shape group.
Shape Class The class or catalogue of the selected shape type.
Shape Size The size of the selected shape.
Shape Type The type of the selected shape.
Angle The rotation around the insertion axis.
Mirror The shape is mirrored before insertion.
Kick plate
You can add a kick plate to the handrail. The kick plate will only be created, if
the Kick Plate field has been checked.
In the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are
available for selection.
Other Side If this field is checked, the baseboard will be inserted at the
other side of the railing posts.
Side Offset You specify the distance of outer edge of railing post and inner
edge of baseboard. This permits you to keep some space for
individual fastenings or grouts.
Page E.2 - 6
Structural Element Handrail
Height Offset The distance between the drawn polyline and the lower edge
of baseboard. Negative values will move the baseboard
towards the bottom.
Connection
Here you select the fastening of the handrail posts. If None is checked, no
fastening will be provided. If Vertical is checked, the plates will be perpendicular
to the post. If Lateral is checked, plates or bent connections will be welded to
the outside of the post.
Page E.2 - 7
Structural Element Handrail
Top Cut Vertical Defines the vertical length of the cut at the top of the post.
Down Cut Defines the horizontal length of the cut at the bottom of the
post.
Down Cut Vertical
Defines the vertical length of the cut at the bottom of the post.
Plate Width Specify the width of the connecting plates.
Plate Length Specify the length (height) of the connecting plates.
Plate Thickness Specify the thickness of the connecting plates.
Hole Dia Enter the diameter of fastening holes.
w (horizontal) Enter the axis distance of fastening holes.
w (vertical) Enter the vertical distance of fastening holes, if you selected
lateral connecting plates. You can thus create a plate with four
holes. If you enter the value 0, only two holes are created.
Side Offset If you enter a value bigger than 0, a perpendicular connecting
plate will be inserted between plate and post. If you indicated
an ‘Inlet Radius’ in addition, the additional plate will be omitted
and the connection will be made as bent post.
Start Radius If you enter a value bigger than 0, the connection will be made
as bent post with perpendicularly welded plate.
Plate Connections
for Handrail Posts
Page E.2 - 8
Structural Element Handrail
Filler Rods
Min. Segment Indicates the minimum segment length from which on web
members will be inserted.
Edge Distance Indicates the distance of the last web members to the
corresponding segment edge.
Intermediate Dist. Indicates the distance of one web member to the other.
Offset Top Indicates the distance to the upper border.
Offset Bottom Indicates the distance to the lower border.
Insert Offset Indicates the horizontal distance to the segment plane.
Insert from Indicates the upper border.
Insert until Indicates the lower border.
On Collision Indicates what has to happen if the web members collide with
other component parts. You can choose between ignore,
penetrate or divide.
Insertion Position Specifies the horizontal insertion position related to the
selected limiting bars.
Cut at Indicates whether the web members have to reach up to the
lower, upper or middle limit edge.
Page E.2 - 9
Structural Element Handrail
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page E.2 - 10
Structural Element Hangar Frame
This function generates a hangar frame from two support members and two
crossbars, which can be connected to one another in different ways.
This requires that you click on the outer edge insertion point of the left and right
vertical frame members.
This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying
your input directly and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the frame can
be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.
Dimensions
Width The width of the hangar frame across outer steel edge.
Ridge Width Enter the roof ridge width into this field if you have selected an
asymmetrical hangar frame.
Centre Height Here you indicate the ridge height of the crossbars. Changing
the value will affect the pitch of the roof.
Dynamic If this field is checked, you can monitor the settings
immediately on screen.
Page E.3 - 1
Structural Element Hangar Frame
Page E.3 - 2
Structural Element Hangar Frame
Shapes
This dialog window is used to select the corresponding shapes for the left and
right vertical frame members as well as the crossbars. If you have selected a
symmetrical hangar frame, the values specified for the left side are applied to
the right side.
Which Shape Here, you can select the shape the settings have to be applied
to. Please note that at ‘Symmetrical’ setting, the right shapes
cannot be set because the values of the left shapes are
applied to them.
Shape Type Here, you select the shape type, normal, special shapes, etc.
Shape Class Here, you select the shape type class or catalogue.
Shape Size Here, you select the shape size.
Alignment Here, you select how the supports have to be inserted related
to the frame.
Page E.3 - 3
Structural Element Hangar Frame
Extend/Trim If this field is checked, the crossbar is cut to the support. You
can specify a distance in the opposite input field.
Angle Cut If this field is checked, the crossbar and the support are cut to
have a mitred joint. You can specify a gap in the opposite
input field.
Haunch If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a frame
haunch. You can select a haunch template in the opposite
input field.
Free Plate If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a plate
connection. You can select a plate template in the opposite
input field.
Align As is If this field is checked, no connections are implemented.
Turn If this field is checked, you can rotate an unsymmetrical plate
provided you have selected ‘Free Plate’ as connection.
Page E.3 - 4
Structural Element Hangar Frame
Apex
This dialog window is used to select the connection type for joining crossbars at
the ridge point.
Angle Cut If this field is checked, the crossbar and the support are cut to
have a mitred joint. You can specify a gap in the opposite
input field.
Free Plate If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a plate
connection. You can select a plate template in the opposite
input field.
Align As is If this field is checked, no connections are implemented.
Turn If this field is checked, you can rotate an unsymmetrical plate
provided you have selected ‘Free Plate’ as connection
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too, you have
the possibility to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. To do
this, select the component part and then select the settings to be applied.
Page E.3 - 5
Structural Element Hangar Frame
Page E.3 - 6
Structural Element Bracing
This function generates a wall bond or bracing. You can select between
varieties of different design variations. Available are shape bracings, tension bar
bracings, as well as pressure pipes. The entire bracing including gusset plate is
generated.
To generate a bracing first place your user coordinates system over the bracing
plane and then calls the function. You are now prompted to click on a system
line of the bracing. Finally, click on both shapes to which the bracing is to be
joined.
The following dialog box appears. The first two folders are the parent folders for
all others; the other folders can be selected according to the desired type of
bracing.
Page E.4 - 1
Structural Element Bracing
Generalities
Shape Selection: Here you indicate the utilized shapes for the bracing bars.
Enter the shape catalogue into the first selection box, the
shape type into the second, and the shape size into the third.
Gusset Plate: These input fields are used to describe the applied gusset
plates.
Plate Thickness indicates the thickness of the gusset plate.
Edge distance you can specify the distance from the outermost edge of the
bracing bar to the boundary edge of the bracing (this is most
often a shape edge).
Round shapes this value is used to round off the length of the shape.
Plate width minimum
the minimum gusset plate width at the shape
Position The position of the gusset plate in reference to the bracing
plane can be specified with the fields Plate Position Front
Edge, Center, and Rear Edge.
Page E.4 - 2
Structural Element Bracing
Form The shape of the gusset plate can be specified with the fields
Gusset Plate Shape.
Cross Bracing: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the shape
of a cross stay. Otherwise, only one bracing bar is added to
the clicked on system line.
Welded Bracing If this switch is checked, the bracing is welded in its entirety.
No borings are added in that case.
Form Group: If this switch is checked, the individual bracing elements are
formed into groups.
Symmetrical: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the form of
a cross stay and remains symmetrical if modified with its grips.
Otherwise, every bar can be changed individually.
No Gusset Plates
If this switch is checked, no gusset plates are created at the
supporting shapes.
Dynamic: If this switch is checked, the bracing immediately depicts the
modifications made in the dialog. If you would like to modify
many values, you can deactivate this option for the time being.
By clicking on this button, you can add additional boundary
edges (lines) for the gusset plate calculation. This method
enables you to lengthen a gusset plate up to the base plate,
for example.
If the vertical of a gusset plate end point cuts this boundary
line, the gusset plate is extended up to this point. Otherwise,
the nearest end point of the line will be accepted.
To add a boundary edge, just click on a line or specify a line
by indicating two points.
To delete an additional boundary edge, just click on this
button.
Page E.4 - 3
Structural Element Bracing
Bolts
Group Bolts
Bolts Specify the bolt type.
Dm Specify the hole diameter.
Work loose Specify the hole work loose.
Group Holes
Here you enter the number of borings and the spacing of the drilled holes to be
observed. You can either specify absolute values or how many times the
amount of the hole diameter. If the entries have to be a multiple of the hole
diameter, put an asterisk (*) in front of the multiplier.
Shape Direction The number of drilled holes in the direction of the bracing bar
(on both ends).
Edge-1st hole the distance from the end of the bracing bar to the first hole
center in the direction of the bar.
Hole-Hole sets the space between the drilled holes in the direction of the
bar.
Nth Hole-Edge The distance from the last hole to the outer edge of the gusset
plate in the direction of the bar.
Cross Direction The number of drilled holes crosswise to the bracing bar.
Distribution The distance between the drilled holes, crosswise to the bar
direction.
Page E.4 - 4
Structural Element Bracing
If you would like to create a bracing from shapes and gusset plates, select the
folder SHAPE BRACING.
Page E.4 - 5
Structural Element Bracing
Page E.4 - 6
Structural Element Bracing
Distance The distance of the batten plates; the program divides the
distances regularly according to this specification and the
values are rounded up or down correspondingly.
Offset In the field Offset, you specify the distance of batten plates
from the shape edges. Positive values decrease the size of
the plate whereas negative values increase it, i.e. the plate
has a projection.
Number The number of bolts which are used to connect each batten
plate with the shapes.
Edge-1st hole The distance from the end of the batten plate to the first hole
center in the direction of the bar.
Hole-Hole The space between the drilled holes in the direction of the bar
Dia Diameter of bolting in the input field Dm
Weld The batten plates are not connected by bolts but by a weld.
Indicate the weld style in the selection list. Indicate the weld
thickness in the input field, if it differs from the default settings
of the style.
Click on this button to process the weld style or to create a
new style.
Page E.4 - 7
Structural Element Bracing
If you would like to create a bracing from tension rods, select the folder Rod
Bracing. You can select a variety of different variations.
Page E.4 - 8
Structural Element Bracing
Turnbuckle
Page E.4 - 9
Structural Element Bracing
Tension Rod
A bracing with a tension rod is generated, which has a welded
on connection element.
The Butt Strap field is used to specify the length of the
connection element.
The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the
connection element.
The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the thickness
of the connection element.
The Bolt Diameter field is used to specify the bolt hole
diameter in the connection element.
The Outer Radius field is used to specify the outer radius of
the connection element.
The Part Description field is used to specify a term for the
tension element to be used with the parts list
Bracing Catalogues
Databases may be generated for the tension elements of all three types. The
terms and dimensions can be loaded from these databases. An additional folder
„Bracing Catalogues” will be displayed where you can select a DBASE-file.
After selection of a valid file, you can choose a tension element for the different
versions from a selection list. This element is defined in the database. The
dialog entries will then be filled with the corresponding values.
Page E.4 - 10
Structural Element Bracing
If you would like to create a bracing from pressure pipes and butt straps, select
the folder Pipe Bracing. You can select a variety of different variations.
Page E.4 - 11
Structural Element Bracing
Butt Strap Offset Specify the overlap length of the pressure pipe and the strap
Shapes: You can select the shapes in the selection lists, if you have
selected 'T-shapes' as butt strap type.
Create Group with Pipe Forms a group out of a bracing.
With Bolts The bolts are inserted into the group.
Group Endplates
You can indicate further specifications for the head plate, if you have selected
'Head Plate' as butt strap type.
Width Enter the width or the diameter of the head plate.
Thickness Enter the plate thickness of the head plate.
Type If the Edge field is checked, a square head plate is created
with the same width as specified under 'Width'.
If the Round field is checked, a round head plate is created
with the same diameter as specified under 'Width'.
If the Use Polyplates field is checked, the head plates are
created as plates.
Assignments
The created component parts can receive different assignments such as
material and so on.
Page E.4 - 12
Structural Element Truss Girder
This function generates a truss girder from the upper and lower cord as well as
the diagonals and many existing intermediate studs. Upper and lower cords can
also be generated from two side-by-side shapes.
This requires that you click on the left and right outer edge of the truss girder,
which then adds the truss to the current plane of the user coordinate system.
This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying
your input directly and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the binder can
be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.
Dimensions
Page E.5 - 1
Structural Element Truss Girder
Shapes
Page E.5 - 2
Structural Element Truss Girder
Shape Offset Select for which shape the settings are valid.
Shape Type Select the shape types to be used.
Shape Class Enter the class or the catalogue.
Shape Size Select the shape size.
Front/Back If these fields are checked, the selected shapes are added to
the corresponding side of the truss girder. For example, you
can also generate a truss girder from two side-by side U-
shaped shapes.
Distances
Top Chord The distance of the upper cord at the rim from the outer edge
of the roof truss (represented with the object frame).
Top Chord Inside The distance of the upper cord in the center of the roof truss
centerline
Bottom Chord The distance of the lower cord at the rim from the outer edge
of the roof truss (represented with the object frame).
Fit Shape Ends If this field is checked, the diagonals at upper/lower cord are
cut to fit.
Page E.5 - 3
Structural Element Truss Girder
Top Diagonal The distance of the diagonal from upper cord, if, e.g.,
connective plates are to be inserted.
Bottom Diagonal The distance of the diagonal from lower cord, if, e.g.,
connective plates are to be inserted.
Fit Shape Ends If this field is checked, any existing intermediate studs at
upper (vertical) or lower cord are cut to fit.
Top Vertical The distance of any intermediate studs from upper cord if
connective plates are to be inserted
Bottom Vertical The distance of any intermediate studs from lower cord if
connective plates are to be inserted
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page E.5 - 4
Structural Element Purlin Course
This function generates a purlin course within a specified plane. For this, you
select the area to be filled by clicking on the left lower and the right upper
corner. The purlins are then inserted into this area with their lower edge flush
with the plane of the current user coordinate system.
An additional application consists of the possibility to insert secondary beams
(joists) within two main girders. For this purpose, you have to finish the input of
area at the first point using ESC. Then, you are prompted to enter the first main
girder, then the second one.
The dimensions for the purlin course then are defined by the end points of the
main girders. In addition, you have the possibility to connect them with each
other by means of a template.
This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying
your input directly and immediately on screen. The spacing of the purlin course
can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its
grips. Diagonals are possible as well.
Page E.6 - 1
Structural Element Purlin Course
General
Angle The purlins are rotated around this angle value, which means
they are arranged in a diagonal fashion.
Height Offset Here, you can move the purlin course in positive Z-direction by
applying the indicated value.
Dynamic If this field is checked, the modifications of the settings can be
monitored immediately on screen.
Symmetrical If this field is checked, modifications of the structural element
will be carried out symmetrically by drawing the grips.
Draw Diagonal If this field is checked, the area to be filled (object frame) is
marked with two additional diagonals.
Cut at Edge If this field is checked, the purlins at the edges of the area to
be filled are cut flush. Values in the fields Left Projection and
Right Projection are then not considered.
Page E.6 - 2
Structural Element Purlin Course
Dimensions
Fixed Grid If the ‘Grid’ field is checked, you can indicate in the
neighboring input field the approximate distance of the purlins
within the area between first and last purlin. The program
divides the distances regularly according to this specification
and the value is rounded up or down correspondingly. The
actual distances then are displayed in the Effective Grid field.
Free Grid If the ‘Grid’ field is not checked, you can freely define the grid
division within the area between the first and last purlin in the
‘Distances’ list. You can vary the number and the distance, as
you like.
Turn The distances are used inverted.
Offset Bottom The distance from the centerline of the lowest purlin to the
outer edge of the selected area.
Offset Top The distance from the centerline of the topmost purlin to the
outer edge of the selected area.
Offsets Fixed If one of these options is activated, the selected distances are
also kept in the grid; otherwise they are centered.
Page E.6 - 3
Structural Element Purlin Course
Offset Left Specify a purlin projection extending past the left outer edge of
the selected area. In case of a diagonal edge, this value
references the centerline of the purlin; negative values shorten
the purlin towards the inside.
Offset Right Specify a purlin projection extending past the right outer edge
of the selected area. In case of a diagonal edge, this value
references the centerline of the purlin; negative values shorten
the purlin towards the inside.
Shapes
Selection Lists Here, you can select the desired shape as usual; all shapes
are available for selection.
Position Indicates the insertion position of the girders related to the
insertion axis.
Mirror If this field is checked, the shape position is mirrored at the
length axis to turn the web side e.g. at U-shapes.
Rotation Specifies the rotation of the shapes around the insertion axis.
Alternatively, you can also use a joist girder instead of a standard shape (see
structural element ‘Joist Girder’) the template of which can be selected on an
additional dialog tab.
Page E.6 - 4
Structural Element Purlin Course
Border Lines
Poly-cut Apart from cutting edges, it is also possible to add sections for
light domes or similar things. The procedure is the same as for
sections; the only difference is that you have to click on a poly-
line here.
Click on this button to add another section.
Page E.6 - 5
Structural Element Purlin Course
Connections
If you have selected alternative insertion on the base of two main girders, the
following page will be displayed in addition:
Which Page Here you select for which side the settings have to be valid.
You can define both sides simultaneously or each single side
individually.
No Connection The parts are only inserted; no connection is created.
Cope The girders are coped. You either select a previously defined
template or the simplified specifications are valid.
Connection If you want one of the following connections, select the
previously defined template.
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page E.6 - 6
Structural Element Ladder
This function is used to create a ladder including its fastening at the wall. In
addition, you can add a safety cage to the ladder.
To do this, just click the left and right insertion point of the ladder and then the
height point (to determine the length) or any other point you like, if the length
has to be determined later.
Then a dialog opens where you can set the specifications by direct monitor
control. The ladder dimensions can be changed at a later time by modifying the
(yellow) object frame using its grips.
Dimensions
Page E.7 - 1
Structural Element Ladder
Distance to Floor The distance between the upper edge of the first rung and the
ground area of the ladder.
Top Distance The distance between the upper edge of the last rung and the
climbing out surface of the ladder.
Offset The height of the help for climbing out related to the climbing
out surface of the ladder (axis measure).
Stringer The depth of the help for climbing out (axis measure)
Sharp Bend The front jump-in of the help for climbing out (axis measure), if
it has to be created with a bend.
Dynamic If this field is checked, you can monitor the modification of
settings immediately on screen.
Diagonal If this field is checked, a diagonal of the actual structural
element is drawn in the ladder to support an easier selection.
Fit… Rungs If this field is checked, the rungs are adapted to the uprights.
Round tubes are e.g. cut with each other.
Page E.7 - 2
Structural Element Ladder
Shapes
Selection Lists Select the shapes of the ladder uprights and rungs as usual.
All shapes are available for selection.
0 Degree You can rotate the shapes around their insertion axis here.
The upright shape can be rotated by increments of 90°
whereas the rungs can be rotated by increments of 45°.
Mirror If this field is checked, the corresponding shape will be
mirrored before insertion.
Page E.7 - 3
Structural Element Ladder
Wall Mounting
You can add a wall fastening to the ladder here. The wall shape is, however,
only created if the Wall Shape field has been checked before.
In the Selection Lists, you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes
are available for selection.
0 Degree You can rotate the wall shape around its insertion axis here by
checking the required angle.
Mirror If this field is checked, the wall shape will be mirrored before
insertion.
Position Select the insertion position of the wall shape.
Inner Edge –The wall shape is inserted at the inner edge of
the upright and shows to the inside.
Centrally –The wall shape is inserted in axis position on the
height of upright axis.
Outer Edge – The wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of
the upright and shows to the outside.
Wall Distance The distance between upright axes and wall surface where the
ladder has to be mounted.
Distance to Floor The distance between the axis of the first wall shape and the
ground area of the ladder.
Page E.7 - 4
Structural Element Ladder
Distance The desired distance of the wall shapes. The program divides
the distances between the first and last wall shape regularly
according to this specification and the values are rounded up
or down correspondingly.
Top Distance The distance between the axis of the last wall shape and the
climbing out area of the ladder.
Safety Cage
You can add a safety cage to the ladder here. The safety cage is only created if
the Safety Cage field has been checked before.
In the Selection Lists, you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes
are available for selection.
0 Degree Here, you can rotate the shape around its insertion axis.
Mirror If this field is checked, the shape will be mirrored before
insertion.
Position Select the insertion position of the wall shape.
Inner Edge –The wall shape is inserted at the inner edge of
the upright and shows to the inside.
Centrally –The wall shape is inserted in axis position on the
height of upright axis.
Outer Edge – The wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of
the upright and shows to the outside.
Page E.7 - 5
Structural Element Ladder
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page E.7 - 6
Structural Element Joist
This function serves for creation of a joist as it is often used in the USA. This
joist is a pre-fabricated element in lightweight construction that is offered in
different executions and lengths.
Dimensions
Page E.8 - 1
Structural Element Joist
Upper Shape Offset Here, you can indicate the upper shape offset above the
selected length for both sides separately.
Lower Shape Offset Here, you can indicate the lower shape offset for both
sides separately.
Dynamic The joist rebuilds the shapes immediately after modifications.
2D Display The joist is depicted as 2D-display. No 3D-shapes are created
or displayed. The display depends on the view direction.
Layout
Layout Here, you can select the kind of layout you want to have. 5
different types are available for selection:
Symmetrical – The layout consists of upper and lower girder
as well as of vertical and diagonal shapes.
Single Lacing – The layout consists of upper and ceiling joists
as well as of single bent intermediate beams.
Double Lacing - The layout consists of upper and ceiling joists
as well as of double bent intermediate beams.
Tension Rods Type1 - The layout consists of upper and ceiling
joists as well as of tension rods.
Tension Rods Type2 - The layout consists of upper and ceiling
joists as well as of tension rods.
Page E.8 - 2
Structural Element Joist
Shapes
Shape Offset Here, you select for which rod area the corresponding settings
have to be valid.
Shape Type Here, you select which shape type is to be used.
Depending on the offset you selected only certain shape types
are available.
Page E.8 - 3
Structural Element Joist
Shape Class Here, you select which shape class is to be used. Depending
on the offset you selected only certain shape classes are
available.
Shape Size Here, you select the desired shape size.
Layout Here, you select which layout you want to have.
Since normally the inner structure of the joist is not interesting,
you can switch off this function.
If you want to have it displayed nevertheless, but you don’t
want to have displayed the individual objects, you can set the
layout to Simple. In this mode, the shapes are displayed as
part of the structural element.
If you want to have displayed all details and you want to
change some shapes, you can select Complete View.
The settings don’t have any influence on the display of the
seats.
Top Seats
Here, you specify the display and the design of the top seats. You can choose
between shapes, plates and seat sockets which can be determined by means of
parameters.
Due to the great number of different designs, it is, however, possible as well to
select the top seat as individual user block and to have designed it here.
Layout Select the design of the top seat here.
Page E.8 - 4
Structural Element Joist
Down Seat
Here, you specify the display and the design of the down seats. For more
detailed information, please refer to the description of top seats.
Page E.8 - 5
Structural Element Joist
User-defined Blocks
You can design both seats and top and bottom chords as user-defined blocks.
In this case, no top or bottom chord shapes are generated, but your individual
blocks are inserted and reslved at the insertion position.
Upper Chords as Blocks You activate the insertion of upper chords as user-
defined blocks.
Connect Shapes If this option has been activated, the corresponding shapes –
if existing – are connected with each other.
Left/Right Here, you select the blocks for left and right side separately.
The same options are available for the selection of user-defined blocks for the
lower chord.
Page E.8 - 6
Structural Element Joist
Seat Blocks
If you have selected the top and down seats as blocks, you can select the
corresponding blocks here.
Page E.8 - 7
Structural Element Joist
Data
Here, you enter the general parts list data of the joist. They will be displayed in
the parts list.
Page E.8 - 8
Structural Element Joist
Database
When a valid database has been entered in the options, you can choose a
previously defined joist from the available values.
Options
Page E.8 - 9
Structural Element Joist
Assignments
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is
possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the
component part and then select the settings.
Page E.8 - 10
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
The most frequent way of selection is to highlight the part(s) and then to open
the context menu by means of the right mouse button. There, you find the option
ProSteel 3D properties. Another possibility is to use the function
PS_PROP_CHECK.
In addition, the COM module ‘Double-Click’ is available as well. You can call the
PS-properties by double-clicking the parts.
No matter which way you choose, ProSteel 3D analyses which parts were
selected and only provides the properties valid for these parts for modification.
Make sure that the desired type of component part has been selected first if you
want to modify several parts simultaneously. This means, if you want to modify
all plates of a model, you have to make sure that the first selected object is a
plate. All other selected elements are filtered accordingly. In this case, you can
e.g. select a plate and then the complete model, and then all component parts
that are not plates are automatically filtered out.
The first group depends on the selected type. The second group is not displayed
if several parts have been selected and depends on the processing actions
included. The third group is generally displayed for all elements.
Page E.9 - 1
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
E.9.1 Shapes
Layout
Use this dialog to modify the display of shapes individually. At insertion, the
shapes obtain the settings that were made and can be overwritten individually.
Page E.9 - 2
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Page E.9 - 3
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Shape Type
Here, you can modify the shape type of one or several shapes.
Treat As Singl… If you have selected a combi shape or a weld shape, you can
specify whether the individual components have to be treated
as single parts. The same is valid if the shape has not yet
been exploded.
Page E.9 - 4
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Insertion Point
Use this dialog to specify the insertion or reference axis. You can select the
desired points in the preview.
Select Line Here, you specify whether the insertion point or the reference
axis has to be set. As long as a reference axis doesn’t exist,
this option cannot be accessed.
X-Offset X value of insertion
Y-Offset Y value of insertion
Rotation Angle Input value for rotation
+Phi The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by the
input value.
-Phi The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by the
input value.
+90 The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by +90
degrees.
-90 The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by -90
degrees.
Page E.9 - 5
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Data
This dialog is used for management of non-graphical properties.
Name The name of the shape for parts list and output.
Material The material of the shape for parts list and output.
Note1 The blank note 1 field.
Note2 The blank note 2 field
Pos No. The position number of the shape
Page E.9 - 6
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Values
This dialog is used for management of non-graphical properties.
Page E.9 - 7
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Page E.9 - 8
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Conical
Depending on the selected shape, this dialog can look different. This is the
dialog of a standard shape.
For weld shapes, the slope can also be defined via the climb. It is, however, also
possible to indicate starting and end height. In addition, some tools are available
to manipulate the cross-section or to realize a cross-section that changes
several times.
Page E.9 - 9
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Page E.9 - 10
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Bottom Fl. Start The projection of the bottom flange at the starting point of the
shape is indicated.
Bottom Fl. End The projection of the bottom flange at the end point of the
shape is indicated.
Top Flange.Start The projection of the upper flange at the starting point of the
shape is indicated.
Top Flange. End The projection of the upper flange at the end point of the
shape is indicated.
This button permits the management of the flange thickness
table. Using this table, you can assign different widths and
thicknesses to individual segments of the shape.
The following dialog appears:
Upper and bottom flange are considered separately. The indication of the flange
refers to the number of flanges from the starting point per side.
It is recommended to edit the thicknesses after having determined the bend
points. A modification of the form by insertion or deletion of points modifies the
table as well because the number of flanges is modified.
Page E.9 - 11
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Static View
If the static view has been activated in the global settings, the static values are
displayed in the dialog. For a more detailed description of the options please
refer to the chapter Static View.
Bend
If the selected shape is an arc shape, this dialog is additionally displayed.
Page E.9 - 12
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Shortening
Page E.9 - 13
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
E.9.2 Plates
Layout
Use this dialog to modify the depiction of plates individually. At insertion, the
plates obtain the settings that were made and thus can be overwritten
individually.
Page E.9 - 14
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Position
Use this dialog to specify the plate position related to the insertion point and to
the insertion plane.
Page E.9 - 15
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Insert Edge The edge at which the plate is inserted related to the ECS
plane.
X-Offset X- Offset related to the insertion point.
Y-Offset Y- Offset related to the insertion point.
Rectangular The rectangular basic form of the plate is kept, and you cannot
change it into another form using the grips. If this option is
deactivated, you cannot reset it.
Symbol Direction Size Specifies the size of the symbol direction on plate grids.
Data
Name The name of the plate for parts list and output.
Name The final name built according to the settings with dimensions.
Material The material of the plate for parts list and output.
Page E.9 - 16
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Values
This dialog is used for management of non-graphical properties.
Page E.9 - 17
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Page E.9 - 18
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
E.9.3 Bolts
Layout
Use this dialog to modify the depiction of bolts individually. At insertion, the bolts
obtain the settings that were made and the selected bolt style; thus they can be
overwritten individually.
Page E.9 - 19
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Mounting Space The assembly room is displayed as well. It mainly serves for
verifying whether an assembly is possible. Individually
specifies whether the mounting space has to be read out of
the bolt style.
2D The bolt is depicted as 2D-symbol.
Transparency The part is displayed transparent at shading.
Countersunk The bolt is displayed as countersunk bolt.
Hexagon Socket The bolt is executed as hexagon socket.
Mounting Bolt The bolt is checked as assembly bolt, in contrast to workshop
bolts. This has an influence on the assembly parts list.
Bolt The bolt is depicted.
Washer The lower washer is depicted.
Nut The nut is depicted
Lock Nut The safety nut is depicted
Tapered Washer The tapered washers are activated, but not displayed. They
serve as basis for the parts list entries. You can choose
between U- and I-form washers.
2nd Washer The 2nd washer is depicted.
2nd Tapered… The 2nd tapered washer is depicted.
The insertion direction of the bolt is turned.
Page E.9 - 20
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Data
Name The name of the bolt for parts list and output.
Material The material of the bolt for parts list and output.
Style The assigned bolt style
Note1 The blank note 1 field
Note2 The blank note 2 field
Pos No The position number of the bolt
Ship.No. Shipping number; can be used alternatively or additionally to
the position number
Item Item number of the shape
Number The number of bolts for this element. Normally this is
always 1.
Total This is the number of parts of this position number in the
model. This value is only correct after positioning.
Page E.9 - 21
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Values
Page E.9 - 22
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
2nd Washer The 2nd washer is listed in the parts list as single data record,
if desired.
2nd Tapered… The 2nd tapered washer is listed in the parts list as single data
record, if desired.
Pre-Tension The pre-tension of the bolt in %
Page E.9 - 23
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Layout
Please refer to the section about the shapes for the individual descriptions of
these setting options.
Data
The parts list data of these component parts are identical with the parts
described until now. Please refer to the above chapters for the description of the
different fields.
Page E.9 - 24
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Values
The parts list values of these component parts are identical with the parts
described until now. Please refer to the above chapters for the description of the
different fields.
Page E.9 - 25
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Special parts are drawing elements with special properties added by ProSteel
3D. You can edit these properties using this dialog for their being correctly
displayed in the parts list.
Page E.9 - 26
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
In the case of work frame objects, you can modify the properties of the complete
object according to the options described in the manual. Please refer to the
corresponding pages of this manual.
In the case of structural elements, you can modify the properties of the complete
object according to the options described in the manual. Please refer to the
corresponding pages.
E.9.8 Roof/Wall-Objects
Please refer to the corresponding chapter of this manual where the modification
of roof/wall-objects is described.
The properties of label objects such as position flags, elevations, weld marks,
manual dimensioning objects and benchmark can also be set specifically for
each component part.
Please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual where the setting of a
drawing parts list and of a drawing containment list is described.
Page E.9 - 27
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
E.9.11 3D Modifications
Page E.9 - 28
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Boolean Operations
Use this option to modify or delete the Boolean operations included in the part.
Page E.9 - 29
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Facet
Use this option to edit the chamfers included in the part. The dialog is analogous
to the Plate Editor. Please refer to this chapter for the description of the
different processing parameters.
Page E.9 - 30
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Use this dialog to process and delete flat cuts (diagonal cuts) included in the
component part.
Page E.9 - 31
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
E.9.13 Poly-Cuts
Page E.9 - 32
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Here, you can modify the edge properties of plates. Please refer to the
corresponding chapter in this manual for the settings.
Page E.9 - 33
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
E.9.15 Notches
Use this dialog to modify the properties of the currently selected notch.
Page E.9 - 34
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
In this section, you will find a description of the general parts properties. The
properties described here are not always completely available, but are only
displayed if required.
Group
In this dialog the data of the group are listed to which the component part in
question belongs.
Page E.9 - 35
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Logical Links
In this dialog, the logical links of the part are listed.
Page E.9 - 36
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Assignments
Use this field to make the assignments to the drawing object. These
assignments may differ from one part to the other. They are however described
in the corresponding chapter.
Detail Style Here, you can assign a detailing style to the part.
Display Here, you can assign a display class to the part.
Area Class Here, you can assign the part to an area class that you
created before.
Parts Family Here, you can assign the part to a part family (e.g. support or
girder).
Page E.9 - 37
ProSteel 3D Properties Dialogs
Page E.9 - 38
ProSteel 3D Command Reference
Here, you will find a short survey how you can call the ProSteel 3D functions
documented in the manual using AutoCAD.
2D
2D-Cut Out C.16 PS_CUT_OUT
Automatic 2D-Cut C.18 PS_ADD_2DCUT
Manual 2D-Cut C.11 PS_MAN_CUT
3D
3D-Modifications B.11 PS_MODIFY
Create 3D-Extrusion Solid B.10 PS_SOLID_EXTRUDE
Create 3D-Solid B.10 PS_SOLID_HULL
Create 3D-Cone B.10 PS_SOLID_CONE
Create 3D-Conic Pipe B.10 PS_SOLID_CONICPIPE
Create 3D-Sphere B.10 PS_SOLID_SPHERE
Create 3D-Cuboid B.10 PS_SOLID_BOX
Create 3D-Cross-section transition B.10 PS_SOLID_RECT2CIRCLE
Create 3D-Rotation Solid B.10 PS_SOLID_ROTATE
Create 3D-Torus B.10 PS_SOLID_TORUS
Subtract 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_SUB
Add 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_ADD
Intersection 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_COMMEN
Subtract Intersection 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_COMMEN_SUB
Create 3D-Cylinder B.10 PS_SOLID_CYLINDER
A
Measure Distance B.2.2 PS_CONST_MSE
Create ACIS-Solid D.5.5 PS_CREATE_ACIS
Create ACIS-Solid (Batch) D.5.5 PS_BATCH_CREATE_ACIS
Convert ADT-Shapes D.5.7 PS_CONVERT_ADTSHAPES
Page E.10 - 1
ProSteel 3D Command Reference
Page E.10 - 2
ProSteel 3D Command Reference
F
Face View B.3.2 PS_FACE_VIEW
Face UCS B.3.2 PS_FACE_UCS
Free View B.3.5 PS_FREEVIEW
Groundplates B.17 PS_GROUNDPL
G
Insert Gratings B.9.3 PS_PLATE
Global Settings A.5 PS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS
Global View B.3.3 PS_GLOBAL_VIEW
Global Scale C.9 PS_SCALE
H
Elevations C.13 PS_KOTE
K
Bend Edged Plates B.9.4 PS_PLATE
Gusset Plates B.22 PS_GUSSET_PLATE
Collision Check D.5.1 PS_COLLISION
Construction Lines B.2.1 PS_CONST
L
Butt-Joint Connection B.20 PS_LASCHE
Layer Functions B.1 PS_LAYER
M
Manual Dependency of Part C.8 PS_MANUAL_LINK
Manual Dimensioning C.12 PS_DIM
Manual 2D-Shortening C.15 PS_SHORT2D
N
Benchmark C.6 PS_BENCHMARK
O
Object View B.3.1 PS_OBJ_VIEW
Object-UCS B.3.1 PS_OBJ_UCS
Page E.10 - 3
ProSteel 3D Command Reference
P
Perspective View B.3.7 PS_PERSP
Purlin Connection B.21 PS_PURLIN_CONN
Display Pickhelpers C.1.5 PS_PICKHELPER
Insert Plates B.9 PS_PLATE
Plate Editor B.12 PS_PLATE_EDITOR
Rounding off Plate Edge B.12.2 PS_BEND_EDGE
Chamfer Plate Edge B.12.2 PS_CHAMFER
Positioning B.27 PS_POS
Insert Shapes B.8 PS_INS_PROF
Add Shape Segment B.8.5 PS_ADD_SECTION
Display Program Version A.1.2 PS_VERSION
Project Management A.4 PS_PROJECT
Process Status B.5.6 PS_PROCESS_STATUS
R
Regenerate B.5.2 PS_REGEN
Clean AutoCAD-Drawing D.5.6 PS_CLEAN_PROXY
Clean AutoCAD-Drawing (Batch) D.5.6 PS_BATCH_CLEAN_DWG
Stiffeners B.15 PS_RIP
Tubes Unwind D.5.3 PS_UNWIND
S
Shear Plates B.19 PS_SCHEARPLATE
Cut Plane B.3.6 PS_CUTPLANE
Bolts B.14 PS_BOLT
Weldmarks C.14 PS_WELD
Calculate Center of Gravity D.5.2 PS_WEIGHTCENTER
Visibility Classes B.5.3 PS_HIDE_CLASS
Special Shapes D.1.2 PS_CREATE_SOPRO
Special Parts D.1.1 PS_CREATE_SPEZPART
Page E.10 - 4
ProSteel 3D Command Reference
Page E.10 - 5
ProSteel 3D Command Reference
Page E.10 - 6
E.11 Own Notes